Ingeteam PL70 Protection Instruction Manual
PL70 Protection is a comprehensive electrical protection device designed for use in various applications. It is a versatile device that can be configured to meet the specific needs of your project. The manual provides all the information you need to install, configure and operate the device.
Advertisement
Advertisement
PL70 PROTECTION
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
UME_PL70_eng Rev.: K (06/11)
© All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced by whatever means, without the prior written permission of
Ingeteam Technology.
Ingeteam Technology reserves the right to make any changes without prior notice.
INDEX
3.6 Other configuration settings
3.6.1 Accessible via the keyboard/display and the Protections Console
3.6.2 Accessible only via keyboard/display
.................................................................. 52
4.1.2 Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
4.1.3 Timed phase inhibition setting (4 tables)
............................................................. 54
4.2.2 Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
4.2.3 Timed neutral inhibition setting (4 tables)
............................................................. 56
................................................................................................. 56
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual III
INDEX
4.4.2 Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
4.4.3 Timed sensitive neutral inhibition setting (4 tables)
............................................................. 58
.................................................................................... 59
4.8 G1 overcurrent protection (50/51G1)
4.12 Phase characteristic control by voltage (function 51V)
4.13 restricted EARTH protection (neutral differential 87N)
....................................................................................... 65
....................................................................................... 66
4.14.2 Settings (table 0, single)
4.15 Isolated neutral protection
4.19 MAXIMUM Zero sequence voltage protection
4.19.1 Settings range (4 tables)
4.20.2 Frequency rate of change
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual IV
INDEX
4.22.3 Function limitations with the frequency
4.26.5 Voltage presence detector
4.26.7 Phase current passover detection
4.26.8 Neutral fault passover detection
4.27.2 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0 (V0)
.................................................................................... 98
4.28.2 Settings range (4 tables)
4.28.3 Coil monitoring example
4.29.2 Settings range (4 tables)
4.30 Breaker failure protection
4.30.2 Settings range (4 tables)
4.31.4 Breaker failure with low load or neutral
5.1.3 Settings range (4 tables)
5.1.4 Trip enabling (4 tables)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual V
INDEX
7.3.2 Measurements in the primary
7.4 Historical measurement report
7.4.2 Settings range (4 tables)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual VI
INDEX
XI.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual VII
INDEX
XX.5.3 Tests with/without reference voltage
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual VIII
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The PL-70 family units are numerical multi-function protection relays and they constitute the basic protection, measurement and control element for cogeneration facilities or for HV/MV electrical bays. They may be employed as a self-standing protection, control and measurement elements for an electrical bay or integrated into an Integrated Protection and Control System.
The range includes various families that differ to each other in terms of hardware and functionality. The Firmware is common to all the models; the available functions for the user in each model are defined in a programmable logic circuit (PLD). The
Firmware can be loaded into the units through the serial port, thus facilitating the updating of versions.
1.1 SCOPE OF THE MANUAL
This manual does not correspond to any one specific PL70, but rather is applicable to all the available families. Only the physical characteristics and functions of each individual model are covered. The manual consists of two volumes: the first contains the information regarding configuration, functions etc., and the second contains the following appendixes: curves for the operation of the timed functions, communication protocols, keyboard/display menu structure, etc.
Additionally, ach unit is supplied with a summarized “Characteristics sheet”, which details the functions of the specific model and its interconnections diagram.
1.2 FUNCTIONS
Protection
The following table shows the protection functions incorporated into each family.
Functions
50/51
50 HIGH1
50/51 HIGH2
49
46, 46FA
50/51N
IT IS IA ID IP NT IM RT FI TH TF TT SV SY PC PO IV MO CT SC RS RC
X X X X X X X*
O O
O O
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X X
X X*
50N HIGH1 O
50/51N HIGH2 O O
50/51NS
50NS HIGH1
X X
O
50/51NS HIGH2 O O
50/51R X X
50/51N2
X
X X
X X
X*
50/51N3
51V
50BF
87N
67N
67NA
CLP
X X
O O
X
X
X
X X X X X X
X X
79
27
59
47
78
25
81
81R
64/59N
40
O O
24
32
51RB,37,48,66
37 2 Levels X X
X
X X X X
X X X
X X
X
X X X
X
X
X X X
X X
X
X
X
X X
O
X
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 9
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Functions
DPF
IT IS IA ID IP NT IM RT FI TH TF TT SV SY PC PO IV MO CT SC RS RC
X X X**
DPF Directional
Autom. Sect.
Slack spring X
X
X
X
X
X X**
Note 1: X: Available function
Note 2
O: Optional function
IT and IS family: The 50/51N and 50/51NS functions are effected on the neutral measurement, in the case of the IT family, and on the sensitive neutral, in the case of the IS family.
Note 3:
RC Family: The 50/51N and 50/51NS functions are performed on the neutral measurement.
Note 4: *: Unit in reconnector mode.
Note 5
**: Unit in breaker mode.
Note 6
IT and IS family: The 50/51N HIGH2 and 50/51NS HIGH2 functions are effected on the neutral measurement, in the case of the IT family, and on the sensitive neutral, in the case of the IS family.
Automatisms
Functions depending on model
The three-phase recloser, as shown in the functions table, is optional in IT and IS families.
Breaker automatism. Available in SC and RS families.
Measurements
Measurements IT IS IA ID IP NT IM RT FI TH TF TT SV SY PC PO IV MO CT SC RS RC
IA X X X X X X X X X X X X X
IB X* X* X X X X
IC
IN
INS
IN2
X X
X
X X
X
X X X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
IN3
VA
VB
VC
V comp
VN X X
X
X
X X X X
X X X X
X
X
X X
X X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
X
Note 1 IT and IS family: If the adjustment of current phase B is calculate, the measure B made with the measures of transformers A, C and neutral, regardless of what is injected into the transformer B. If the setting is transformer, the measure of phase B it will be injected into the transformer B.
Data acquisition
Event recording
Fault recording
Maximum and minimum measurement recording
Oscillograph data recorder (available as option)
Other characteristics
Settings tables. Except for the configuration settings, which are single table settings, there are 4 tables for the various setting tables (available as option); one of these tables is active or operative at any given time. The active table can be selected by an order sent via keyboard/display (in “Change settings”), by an order sent via a message from the
Protection Console, or by the activation of a digital input.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 10
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.3 SELECTION OF OPERATING MODE BREAKER / RECLOSER (RC FAMILY)
The RC family allows two operating modes:
Breaker mode:
In this mode, the current passover detection functions are operative (if enabled). It does not require any type of protection or recloser. The (“R) key’s control and operating orders corresponding to the recloser are not operative.
Reconnector mode
In this mode, the unit carries out protection functions (if enabled) and the recloser function is operative (if enabled). The current passover due to fault detection functions are not operative in this mode.
There are three ways to switch from one mode to another:
Through the digital input programmed as "Protections in service / out of service". This input is activated by flanks. If it detects a rising slope, the unit is configured as a reconnector. If it detects a new rising slope, it is configured as a breaker.
By means of a control order. There are 2 control commands that configure the unit as a recloser or as a breaker.
By pressing the key ("P"), the unit switches from one mode to another.
The mode settings are stored in a non-volatile memory. Therefore, when the unit is switched on once again it starts in the mode in which it was operating prior to being switched off.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 11
1.4 MODEL CODING
The following models are defined within the PL70 protection family:
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 12
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.5 USER INTERFACE
Local. The front board is equipped with
4-key keyboard (10 keys in SC, RC, RS and CT families)
2-row (8-characters per row) display
6 red LED and one green/red LED
RS232 connector for direct connection with a PC. Procome protocol.
The front communication port has a temporary use, both for start-up and for maintenance. Maximum cable length 2m.
Remote. Depending on the model, the rear board has one or two Glass Fibre Optic (ST type connector), Plastic Fibre
Optic, RS232 or RS485 ports for connection to PC, modem or Substation Control Unit (in Integrated Systems). The protocol can be Procome, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC 870-5-103. In the SC and CT families, the available protocols are Gestel, PID1, SAP20, DNP 3.0 and IEC-101.
Models equipped with an Ethernet (RJ45) port, Procome TCP/IP protocol and, for SC, RC, RS and CT families, IEC-104
TCP/IP are available.
1.6 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
The different Hardware options available for the specific models are as follows:
Terminals:
Torque of terminals mounted on the rear panel.
Supply terminals
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)
Maximum: 0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)
I/O terminals:
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)
Maximum: 0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)
Current and voltage terminals (plug-in connector)
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)
Maximum: 0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)
Current and voltage terminals (closed terminals)
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)
Maximum: 1.3 Nm (12 in-lb)
Terminal wiring
The terminal cables must be made of single-section copper AWG 12 to 18 (4 mm 2 to 0.8mm2)
Supply terminals
Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
I/O terminals:
Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
Current and voltage terminals
Section AWG 12 cables (4 mm2)
RS family voltage terminals
Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 13
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Unit power supply voltage
125/220 Vdc
24/48 Vdc
12 Vdc
220 Vac
Digital input voltage range
Extended (high 125/220 Vdc): 86 to 280 Vdc. Inactive below 60 Vdc
Extended (low 24/48 Vdc): 20 to 160 Vdc. Inactive below 13 Vdc
12Vdc: 9 to 24 Vdc Inactive below 7 Vdc
Number of digital inputs/outputs
Standard:
2 inputs (all independent)
6 outputs (5 independent, 1 switched)
Extended: add to the standard
6 inputs (all independent)
5 outputs (all independent)
Note: RS family is always equipped with an expansion card, 6 inputs (all independent).
Rear communication
All possible combinations. A COM1 port is necessary for the existence of a COM·2 port.
In the case of two rear ports, the second port is in parallel with the front RS232 (they occupy the same port).
Analogue inputs
The unit can have up to 4 analogue inputs (through transformer).
The RS family is equipped with 6 analogue inputs (through transformer).
The position of each metering transformer can be checked in each family’s corresponding wiring diagram.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature
24-48 Vdc supply units
125-220 Vdc supply units
12 Vdc supply units
220 Vac supply units
-20º to 65ºC
-20º to 60ºC
-20ºC to 70ºC
-20ºC to 70ºC
The LCD contrast is not operative at temperatures below -20º and above 70ºC.
Storage temperature -40 to 85 ºC
Relative Humidity Up to 95% without condensation
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 14
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.8 TESTS
Electrical tests
Dielectric rigidity
Insulation resistance
Pulse (shock wave)
HF disturbances
Fast transients (bursts)
Electrostatic discharges
Voltage pulses(surge)
Micro-cuts acc / IEC255-5, class III (2 kV, 1 minute) acc /IEC 255-5, >10 Giga-ohms at 500 Vdc acc / EN -255-5-5, class III acc / IEC -255-22-1, class III acc / IEC 61000-4-4, class IV acc / IEC 61000-4-2, class IV acc / IEC 61000-4-5, class IV acc / IEC 61000-4-29, 100ms at 125 Vdc
Radiated electromagnetic interference acc / EN 55011
Immunity to radiated fields acc / IEC 61000-4-3, class III
Immunity to conducted radiofrequency acc / IEC 61000-4-6, class III signals
Immunity to low frequency radiated fields acc /lEC 61000-4-8.
Environmental tests
Cold
Dry heat
Damp heat
Thermal shock
Operating range
Mechanical tests
Vibration tests
Shock and bump tests acc /lEC 68-2-1, (-40°C) acc / IEC 68-2-2 (+85ºC) acc / IEC 68-2-3 (+70ºC, 93% Relative humidity) acc / IEC 68-2-14 (-20º/70ºC. 2 4-hour cycles)
-10ºC to 55ºC acc / IEC 255–21-1 class II acc / IEC 255-21-2 class I
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 15
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.9 WIRING DIAGRAMS
All the figures below show only one of the possible digital input and output programming options (very simple). Consult the other options in the “Digital input programming” and “Digital output programming” sections.
The phase sequence order is programmable by keyboard/display. (See “Other settings”- “Special settings”).
IT Family
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 16
IS Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 17
ID, IA Families
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 18
IP Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 19
NT Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 20
IM Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 21
RT Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 22
FI Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 23
TH Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 24
TF Family
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 25
TT and SV Families
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 26
SY Family
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 27
PC Family
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 28
PO Family
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 29
IV Family
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 30
MO Family
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 31
CT Family
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 32
SC family (without input for capacitive splitter)
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 33
SC family (with input for capacitive splitter)
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 34
RC family
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 35
RS family (with input for capacitive splitter)
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
The terminal numbers indicated in the previous wiring diagrams is applicable to units both with pin-type terminals and with closed terminals.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 36
Block diagram
20BGENERAL DESCRIPTION
Note: The number of transformers and squared wave generators depends on the family
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 37
21BHARDWARE
HARDWARE
1.10 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
External dimensions
1.11 REAR TERMINALS
Standard (all for pin-type terminals)
Option with closed-type terminals for analogue inputs
With digital I/O extension board Without digital I/O extension board With digital I/O extension board Without digital I/O extension board
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 38
21BHARDWARE
1.12 REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORTS OPTIONS:
Single output
FO (glass or plastic) RS485 RS232 RJ-45
Double output
Below there is an example of double port. Any combination is possible, with a sole exception: a COM1 must exist in order for a COM2 to exist.
O
FO + FO
1.13 RS485 CONNECTION BETWEEN VARIOUS UNITS
Although the unit has an internal connection between pins 1 and 2 and between pins 3 and 4, if a connection is made on the bus side, as shown in the figure, a unit can be removed without causing a loss in the chain continuity.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 39
1.14 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION
Ethernet GFO
The characteristics of the optical channels are as follows:
Operating speed:
Connector:
Optical transmitter:
ST
LED
100Mb
Optical receiver:
Optical output:
Photodiode PIN
Without modulation
Glass λc = 1300nm Working wavelength:
BER
Multimode glass fibre optic:
δ10 -9.
62.5/125µm.
The values contemplate a temperature range of -20ºC to +85ºC.
Loss according to fibre type
Maximum permitted losses
Glass 62.5/125µm 8 dB
Losses Km Losses connection
4 dB 0.5 dB
The maximum transmission distance is determined by:
-{}-
l
=
PP
−
PC
∆
−
ME
PP= Losses permitted in the connection
PC= Losses resulting from insertion of additional connections
ME= Ageing margin. 3 db should be considered
∆= Cable attenuation in db/Km
Maximum reachable distance:
In worst conditions
Glass 62.5/125µm
1.25 Km
In best conditions
2 Km
Ethernet via RJ45 cable
600 ohm impedance isolated transformer interface
500 V insulation
RJ45 connector (female)
Baud rate: 10/100 Mbps.
Cable type: Shielded
Cable length: 100 m max.
21BHARDWARE
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 40
21BHARDWARE
1.15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Auxiliary power supply voltage
Power supply technical data:
Auxiliary power supply
220 Vac
Range
Ripple
12 Vdc
Range
Ripple
24-48 Vdc
Range
Ripple
125-220 Vdc
Range
Ripple
Burden
Burden
176-264 Vac
20 % over the rated current
9-17 Vdc
20 % over the rated current
19-58 Vdc
20 % over the rated current
86-280 Vdc
20% over the rated current
7W min/ 12W max
The units have been designed to be installed and run in environments equipped with a safe and stable direct current supply. The switched, high-capacity power supplies can be used with alternating current within the following limits:
From 9 to 17 Vdc peak values for the 12 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 7 Vac to 12 Vac RMS approximately.
From 19 to 58 Vdc peak values for the 24-48 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 14 Vac to 41 Vac
RMS approximately.
From 18 to 280 Vdc peak values for the 110-125-200 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 70 Vac to
195 Vac RMS approximately.
These units’ digital inputs are designed to pick up signals in direct current and within specified ranges
The digital outputs can operate both in DC and in AC power supply systems.
The units have been tested and certified to IEC standards for installation and operation in direct current systems. They have not been tested to AC equipment standards.
Output contacts
Relays 1 to 5:
Carry (permanent) 5 A (at 25 ºC)
Make (0.5 s)
Breaking capacity (with resistive load)
30 A at 220 Vdc: at 125 Vdc: at 48 Vdc:
Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)
0.4 A
1 A
3 A at 220 Vdc: at 125 Vdc: at 48 Vdc:
0.2 A
0.5 A
0.5 A
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 41
Relays 6 to 11:
Carry (permanent) 5 A (at 25ºC)
Make (0.5 s)
Breaking capacity (with resistive load)
30 A at 220 Vdc: at 125 Vdc: at 48 Vdc:
Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)
0.15 A
0.4 A
2 A at 125 Vdc: at 48 Vdc:
0.3 A
0.5 A
Optoisolated digital inputs
Extended range:
High: operating range 86 to 280 Vdc (inactive below 60 Vdc)
Low: operating range 20 to 160 Vdc (inactive below 13 Vdc)
Burden: < 3 mA
IRIG-B input
Demodulated input, TTL level
Cable type: 2 shielded, twisted wires
Insulation: 500 V
Connections:
21BHARDWARE
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
PL70 UNIT
PL70 UNIT
PL70 UNIT
42
21BHARDWARE
The input circuit is a 390 ohm serial resistance with an opto-isolator; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA.
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator depends on the output current supply capacity; a typical value is 70 mA, which would enable the connection of 6 units (although the length and the type of cable can also influence). The cable must be shielded and twisted.
Phase and neutral current circuits (single rated current 1/5 A)
Thermal capacity
Permanent
Short time
Very short time
Burden at In= 5 A
Burden at In= 1 A
20 A
500 A (1 sec.)
1250 A (half-cycle)
<0.2VA
<0.02VA
Sensitive neutral or isolated neutral current circuits (single rated current
0.25/0.025 A)
Thermal capacity
Permanent
Short time
Burden at In= 0.25 A
20 A
100 A (1 sec.)
0.0010VA
Current circuit for power protection units
Thermal capacity
Permanent
Short time
Burden at In= 0.25 A
Voltage circuits
Thermal capacity
Permanent
Short time
Burden at 63.5 V
Burden at 100 V
Bushing insulator voltage circuit
Measurement range
20 A
100 A (1 sec.)
0.0010VA
260 V
5 Un (1 sec.)
3.5 Un (1 min.)
0.015 VA
<0.03 VA
0-230mVac
1.16 OPERATING FREQUENCY
Rated: 50 or 60 Hz (programmable)
Operating range: fn ± 5 Hz
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 43
1.17 PHASE SUCCESSION ORDER
ABC or CBA (programmable)
21BHARDWARE
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 44
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
UNIT CONFIGURATION
The settings defined below are used for configuring the unit and are, therefore, basic.
Some are only accessible by keyboard/display, whilst others are also accessible by Console.
All are single table settings (Table 0). The ↑↑↓↓ key on the keyboard/display is used to access the table 0 programming via the
“Change settings” menu.
1.18 PROGRAMMING DIGITAL AND LOGICAL INPUTS
Two types of inputs are considered in the unit: digital inputs (physical, cabled in the field) and logical inputs (internal). Each possible input function (for example, "breaker status") must only be programmed as either digital or as logical, but not as both.
Digital inputs are programmed as follows:
Via the Console, the programming is effected in the upper of the two boxes found on the right hand side of the "Digital Input
Configuration" screen.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG – CONFIG. INPUTS
SELECT. NO/NC
INPUT ACTIV.T.
CONFIG INPUTS allows a digital input to be programmed from among the following possibilities:
Breaker status
Reference voltage (for the recloser)
External protection action. It causes reclosure (depending on the enabled settings)
Closure command. Activates the closure relay
Breaking command. Activates the general trip relay
Instantaneous inhibition. When active, the instantaneous overcurrent and surge settings do not trip; they register the time passed since their pick up and thus, if they are active when the input is deactivated and the additional programmed time has elapsed, they trip instantaneously.
Activation of table 1. If a pulse is received, the settings table 1 is enabled as an active table.
Activation of table 2. If a pulse is received, the settings table 2 is enabled as an active table.
Activation of table 3. If a pulse is received, the settings table 3 is enabled as an active table.
Activation of table 4. If a pulse is received, the settings table 4 is enabled as an active table.
Relay lock. It sets the relay out of service. It is activated by levels
Selection of Local/Remote command
Monitoring of closure circuit 1 with 52 open (only units with digital I/O extension board)
Monitoring of closure circuit 1 with 52 closed (only units with digital I/O extension board)
Monitoring of trip circuit 1 with 52 open (only units with digital I/O extension board)
Monitoring of trip circuit 1 with 52 closed (only units with digital I/O extension board)
Local drop off. Switches off the trip LEDs and deactivates the relays programmed as “Memorized”; it is equivalent to a keyboard/display fault recognition.
Thermal image drop off. Sets the thermal image metering to zero. df/dt breaker (level 1) df/dt breaker (level 2) df/dt breaker (level 3) df/dt breaker (level 4)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 45
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
The above-mentioned inputs can be used for sealing the frequency rate of change trip outputs (TF, TT and SV families).
Pole A status(contact 52a)
Pole B status(contact 52a)
Pole C status(contact 52a)
External trip (three-phase)
External trip phase A
External trip phase B
External trip phase C
The above-mentioned inputs indicate the system state and they are used in the FI family.
Voltage presence. When programmed, the fault passover detection automatism obeys this input instead of the analogue input in order to check the presence of voltage.
Input rearm. When this input is activated, the fault passover detection and the fault signalling outputs, as well as the associated LEDs, are deactivated.
Unallocated. The input can be used by the protection for lockout or logical or may remain unused. In all cases, its status can be transmitted to control.
Do not programme more than one input for each specific function.
SELECT. NO/NC. This defines whether the input must be interpreted as active when it is viewed closed or when it is viewed open. Independently of the selected NO/NC option, the digital inputs programmed in outputs, logics, LEDs and status signals are shown at “one” when there is voltage in the input and at “zero” when there is no voltage in the input.
For example, if we use a contact 52a for the status of the circuit breaker, we must program the corresponding input as NA
(when closed it will indicate a closed circuit breaker), while if we use a 52b we must program it as NC (when opened it will indicate a closed circuit breaker).
INPUT ACTIV.T. (input activation time). This is a software filter for the activation / deactivation of digital inputs. The HW filter, which is 1 ms, may be extended via software by the number of programmed milliseconds (range 0 to 20 ms).
Logical inputs are programmed as follows:
Via the Console, the programming is effected in the lower of the two boxes found on the right hand side of the "Digital Input
Configuration" screen.
A logical input is a virtual (non-physical) input, the status of which depends on the corresponding logical signal (input 1 corresponds to signal 1, input 10 corresponds to signal 10). The input’s function is as programmed (the programming possibilities are the same as those of the digital inputs).
This procedure allows the assignment of the relay’s internal signals to these inputs as if they were cabled field signals. Up to
10 logical inputs are allowed (given that there are 10 logical signals).
NO/NC selection, the input is active when the logic is active or inactive.
Delay is not applied to the activation.
Example: if we programme logical input 3 as "breaker status" and N/O, the unit will consider the breaker closed when logical signal 3 is active.
Any given function must only be programmed as one input. For example, the programming of "breaker status" as a digital input and as a logical input is not admitted.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 46
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
1.19 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Via the Console, digital inputs are programmed in “Digital output configuration” screen.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG – PROG. OUTPUTS
INPUT ACTIV. T.
The functionality of each digital output can be programmed as an OR of the logical signals available in the unit (see “List of available signals”, Appendix III).
When programming through Console (recommended), click on the boxes corresponding to the signs for which the OR option is to be activated by the output (dot-matrix programming).
A row titled “OUTPUT TYPE, located at the beginning of the list of available signals in the programming screen, allows the definition of each output “Trip”, “Closure”, “Memorized” or “Nothing”. If the output is set as “Trip”, it implements the sealing logic (when the Sealing setting is set to YES) and the breaker fault logic. If the output is set as “Closure”, it implements the sealing logic (when the Sealing setting is set to YES) and the closure fault logic. If set to “Memorized”, it is deactivated by means of a digital input programmed as “Local drop off”, a command or by the keyboard/display (“Recognise
FAULT”). When set to “Nothing”, it performs no special function.
The output activation time defines the minimum operational time of each physical output following activation (in seconds).
The range is 0.05 to 5 sec. This appears in the last row on the screen.
The process is a little more complicated by keyboard / display. In PROG.OUTPUT we can define “ASIGN SIGNALS” for each, with the following possibilities:
NO SIGNAL (the output remains unallocated, although it can be activated by control commands).
SAME SIGNALS (the current programming is to be kept).
OTHER SIGNALS (the current programming is to be changed). Using “↵” (Intro), the user can scroll through the logical signals using the arrow ↓; when we arrive at a signal that we want to use in the OR that defines the output, press “↵”; the unit will the ask if we want “MORE SIGNALS?”. If YES, we continue to add signal until we answer NO to this last question.
1.20 PROGRAMMING OF LEDS
Through the Console, the LEDs are programmed in the “LEDs configuration” screen.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG – PROG. LEDs
The proceedings are fully analogous those of digital output programming, except that the activation time is not programmed and that the possible types are “Memorized” and “Non memorized”. LEDS programmed as “Not Memorized” switch off when the cause which provoked their activation disappears. In order to switch off the Memorized LEDs, "Fault recognition" must be activated by keyboard/display, digital input or command.
1.21 PROGRAMMING OF GENERAL SETTINGS
General description
Event mask
The “Events report” section contains a list of the protection-related events. Most of them can be masked from the PC.
They can not be masked from the keyboard.
In order for an event type to be registered, the mask must be set to “NO”.
Transformation ratios:
only used by the protection to provide measurements related to the primary.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 47
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
Rated voltage
the rated phase to earth voltage. It is used by the protection to provide measurements in Procome format (the scale range of the voltage measurements is 1.2 times the rated voltage).
In PL70SC and RS bushing insulator models (with capacitive splitter input), the rated voltage, which is to be found in the “Programmable factors and bushing insulators" screen, is programmed in kV.
Voltage type
This indicates if the voltage signals connected to the unit are “simple” (phase-earth) or “compound” (phase-phase).
Voltage metering
This indicates the phases in which the voltage is metered.
In the Console, these settings are located in the “General settings and remote port configuration” screen, and in the keyboard/display in “PROG.TABLE 0” – “GENERAL” (through the keyboard, the voltage Type and Measurement settings are both found under the common heading “Voltage input”).
Language
English or Spanish. This refers to the text which appears in the display.
In the Console, this setting is located in the "General Settings" screen, and in "PROG.TABLE 0" - "General" -
"LANGUAGE" via the keyboard/display.
Rated current
This setting is used to set the necessary “In” rated voltage for the motor protection units.
Stabilization time unknown52
Transition timing for breaker inputs. This setting consists of the non-activation of the “Unknown 52" signal as a result of discordance in the digital inputs until the adjusted time has elapsed.
Programmable phase current metering scale range
This setting consists of the inclusion of a programmable phase current metering scale range. Thus, the metering scale range is not limited to 0.3A, and can be set between 0.1-3A.
This setting, which is only used in the SC, RC and RS families, is located in the Protection Console in the “General
Settings" screen, and via the keyboard / display in "PROG.TABLE 0" - "GENERAL" - "PHASE CURR.”.
Programmable neutral current metering scale range
This setting allows the programming of a neutral metering scale range 0.1-3A for models A and B, or between 0.1-2A for models C and D, independently of the phase metering scale range.
This setting, which is only used in the SC, RC and RS families, is located in the Protection Console in the “General
Settings" screen, and via the keyboard / display in "PROG.TABLE 0" - "GENERAL" - "NEUTR. CURR.”.
Fault reporting
This setting allows the user to choose whether the fault report is generated in primary or in secondary values. In the
Console, this setting is located in the "General Settings" screen, and in "PROG.TABLE 0" - "GENERAL" - "FAULT
REPORTS" via the keyboard/display.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 48
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
Settings ranges (table 0, single)
Setting
Event mask
. Transformer I phase ratio
. Transformer I neutral ratio
. Transformer I sensitive neutral ratio
. Voltage transformer
Simple rated voltage (V)
Voltage type
Voltage metering
Language
Rated current
Unknown signal stabilization time 52 (sec.)
Phase current metering scale range
Neutral current metering scale range
Fault reporting
1.0
0
0,1
0,1
0,1
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
See “Events"
1
1
1
1
3.000
3.000
3.000
9.999
1
1
1
1
Families with Neutral transformer
Families with Sensitive Neutral transformer
23,0
40,0
40,0
115,5
270,0
200,0
0,1
0,1
0,1
IV family
SC and RC families (models A and C)
Other families
Phase to earth/Phase to phase
10.0
60
3,0
3,0
2,0
1.0
1
0,01
0,01
Phases in which metering is effected
English/Spanish
SC, RC and RS families
0,01 SC, RC and RS families
SC family (models A and B) / RC family (model A)
SC family (models C and D) / RC family (model C) / RS family
PRIMARY/SECONDARY
1.22 COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATIONS
Carried out via the keyboard/display or the Protections Console.
Communication via front port (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2)
The PL70 unit has an address identifying number which enables it to identify the messages received from the PC via its front port (or via its rear port in parallel) using the protocol PROCOME. This address is programmable from the keyboard/display, via “CHANGE SETTINGS”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “CONFIG.COMMUNIC.”, “FRONT PORT”, “UCL
ADDRESS", or via the "PROCOME SETTINGS", "PROCOME General" screen in the Protections Console.
The factory setting for the address is 4, which is used the Engineering programme when defining the installation.
If this number in changed in Engineering for any reason, the address programming must also be changed, and viceversa.
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The baud rate, parity and the number of STOP bits are also programmable within COMUNICAC. CONFIG”. The units are supplied with 19200 baud rate, even parity and 1 STOP bit factory settings.
The established communications settings can be seen in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
“CONFIG. COMMUNIC.”.
In addition to the keyboard/display, the settings can be viewed/programmed from a PC using the Protections Console.
Baud rates of 115200 bauds or higher are only employed for downloading firmware and not used in normal operation.
Communication via rear port nº 1 (Port 2)
The protocol type to be used by this port is defined in “CHANGE SETTINGS”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “COMMUNIC.
CONFIG.”, “SELECT COMM. T.”, or from the "GENERAL SETTINGS", "General configuration" screen in the Protections
Console. The options are: Procome, DNP3.0, MODBUS and 103 for all the families, with the exception of the SC, RC,
RS and CT families, which use: Procome, Gestel, PID1, SAP20, IEC-101 and DNP3.0 (see the corresponding appendix).
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 49
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
Procome:
If Procome is chosen, in “CHANGE SETTINGS”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “CONFIG.COMMUNIC.”, “REAR PORT”, a settings group which is analogous to the group defining the front port (it is not necessary for the groups to share the same values) is programmed. There is an additional “CONTROL SIGNALS” setting, which provides the options “None” and “RTS”.
DNP:
If the option chosen is DNP, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “SETTINGS (change)”,
“PROG. TABLE 0”, “REAR PORT”, "MODBUS CONFIG.", "UCL ADDRESS". . This address does not need to be the same as the front port address, although it is convenient in order to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with unprogrammed addresses and DNP parameters. These parameters must be programmed by the user.
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The unit also has an identification number relative to the Master unit to which is connected, and only accepts messages originated from this unit. This is also programmable in the unit, within the “CONFIG. DNP”. The address' factory setting is 0. The baud rate, parity and the number of STOP bits are also programmable. The units are supplied with 9600 baud rate, no parity and 1 STOP bit factory settings.
The established communications settings can be viewed in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
"REAR PORT”, “GESTEL CONFIG.” DNP”.
For further information about DNP communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
MODBUS:
If the MODBUS option is selected, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “CHANGE
SETTINGS”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “REAR PORT”, "MODBUS CONFIG.", "UCL ADDRESS". . This address does not need to be the same as the front port address, although it is convenient in order to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with unprogrammed addresses and MODBUS parameters. These parameters must be programmed by the user.
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary waiting time for the activation and deactivation of the RT signal (internal) are also programmable.
The established communications settings can be viewed in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
"REAR PORT”, “MODBUS CONFIG.”.
For further information about MODBUS communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
IEC 870-5-103:
If the 103 option is selected, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “CHANGE SETTINGS”,
“PROG. TABLE 0”, “COMM. CONFIG.”, “REAR PORT”, “UCL ADDRESS”. . This address does not need to be the same as the front port address, although it is convenient in order to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with unprogrammed addresses and 103 parameters. These parameters must be programmed by the user.
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary waiting times for the activation and deactivation of the RTS signal (internal) are also programmable.
The established communications settings can be seen in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
“COMM. CONFIG.” “REAR PORT”.
In addition to the keyboard/display, the settings can be viewed/programmed from a PC using the Protections Console.
For further information about 103 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
Gestel:
If the Gestel option is selected, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “CHANGE
SETTINGS”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “REAR PORT”, "Gestel CONFIG.", "ADDRESS". This address does not need to be the same as the front port address, although it is convenient in order to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with unprogrammed addresses and Gestel parameters. These parameters must be programmed by the user.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 50
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The baud rate and the parity are also programmable. The units are supplied with factory settings of 9600 bauds and even parity.
The established communications settings can be viewed in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
"REAR PORT”, “GESTEL CONFIG.” .
For further information about GESTEL communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
PID1:
If the PID1 option is selected, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “CHANGE
SETTINGS”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “REAR PORT”, "PID1 CONFIG.", "ADDRESS". The units leave the factory with unprogrammed addresses and PID1 parameters. These parameters must be programmed by the user.
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary times are also programmable.
The established communications settings can be viewed in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
"REAR PORT”, “PID1 CONFIG.”.
For further information about PID1 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
SAP20:
If the SAP20 option is selected, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “CHANGE
SETTINGS”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “REAR PORT”, "SAP20 CONFIG.", "ADDRESS". The address and the rest of the
SAP20 parameters have to be programmed by the user.
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The baud rate and the auxiliary times are also programmable.
The established communications settings can be viewed in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
"REAR PORT”, “SAP20 CONFIG.” .
For further information about SAP20 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
IEC-101:
If the 101 option is selected, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “CHANGE SETTINGS”,
“PROG. TABLE 0”, “REAR PORT”, "101 CONFIG.", "ADDRESS". The address and the rest of the IEC-101 parameters
have to be programmed by the user.
If a PL70 unit is substituted by another, the installed unit must be given the same address as the unit that is withdrawn.
The baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary times are also programmable.
The established communications settings can be viewed in the display in “VIEW SETTINGS”, “VIEW TABLE 0”,
"REAR PORT”, “101 CONFIG.”.
For further information about 101 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
Ethernet communication
Only applicable in those models equipped with an Ethernet port.
In order to configure the Ethernet port, the first parameter to be configured corresponds to the selection of the TCP/IP communication. This address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “CHANGE SETTINGS”, “PROG.
TABLE 0”, “COMMUNIC. CONFIG.”, “TCPIP”, or from the "GENERAL SETTINGS", "TCP/IP protocols configuration" screen in the Protections Console. This parameter’s options are: “No” and “Procome” for all families. SC and CT families have the additional option of IEC-104 (see corresponding appendix). The functioning according to this parameter is as follows:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 51
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
Procome
The Procome protocol is employed for communications via the Ethernet port. In this case, the selection of the procome protocol in another rear port ("com 2") is not permitted. In summary, the Procome protocol is used to communicate via the Ethernet port, whilst a selected protocol (with the exception of Procome) is used in the second rear port (when available).
IEC-104:
The 104 protocol is used for communications via the Ethernet port. In this case, only the procome protocol can be selected in the other rear port ("com 2").
For further information about 104 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
1.23 OTHER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
These settings may be accessed via the keyboard/display or the Protections Console. They are accessed via the Console, through the “General Settings” screen, “Configuration General”, and via the keyboard/display through "CHANGE SETTINGS",
"PROG. TABLE 0", “SPECIAL SETTINGS”.
Accessible via the keyboard/display and the Protections Console
Frequency
50 Hz or 60 Hz. This is the basic protection setting. If an incorrect setting is chosen, the measurements and, therefore, the protection operation, will also be incorrect.
Phase order
A, B, C or C, B, A. This only affects the broken conductor and unbalance (currents and voltages) protection functions.
To verify that the order corresponds to the cabling, consult “Measurements” and check that the ratio of the inverse/direct component is close to 0% when introducing 3 balanced currents of around 1 A.
Enabling of pushbuttons
If this setting is set at “YES”, the front command pushbuttons are enabled. If it is set at “NO”, the front command pushbuttons “disappear” (only available in SC, RC, RS and CT families).
Neutral Voltage
In those models which measure neutral voltage and are equipped with phase voltage transformers, the VN measurement may be calculated or measured through the neutral transformer.
Current phase B
In the IS and IT models, the phase B current in question can calculated (in those cases in which only phases A, C and neutral are cabled) or metered through the phase B transformer.
If the adjustment of current phase B is calculate, the measure B made with the measures of transformers A, C and neutral, regardless of what is injected into the transformer B. If the setting is transformer, the measure of phase B it will be injected into the transformer B.
Accessible only via keyboard/display
Operating mode
This setting only exists for the MO family. There are 2 options: "MOTOR" or "GENERATOR". In “generator” mode, a
“picked up unit” detection is not required for the activation of any of the protection functions, which implies the following: the undercurrent function must be disabled (in general) the "long start" and "starts per hour" functions are not operative the "rotor lock" function, if enabled, acts permanently as an overcurrent function. any outputs programmed as “picked up motor” are always activated.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 52
22BUNIT CONFIGURATION
Calibration
This menu position is to be used exclusively by the Ingeteam Transmission and Distribution SA technicians, according to specific procedures. It must not be used by the user.
Display contrast setting
The procedure is as follows:
By pressing the “ESC” (from the 4 key keyboard) key for 3 to 5 seconds in the initial screen (the screen showing part of the unit’s commercial code), the user enters the contrast setting menu and the following text appears:
“Contrast setting. –DOWN + UP”.
The “
↑ ” and “ ↓ ” keys are used to set the contrast. “ ↑ “ increases and “↓” decreases brightness, respectively.
To validate, press “ESC”, or after 1 minute the screen will return to the normal situation, with the changes realized.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 53
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.24 PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
General description
Three-phase overcurrent protection, with the following selectable characteristics (function 50/51):
Timed characteristic
Normal inverse time. (I BSC or I ANSI)
Short inverse time (IL BSC)
Long inverse time (IL BSC)
Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
Special very inverse time (MIEs BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
User curve (USUAR 1)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristic
Two instantaneous elements (the second is optional)
Additional time
The functioning of this protection is coordinated with the reclosure function (optional).
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
Setting
Phase time enabling
Timed phase pick up (A)
Timed response type
Min
0,015
0,003
0,1
Max
3,000
3,000
100,0
Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,001
0,001
0,01
RC family (Model A)
RC family (Model C)
Other families
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
0,05
0,5
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
0,00 600,00 0,01
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
Time index
Definite time(s)
The timed normal characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The timed HIGH2 characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent Protection (HIGH 2)” screen. To see families who may have timed HIGH2 characteristics (see section “1.2 Functions”).
In units equipped with the 51V option, they can be modified in accordance with the voltage (see “Voltage control”, only available in IV family).
If the Enable setting is set at YES, the function can generate trips. If it is set at NO, the function is not activated. This is general for overcurrent functions.
The start-up current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
In definite time, the relay trips upon the expiry of the programmed time as of the moment in which the start-up current is exceeded, independently of the current value.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 54
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
When working with curves, the time that passes before the trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the current value. The normal, very inverse, extremely inverse and user curves can be selected as corresponding to the
BS142 (IEC 255-4) standard or ANSI. Appendix II contains graphics and formulas for the calculation of the time in accordance with the quotient between the current and the pickup current. If the quotient is higher than 40, 40 is taken for the calculation.
The maximum error in times for values higher than 50 ms is 30 ms, or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of the two). For the programming of 0 ms definite time, the behaviour is the same as that for the instantaneous characteristic
(see next point).
Note. If an index value is which is unacceptable for a specific curve type is programmed, the unit uses the closest acceptable value.
Timed phase inhibition setting (4 tables)
This setting is shown on the "TOC Limitations" under the "Phase TOC Limitations" heading, or via the keyboard/display
(in PROTEC. FUNCTION., in PHASE TOC. LIMIT.).
The phase timing inhibition setting enables the inhibition of this characteristic as the start-up of the phase instantaneous characteristic.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (low level) (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
Setting
Instantaneous phase enabling
Instantaneous phase pick up (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,015
0,003
0,1
3,000
3,000
100,0
0,001
0,001
0,01
0,00 60,00 0,01
RC family (Model A)
RC family (Model C)
Other families
The instantaneous normal characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The instantaneous HIGH2 characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent Protection (HIGH
2)” screen. To see families who may have timed HIGH2 characteristics (see section “1.2 Functions”).
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
If the additional time is programmed as 0, for current values between the trip value and 1.5 times this value, the trip occurs between 35 and 45 ms; for values of twice trip current, the trip occurs between 30 and 35ms, and from values of 3 times the trip current, between 20 and 25 ms. Any additional programmed time includes the indicated time. With additional times higher than 50 ms, the maximum error in times is 30 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of the two).
Instantaneous characteristic setting ranges (high level) (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous phase enabling
Instantaneous phase pick up (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1 100,0 0,01
0,00 60,00 0,01
These settings can be found in the Console in the “Instantaneous overcurrent protection (HIGH 1)” screen.
The time characteristics are the same as those detailed in the previous section.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 55
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.25 NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
General description
In neutral earthed installations, this provides neutral overcurrent protection with the same characteristics options as those described for phase overcurrent, as well as independent settings (function 50N/51N).
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
Setting
Neutral timing enabled
Timed neutral pick up (A)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,02
0,005
0,008
0,002
0,1
20,0
5,000
3,000
2,000
100,0
0,01
0,001
0,001
0,001
0,01
IT / IS family(Models C and D)
IS family (Models A and B)
RC family (Model A)
RC family (Model C)
Other families
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
0,05
0,5
0,0
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
600,0 0,1
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
The timed normal characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The timed HIGH2 characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent Protection (HIGH 2)” screen. To see families who may have timed HIGH2 characteristics (see section “1.2 Functions”).
The remarks on curves and accuracy in times are the same as those quoted for phases.
Timed neutral inhibition setting (4 tables)
This setting is located in the "TOC Limitations" screen under the "Phase TOC Limitations" heading, or via the keyboard/display (in PROTEC. FUNCTION., in NEUT. TOC. LIMIT.).
Setting
Limit current (A)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
0,02
0,005
0,008
0,002
0,1
20,0
5,000
3,000
2,000
100,0
0,01
0,001
0,001
0,001
0,01
IT / IS family(Models C and D)
IS family (Models A and B)
RC family (Model A)
RC family (Model C)
Other families
The neutral timing inhibition setting enables the inhibition of this characteristic as of the start-up of the neutral instantaneous characteristic.
The limit current is the current beyond which the curve is no longer followed and the time given by the curve for the value in question increases, that is to say, the curve becomes a horizontal line as of that value. If this value is not to be used, the maximum value is to be programmed.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (low level) (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
Setting
Instantaneous neutral enabling
Instantaneous neutral trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,02
0,005
0,008
0,002
20,0
5,000
3,000
2,000
0,01
0,001
0,001
0,001
IT / IS family(Models C and D)
IS family (Models A and B)
RC family (Model A)
RC family (Model C)
0,1 100,0 0,01
0,00 60,00 0,01
Other families
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 56
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
The instantaneous normal characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The instantaneous HIGH2 characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent Protection (HIGH
2)” screen. To see families who may have timed HIGH2 characteristics (see section “1.2 Functions”).
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
The remarks on activation times are the same as those provided for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic setting ranges (high level) (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous neutral enabling
Instantaneous neutral trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,02
0,1
20,0
100,0
0,01
0,01
0,00 60,00 0,01
IT family (Model D)
Other families
These settings can be found in the Console in the “Instantaneous overcurrent protection (HIGH 1)” screen.
The time characteristics are the same as those provided for phases.
1.26 DIRECTIONALITY OF THE NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS
In the ID family, the protection functions described can be directional.
In such a case, each of the functions (timed, low instantaneous, high instantaneous) has an additional setting, “Torque control”, which if set YES indicates that the function is to act as directional and if set to NO it must act as NON
DIRECTIONAL
Note.- Even when the Torque Control is set at YES, the directionality can be locked (forced to operate as non-directional) by a Procome command or by a digital or logic input (if programmed as “Directional” in the “Locks (I)” screen).
The settings corresponding to the directionality criteria are found in the “Overcurrent protection (2)” screen in the
“DIRECTIONAL” section. The options are shown below, followed by descriptions of the functions.
Neutral lead/lag (degrees). Programmable from 0º to 360º. It corresponds to the angle setting between the polarization voltage and the maximum torque line (LMP).
Polarization voltage. This is the minimum polarization voltage value, below which it is considered that the direction is not known with certainty.
Trip permission without V.Polarization. If set to YES, it enables an overcurrent trip if the polarization voltage is lower than the minimum polarization voltage; if set to NO, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under those conditions.
Zone Amplitude (degrees). Programmable between 0º and 170º. It corresponds to the angle covered by the trip zone.
Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0 (V0)
Operation with polarization by V0, zero sequence voltage
The direction is determined using the neutral current (3·I0) with the neutral voltage as polarization, (3·V0). The angle determines the range in which the fault is considered as a forward fault and as a reverse fault. A forward fault is recognised in accordance with the following:
90-lead/lag setting<arg(I0)-arg(V0)<270-lead/lag setting
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 57
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
There is a 5 º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained.
We must remember that the trip zone is limited by the zone Amplitude setting by which it is determined. For example: if this setting is set to 170 degrees, the trip zone would be the maximum. However, if it is set to 0 grades, the trip zone would be reduced to the maximum torque line (LMP).
Torque control
The directional lock is used when the polarization voltage (3·V0) falls below the threshold (V polarization setting), which when set to YES indicates forwards and when set to NO indicates reverse.
Signs
Provides forward and reverse signs. (Forward, Reverse).
When the directional lock is set to “NO” and the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, the direction is not signalled.
When the directional lock is set to “YES” and the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, it signals forward and reverse.
1.27 SENSITIVE NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
General description
Sensitive neutral overcurrent protection, with the same characteristics options as those described for phases (except that there is only one instantaneous element), and independent settings (function 50SN/51SN).
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
Setting
Neutral timing enabled
Sensitive neutral timed pickup (A)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,02
0,005
0,008
0,002
0,1
0,05
0,5
0,0
20,0
5,000
3,000
2,000
100,0
0,01
0,001
0,001
0,001
0,01
IT / IS family(Models C and D)
IS family (Models A and B)
RC family (Model A)
RC family (Model C)
Other families
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
600,0 0,1
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 58
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
The timed normal characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The timed HIGH2 characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent Protection (HIGH 2)” screen. To see families who may have timed HIGH2 characteristics (see section “1.2 Functions”).
The remarks on curves and accuracy in times are the same as those quoted for phases.
Timed sensitive neutral inhibition setting (4 tables)
This setting is located in the "TOC Limitations" screen under the "Sensitive neutral phase TOC Limitations" heading, or via the keyboard/display (in PROTEC. FUNCTION., in SENN TOC. LIMIT.).
Setting
Limit current (A)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
0,02 20,0 0,01 IT / IS family(Models C and D)
0,005
0,008
0,002
0,1
5,000
3,000
2,000
100,0
0,001
0,001
0,001
0,01
IS family (Models A and B)
RC family (Model A)
RC family (Model C)
Other families
The sensitive neutral timing inhibition setting enables the inhibition of this characteristic as of the start-up of the sensitive neutral instantaneous characteristic.
The limit current is the current beyond which the curve is no longer followed and the time given by the curve for the value in question increases, that is to say, the curve becomes a horizontal line as of that value. If this value is not to be used, the maximum value is to be programmed.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (low level) (4 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
Setting
Instantaneous neutral enabling
Instantaneous sensitive neutral trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,02
0,005
0,008
0,002
0,1
0,00
20,0
5,000
3,000
0,01
0,001
0,001
IT / IS family(Models C and D)
IS family (Models A and B)
RC family (Model A)
2,000
100,0
0,001
0,01
600,00 0,01
RC family (Model C)
Other families
The instantaneous normal characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The instantaneous HIGH2 characteristics settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent Protection (HIGH
2)” screen. To see families who may have timed HIGH2 characteristics (see section “1.2 Functions”).
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
The remarks on activation times are the same as those provided for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic setting ranges (high level) (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous neutral enabling
Instantaneous sensitive neutral trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,02
0,005
0,00
20,0
5,000
0,01
0,001
600,00 0,01
IS family (Model D)
Other families
These settings can be found in the Console in the “Instantaneous overcurrent protection (HIGH 1)” screen.
The time characteristics are the same as those provided for phases.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 59
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.28 RESIDUAL CURRENT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
General description
This overcurrent protection function works with the residual current, which is the sum of the phase currents internally calculated by the unit. It has the characteristics options as those described for phases, and independent settings
(function 50R/51R).
This function may be used in those situations in which a ground trafo is not available or it has to protect an earthed or similar line.
Note: Due to the fact that the measurement results from the sum of the phase currents, this function’s error is considered to be the sum the errors of the currents circulating through the phases.
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Setting
Timed residual current enabling
Timed pickup (A)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1
0,05
0,5
0,0
100,0 0,01
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
600,0 0,1
User curve
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in “PL70 Protection” screen in the Console.
The remarks on curves and accuracy in times are the same as those quoted for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (single level) (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous enabling
Instantaneous trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1
0,00
100,0
60,00
0,01
0,01
These settings can be found in “PL70 Protection” screen in the Console.
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
The remarks on activation times are the same as those provided for phases.
1.29 CURRENT UNBALANCE PROTECTION
General description
This protection contains the instantaneous and timed unbalance protection functions.
The protection works in exactly the same way as the phase overcurrent protection, taking three times the inverse sequence current module as an input measurement.
3 •
I
2
=
I
a
+
a
2
•
I b
+
a
•
I c
In which=1|120º
The fact that the phase succession order A-B-C or C-B-A can be programmable, meaning that I2 depends on this setting, must be taken into account.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 60
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Parameter
Timed unbalance enabling.
Unbalance timing pickup (A)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1 100,0 0,01
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
0,05
0,5
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
0,1 600,0 0,1
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The remarks about the curves are the same as those provided for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Parameter
Instantaneous unbalance enabling.
Instantaneous unbalance trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1
0,10
100,0
60,00
0,01
0,01
These settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (1)” screen.
The remarks about additional time are the same as those provided for phases.
1.30 BROKEN CONDUCTOR PROTECTION
General description
This is a definite time protection unit. The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, the ratio in modules between the inverse sequence and direct sequence current.
I
I
2
1
=
I a
I a
+
+
a
2
a
•
•
I b
I b
+
+
a a
2
•
•
I c
I c
In which=1|120º
The relay trips once the programmed time has elapsed from the moment the pickup setting value is exceeded. In order for this unit to operate, the current of certain of the phases must be at least 0.3 A, and both the direct and indirect sequences must be at least 0.15 A (in the secondary).
This function is different in the MO family:
While the motor is within the pickup period (see section 4.10.1.1), the effective setting is not the programmed setting, but 0.8, dropping out to 0.76. Once the relay has picked up, it will trip when the setting value is exceeded, dropping to 80%. Additionally, this function locks if any of the currents exceeds 5 times the programmed "Rated current". This functionality is conditioned by the “Operation mode” setting (see section 3.6.3), which can be programmed as "MOTOR" or "GENERATOR". The description given for a motor within the pick up period can not be applied if it is programmed as generator. In this case, the function always employs the programmed setting and does not lock, even when the current is 5 times the rated value.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Broken conductor unit enabling.
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 61
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Broken conductor timing pick (A) 0,10 0,50 0,01
0,05 300,0 0,01
Expressed as a decimal.
I
2
I
1
Definite time(s)
These settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (2)” screen.
1.31 G1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50/51G1)
General description
Neutral 2 overcurrent protection, with the same characteristics options as those described for phases (except that there is only one instantaneous element), and independent settings (function 50G1/51G1).
This function can be used to protect an earthed line or similar.
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Setting
Timer enabling
Timed pickup (A)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
0,02
0,1
0,05
0,5
0,0
20,0
100,0
0,01
0,01
YES/NO
RT family (Model C)
Other families
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
600,0 0,1
User curve
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in “PL70 Protection” screen in the Console.
The remarks on curves and accuracy in times are the same as those quoted for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (single level) (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous enabling
Instantaneous trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
0,02
0,1
20,0
100,0
0,01
0,01
0,00 60,00 0,01
YES/NO
RT family (Model C)
Other families
These settings can be found in “PL70 Protection” screen in the Console.
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
The remarks on activation times are the same as those provided for phases.
1.32 G2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50/51G2)
General description
Neutral 3 overcurrent protection, with the same characteristics options as those described for phases (except that there is only one instantaneous element), and independent settings (function 50G2/51G2).
This function can be used to protect an earthed line, tank or similar.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 62
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Setting
Timer enabling
Timed pickup (A)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1 100,0 0,01
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
0,05
0,5
0,0
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
600,0 0,1
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in “PL70 Protection” screen in the Console.
The remarks on curves and accuracy in times are the same as those quoted for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (single level) (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous enabling
Instantaneous trip (A)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1 100,0 0,01
0,00 60,00 0,01
These settings can be found in “PL70 Protection” screen in the Console.
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
The remarks on activation times are the same as those provided for phases.
1.33 UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION
As of version “a”, the PL70 IT and IS models include Undercurrent protection.
There are two definite time undercurrent levels, based on the minimum current of the three phases.
The function picks up when one of the three phase currents falls below the setting.
The choice of open- and closed-breaker trips is selectable. (Checking the 52 status input).
When trip is produced by this function, the general trip is activated and the recloser is locked. Drop out is produced at 105% of the pick up setting.
Setting
Timer enabling
Undercurrent pickup level 1
Additional timing level 1
Undercurrent pickup level 2
Additional timing level 2
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
0,1 10,00 0,01
YES always / YES with breaker closed / NO
0
0,1
0
600,00
10,00
600,00
0,01
0,01
0,01
These settings can be found in the console on the “Overcurrent protection (4)” screen.
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
The remarks on performance times are the same as those provided for phase overcurrent.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 63
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.34 MOTOR PROTECTION
The motor protection functions are detailed below.
Note: The settings corresponding to the “In” current employed in the motor protection functions may be adjusted solely via keyboard/display in the “General” section. For further information, see the “General settings” section.
Rotor lock protection
General description
A definite time, overcurrent protection. It compares the average current with the programmed value and, in the event of the programmed value being exceeded, trips the programmed time. It is disabled during the start-up of the motor. Function 51RB.
The motor is considered to be within the pickup period during the time interval in which it passes from 0 to
1.2*In, after having been at 2*In, that is, when the current is already decreasing.
There is a special setting (see section 3.6.3) called "Operation mode" that can be programmed as "MOTOR" or "GENERATOR". The description given for a picked up motor is not applicable if it is programmed as generator, that is, when the function is enabled and provided that “Enabling” setting is set to “YES”.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Rotor unit lock enabled
Rotor lock timer pick-up (A)
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
1
0
50
30
0,1
1
Undercurrent protection (cut-out)
General description
A definite time protection. It compares the average current with the programmed value and, in the event of a shortcoming, trips the programmed time (if the breaker is closed). Function 37.
There is a special setting (see section 3.6.3) called "Operation mode" that can be programmed as "MOTOR" or "GENERATOR". In the case of generators, this function neither picks up nor trips.
Settings
Setting
Undercurrent unit enabled
Undercurrent timed pick-up (A)
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,2
0
5,0
30
0,1
1
Long start protection
General description
This protection produces a trip if the pick-up period is superior to the programmed time. Function 48. In order for a drop-out to occur, the fictitious temperature must be less than 40% of the maximum value (in addition to the normal trip sealing conditions).
There is a special setting (see section 3.6.3) called "Operation mode" that can be programmed as "MOTOR" or "GENERATOR". In the case of Generators, this function has no effect.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 64
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Long-start function enabled
Pick-up time (sec)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
1 99 1
Protection against successive starts
General description
This protection counts the number of attempted starts that take place within a programmed time span. If the programmed number is exceeded, the trip signal is activated in order to prevent further starts. The signal is maintained during the programmed period. The start counter may be reset by forcing the release with the key
↓.
There is a special setting (see section 3.6.3) called "Operation mode" that can be programmed as "MOTOR" or "GENERATOR". In the case of Generators, this function has no effect.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Successive-start function enabled
Number of starts
Time span (minutes)
Output activation time (minutes)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
1
1
1
15
120
100
1
1
1
1.35 PHASE CHARACTERISTIC CONTROL BY VOLTAGE (FUNCTION 51V)
The timed phase protection function can be controlled by voltage in such a way that the pick up current decreases if the control voltage is inferior to the rated current. To activate this function, the “Voltage acceleration” setting in the “Overcurrent protection 1 –Phases” settings screen (or, via keyboard/display, the PROTECTION-PHASE TIME-ENABLE ACCELARATION) must be set to "YES". (If it is set to “NO”, the effective settings are those programmed in phase timing).
The control by voltage function has two operational modes, depending on the programming of the “Voltage control” setting in screen 3of the Overcurrent Protection Settings screen (or by keyboard/display, FUNCTION PROTEC-PA.CRTLV-ENABLE). If this setting is set to “NO”, the unit works according to control mode 1; if it set to “YES”, according to mode 2.
Mode 1 (51V).
The phase pick up current is controlled by the phase to phase voltage V, which acts as a control.
When the control voltage is 10% of the rated value, the controlled pick up current is the 10% of the programmed value.
When the control voltage is 90% of the rated value, the controlled pick up current is the 90% of the programmed value.
Between both values, the variation of the pick up current in relation to the control voltage is lineal.
For control voltage values higher than the 90% of the rated value, the pick up current is the programmed value.
Mode 2 (51V).
When the control voltage is lower than a programmed value, function 51’s effective settings switch from those programmed in
"phase timing" to those programmed as “control by voltage”.
This function is subordinated to the phase timing function, in the sense that it makes the phase timing operate with other settings. However, if the phase timing function is disabled, function 51V has no effect.
The settings are as follow:
Enabling of voltage control: YES/NO (as mentioned before, YES to function in mode 1, NO in mode 2, providing that the phase timing “Acceleration” setting is set to “YES”).
Control voltage: 10 a 200 V
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 65
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Phase timing characteristic settings (pick-up, curve, time, etc.), corresponding to “voltage control”.
1.36 RESTRICTED EARTH PROTECTION (NEUTRAL DIFFERENTIAL 87N)
General description
The function compares the neutral current of one side of the breaker with the neutral current (residual current) of the other side of the breaker. The analysis can be carried out from the two perspectives:
Magnitude: if the difference between the residual current and the neutral current (algebraic sum), following the application of their respective transformation ratios, is to exceed the programmed threshold.
(
RTI
T
4
RTI
T
5
•
I
N
−
I
Re
s
)
≥
Setting
Directional: It must indicate that the fault is internal: the neutral current phase of the both sides of the breaker must be opposite in order to be considered an internal fault. If the residual current is less than 80mA, the directional is not taken into account. If the neutral current is less than 90mA, the trip is not permitted.
The restricted earth trip signals are emitted if the directional indicates an internal fault and the difference between both magnitudes is greater than the threshold.
The trip effected in this unit locks the closure order until it is restored by an input.
Important: in the NT family, the protection function acts with the Neutral current measurements and the G1 current.
For the rest of the families that include this function, it acts with the Neutral current and the residual current
(internally calculated from the phase currents).
Settings ranges
Setting
Instantaneous enabling
Trip (A)
Additional time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,2 100,0 0,01
0,00 10,00 0,01
1.37 COLD LOAD PICKUP
Description
This function is aimed at avoiding untimely trips when the load returning to a line that has been without supply for a certain period exceeds the value set for the protection without a fault having occurred, due to the expiry of the “off
“period of all the oven-, heater-, cooler-, etc. type loads and the simultaneous reconnection of all such elements. Such situations produce a heavy inrush current in the line which, nevertheless, can be supported for a certain period.: The effect can be produced not only upon the manual closure of a breaker that has been open for a period, but also with a permanently closed breaker, due to the opening of a breaker up-current.
This function detects such conditions and changes the trip settings during a programmable time.
The function is activated when the current in the 3 phases is below 0.1 A. In such circumstances, it begins to meter the programmed time to determine that the load is “cold” (this period can be 0, meaning that the opening of a circuit breaker would lead to a cold load situation). Once the period has expired and the current has not exceeded 0.2 A once more, the protection’s normal settings values are replaced by the cold load values. When any of the phase currents exceeds 0.2 A, the metering of a programmable begins, during which the cold load settings remain active. Upon the expiry of this period, the normal settings become active once again.
Settings (table 0, single)
They are accessed via the keyboard/display in "Table 0" - "Protections" - "Cold load pick up", or through the Console in the screen “Overcurrent- -Cold load Prot.” and they replace the standard functions when the condition is given:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 66
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Phase timing
Neutral timing
Phase instantaneous
Neutral instantaneous
Sensitive neutral timing
Sensitive neutral instantaneous
Under the name "Cold load pickup", they are also the settings that define the function’s range of activity:
“Cold load” function enabling: YES/NO
Cold load determination time: 0 to 10000 sec. In Console “Cold load time”
“Cold load” settings operating time: 1 to 3600 sec. (1 hour). In Console “Performance time”. During this time, and following the return of the current (>0.2A), all the overcurrent protection settings (phase, neutral and sensitive neutral) cease corresponding to the “active table” and correspond to “cold load”: enabling, pickups, curves, times, etc.
Remarks:
The “cold load” function is deactivated while the unit is on “ongoing cycle”, that is to say, while the closure control is assumed by the Reclosure function.
Example with opening and closure of breaker
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 67
Example with very low load
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.38 ISOLATED NEUTRAL PROTECTION
General description
The “Directional zero-sequence relay” function incorporated into the protection carries out a directional protection against earth faults in isolated neutral systems (function 67 NA). It can also be used as non-directional.
Input signals
Zero sequence current (IG): It comes from the connection in parallel of the secondaries of 3 phase current transformers or from a toroid transformer handling the 3 phases.
Zero sequence voltage (VG): If there are phase to earth voltage signals for each phase, it can be calculated internally. If not, it is measured from the open delta connection of three voltage transformers, with secondary rated voltage of 110/√3 V. A setting indicates which of the procedures is used.
Measurement ranges
Current: 5mA to 1A
Voltage: 0.5V to 200V (3*110/√3)
The characteristic curve of this protection function is as follows:
VG
VG
VH
VH
VL
VL
Trip Zone
disparo
IL
IL
IH
IH
IG
IG
The following parameters are adjustable
Isolated neutral unit enabling. When set to “YES”, the protection unit is allowed to act. When set to “NO”, the protection unit is inhibited.
Torque control (“External lock”). If set to “YES”, it operates as directional, checking the angle between VG and IG; if set to “NO”, it does not check the angle, i.e., it functions as non-directional.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 68
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Low current (IL of the characteristic curve). Range 0.005 to 1 A, with 1 mA resolution.
High current (IH). Range 0.005 to 1 A, with 1 mA resolution.
IH >= IL must be fulfilled.
Low voltage (VL). Range 0.5 V to 60 V. 0.1 V resolution.
High voltage (VH). Range 0.5 V to 60 V. Resolution 0.1 V. VH >= VL must be fulfilled.
First trip timing. Range 0 to 60 sec. Resolution 0.01 sec.
Inst. switching time. Range 0 to 10 sec. Resolution 0.1 sec.
Amplitude angle (degrees). Range 90 to 170. Resolution 1º.
Functioning as directional, the relay trips when the point defined by the VG and IG measured values lies within the characteristic zone's trip region. In relation to VG, the IG HAS A LAG within the interval indicated by the “Amplitude angle parameter / 2” parameter ± 90º. When functioning as “non-directional”, the only trip condition is that of falling within the characteristic area, irrespective of the angle.
The first trip is timed according to the corresponding parameter’s setting. The successive trips that occur during the time programmed as “switching time” as of the first trip are instantaneous; the first trip as of this that time is timed once again.
Settings ranges
Parameter
Isolated neutral enabling
Torque control (“External lock”)
Low current (A)
High current (A)
Low voltage (V)
High voltage (V)
First trip timing (s)
Inst. switching time
Amplitude angle (degrees).
0,5
0,5
0,0
0,0
90
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,005 1
0,005 1
0,001
0,001
60,0
60,0
60,0
10,0
170
0,1
1
0,1
0,1
1º
1.39 SURGE PROTECTION
General description
Three-phase surge protection, with the following selectable characteristics (function 59):
Timed characteristic
Normal inverse time. (I BSC or I ANSI)
Short inverse time (IL BSC)
Long inverse time (IL BSC)
Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
Special very inverse time (MIEs BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
User curve (USUAR 1)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristic:
Instantaneous element.
Additional time.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 69
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Setting
Phase time enabling
Timed phase pick up (V)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
5 200 0,1
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
0,05
0,5
0,00
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
600,00 0,01
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in the “Voltage Protection” screen in the Console.
The timed response curves are the same as those used by the overcurrent protections.
The pickup voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
In definite time, the relay trips upon the expiry of the programmed time as of the moment in which the start-up voltage is exceeded, independently of the current value.
When working with curves, the time that passes prior to the trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the voltage value. Appendix II contains graphs and formula for calculating the time in accordance with the quotient between the voltage and the pickup voltage.
The remarks on the accuracy of the timings are the same as those provided for the overcurrent function.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous phase enabling
Instantaneous phase trip (V)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
5
0,00
200 0,1
60,00 0,01
These settings can be found in the “Voltage Protection” screen in the Console.
The trip voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
The remarks about times are the same as those for the overcurrent function.
1.40 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
General description
Three-phase undervoltage protection with the following selectable characteristics (function 27):
Timed characteristic
Normal inverse time. (I BSC or I ANSI)
Short inverse time (IL BSC)
Long inverse time (IL BSC)
Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
Special very inverse time (MIEs BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
User curve (USUAR 1)
Definite time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 70
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Instantaneous characteristic:
Instantaneous element.
Additional time.
The functioning of this protection does not cause automatic reclosure.
Timed characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Setting
Phase timing enabling
Timed phase pick up (V)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
5 200 0,1
YES/NO
0,05
0,5
0,00
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
600,00 0,01
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in the “Voltage Protection” screen in the Console.
The timed response curves are the same as those used by the overcurrent protections.
The pickup voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
In definite time, the relay trips upon the expiry of the programmed time as of the moment in which the value falls below the start-up voltage, independently of the voltage value.
When working with curves, the time that passes prior to the trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the voltage value. Appendix II contains graphs and formula for calculating the time in accordance with the quotient between the voltage and the pickup voltage.
The remarks about times are the same as those for the overcurrent function.
Instantaneous characteristic settings ranges (4 tables)
Setting
Instantaneous phase enabling
Instantaneous phase trip (V)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
5
0,00
200
60,00
0,1
0,01
These settings can be found in the “Voltage Protection” screen in the Console.
The trip voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
The remarks about times are the same as those for the overcurrent function.
1.41 VOLTAGE UNBALANCE PROTECTION
Timed characteristic
This is a definite time protection unit. The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, the ratio in modules between the inverse sequence voltage and direct sequence voltage.
The relay trips once the programmed time has elapsed from the moment the pickup setting value is exceeded.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Enabling
Broken conductor timing pick (A)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,10 0,50 0,01 Expressed as a decimal. V2/V1
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 71
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Definite time(s) 0,0 600,0 0,1
These settings can be found in the “Voltage Protection” screen in the Console.
Instantaneous characteristic
This is a definite time protection unit. It only checks if the voltage phase succession order is the programmed order or the opposite order. In the event of the latter, it trips following the programmed time.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Enabling
Definite time(s)
Min Max Step Remarks
0,00 60,00 0,01
YES/NO
The settings of both characteristics can be found in the “Voltage Protection” screen in the Console.
1.42 MAXIMUM ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Zero sequence voltage surge protection (function 64 or 59N). The pick-up value to be adjusted is the zero sequence voltage received from the secondary open delta connection of the three voltage transformers.
The function has the following selectable characteristics:
Timed characteristic
Normal inverse time. (I BSC or I ANSI)
Short inverse time (IL BSC)
Long inverse time (IL BSC)
Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
Special very inverse time (MIEs BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
User curve (USUAR 1)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristic:
Instantaneous element.
Additional time.
The functioning of this protection does not cause automatic reclosure.
The function can be disabled by means of a setting (simultaneously timed and instantaneous).
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Unit enabling
Maximum zero sequence voltage timing pick up (V)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite timed unit time (s)
Instantaneous maximum zero sequence voltage pick up (V)
Additional instantaneous unit time (s)
0
2
0
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO (see Note)
2
0,05
0,5
200 0,1
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
600,0 0,1
200 0,1
60,00 0,01
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 72
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Note. These settings can be found in the “Generic Unit” column of the “Voltage Protection” screen in the Console. To be enabled, “Unit type” must be programmed as “SobT” (equivalent to “YES” via keyboard/display), whereas if it is programmed as “SubT” the function is disabled (equivalent to “NO” via keyboard/display).
The timed response curves are the same as those used by the overcurrent protections.
The pickup voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
In definite time, the relay trips upon the expiry of the programmed time as of the moment in which the start-up voltage is exceeded, independently of the current value.
1.43 FREQUENCY PROTECTION
This function is composed of 5 steps, which are programmable as maximum or minimum frequencies.
Minimum frequency
General description
Each step picks up when the frequency falls below the set value during a number of cycles equal or higher than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be produced. The unit drops out if the frequency is correct during 2 cycles.
Locks
If the phase B voltage (in the case of three-phase voltage units, TT and SV) is lower than the “Minimum monitoring voltage” setting, the frequency unit is not allowed to pick up. In the case of single-phase units
(TF), the single voltage measurement must also be higher than the above-mentioned setting in order to allow the pickup.
Settings (4 tables)
Parameter
Minimum frequency enabling.
Minimum frequency pick-up (Hz)
Definite time(s)
Minimum monitoring voltage (V)
Nº of pick-up cycles
Min Max
40 70
Step Remarks
YES/NO (for each step)
0,01 (for each step)
0 600,00 0,01 (for each step)
12 200
3 15
1
1
(for all steps)
(for all steps)
The minimum voltage setting is common for maximum and minimum frequency.
In the Console, the settings corresponding to each step are to be found in the “FREQUENCY PROTECTION” box in the “Frequency protection” screen. The common settings, minimum voltage and number of pickup cycles are found in the “FREQUENCY MONITORING” box.
Frequency rate of change
Parameter
General description
This function has 4 steps. In each step, a relay is activated if the frequency variation per time unit
(frequency decrease) is higher than the set value.
The function is only effective for frequencies inferior to a threshold called “maximum monitoring frequency”.
Settings (4 tables)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 73
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Frequency rate of change / voltage rate of change enabling
Maximum monitoring frequency (Hz) 40
Pick-up value (frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change) (Hz/s) 0,2
Additional time (s)
Nº of pick-up cycles D81
0
3
70
10
2
15
YES/NO (for all steps)
0,01 (per step)
0,05 (per step)
0,01 (per step)
1 (for all steps)
In the Console, the settings corresponding to each step are to be found in the “FREQUENCY RATE OF
CHANGE” box in the “Frequency protection” screen. The common settings, minimum voltage and number of pickup cycles D81 (for the rate of change) are found in the “FREQUENCY MONITORING” box.
Each cycle’s frequency is measured by refreshing the frequency each half cycle, as shown in the figure:
The algorithm is executed each 5ms in the event of the phase B voltage registering zero.
Both the positive and negative registers are measured, although the frequency measurement is carried out for complete cycles. The frequency is measured up to 25Hz. Below this value, the frequency units are not activated.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 74
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
The algorithm stores the periods of the signal’s last 5 cycles and calculates the frequency rate of change by comparing the current cycle’s frequency measurement with the measurement taken from 5 cycles previously, taking into account the time lapse between both. frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change = (f1-f5)/(T1+T2+T3+T4)
In which: f5 =frequency measurement taken 4 cycles previously f4 =frequency measurement taken 3 cycles previously T4 period of the 4th cycle starting from the end f3 =frequency measurement taken 2 cycles previously f2 =frequency measurement taken 1 cycle previously f1 =Last frequency measurement
T3 period of the 3rd cycle starting from the end
T2 period of the 2nd cycle starting from the end
T1 period of the last cycle f(Hz) f5
α=Arctan(df/dt) f4 f3 f2
T4 T3
T2 T1 f1 t(s)
This calculation is repeated, taking into account the measurements separated by two cycles in order to ensure that the frequency has fallen during the entire period, i.e., to ensure that an incorrect measurement does not lead to a trip.
For the unit to pick up, the frequency rate of change must exceed by an absolute value during the set number of cycles.
The pickup only occurs when a negative frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value is obtained, i.e., when the current frequency is inferior to that measured 5 cycles previously.
During the pickup process, one measurement is allowed to be out of the pickup range without restarting the process. For example, if 3 cycles (set to 7 cycles) are required to cause a pickup, the threshold need only be exceeded 3 times from a total of 4 consecutive measurements.
In order for a trip to occur once the unit has picked up, the frequency rate of change measurement must remain between the set frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value and a drop out value to the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change minus 0.05Hz/s during the set time.
Df/dt<df/dt setting(step 1) f<f supervision (step 1)
Cycle no.-4
T addit. Df/dt
(Step 1)
TRIP Df/dt
(step 1) f<f 81minimum (level 1)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Cycle no.
TRIP Df/dt (step 1)
& 81m (step 1))
75
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
If an input is programmed as a breaker associated to the frequency rate of change, the trip is sealed until that input is detected as open.
In order for the unit to drop out once it has picked up, the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change measurement must be detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value.
Locks
The frequency rate of change units lock as a result of:
Minimum monitoring voltage. Similarly, if the phase B voltage is inferior to the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is not allowed to pick up. When the voltage exceeds the set threshold, the relay waits for 10 cycles before running the frequency rate of change function.
Maximum frequency
General description
This function produces a pick up when the frequency exceeds the set value during a number of cycles equal to or greater than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be produced. The unit drops out if the frequency is correct during 2 cycles.
Locks
If the phase B voltage is inferior to “Minimum monitoring voltage” setting, the frequency unit is not allowed to pick up.
Settings (4 tables)
Parameter
Maximum frequency enabling.
Maximum frequency pick-up (Hz)
Definite time(s)
Nº of pick-up cycles
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
40
0
3
70 0,01
600,00 0,01
15 1 (for all steps)
1.44 THERMAL IMAGE
General description
This function calculates a temperature in accordance with the protected unit’s recent and current load conditions.
This temperature is displayed as a % in relation to the trip value. When the programmed value is reached, an alarm relay is activated (when programmed), and when it reaches 100%, the thermal image trip relay (if the unit is enabled) and the corresponding signalling are activated. Once the unit has been tripped as a result, the relay does not drop-out while the calculated temperature remains above the drop out threshold setting and the rest of the locking conditions are fulfilled. The calculated temperature can be reset through the keyboard/display (accessing through “ ↓” to
TEMP=0? and pressing ↓ for 2 seconds) or through by means of a console command.
The time which elapses before the trip is determined by the following curves, which establish the time in accordance with the ratio between the current and the programmed rated current, and the programmed heating constant.
According to the following formula (starting from temperature 0):
In which t: trip time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 76
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
:
I: heating constant measured current
..I0: programmed rated current
Once it has tripped, there is another programmable time constant for the cooling.
Settings
Setting
Enabling
Heating time constant (min)
Cooling time constant (min)
Alarm threshold (%)
Drop out threshold (%)
Rated current (A)
Min Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
3 60 1
3 180 1
80 100 1
50 99
0,02
0,1
20,0
100,0
1
0,01
0,01
RT family (Model C)
Other families
Trip times
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 77
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Heating curves
The heating curve is calculated using the following formula:
In which: Tf = final temperature
Ti = initial temperature
t = time
= heating time constant
For Ti = 0 the formula is reduced to
As
The heating curve is
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 78
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
The next figure shows examples of heating curves with a 3 minute time constant for I/I0 = 1 and for I/I0 = 2
Cooling curves
The cooling curve is calculated using the following formula:
In which: Tf = final temperature
Ti = initial temperature
t = time
= cooling time constant
Starting from Ti = 1 (100 in %), which is the tripping temperature, the formula employed to obtain a final temperature of Tf = 0 (i.e., current I = 0) is as follows:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 79
Example: cooling curve with 3 minute constant
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Combined examples of cooling and heating:
1. Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =1 for 200sec, I/I0 =2 for the next 200 sec (without tripping) and, as of that point, it returns indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both with 3 minute time constants):
2. Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =0.5 for 200sec, I/I0 =1.5 until reaching 100%, at which point the trip is produced, as of that point, it cools with I/I0 = 0 (both with 3 minute time constants):
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 80
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.45 PHASE SHIFT
General description
This function produces a trip when a lead/lag variation superior to the set value is detected within a period inferior to 2 cycles.
Settings
Parameter
Enabling of phase shift
Protection lead/lag (degrees)
Voltage threshold (V)
Trip type
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
2
40
22
200
1
1
SINGLE/THREE-PHASE
This function compares the angle of each phase with the angle present during the previous cycle. If it detects that the variation of the angle is greater than the setting value, and provided that the voltage has not dropped between both the measurements by more than 25%; the locking input is deactivated, and the current measured is higher than the setting value, the function will trip.
If the “Trip Type” setting is set as three-phase, the three measurement phases detect the angle lag difference simultaneously; to the contrary, the trip does not occur. However, if it is set as single phase, the trip occurs even when only one of the phases detects the angle variation.
Function limitations with the frequency
When the injected voltage frequency differs from the set rated frequency value (50/60 Hz), the phase shift protection function may trip, in accordance with the setting. The table below details the ratio between the frequency and the phase shift angle setting value.
Fn = 50Hz
Fn = 60Hz
50.3
50.4
50.5
50.6
50.7
50.8
50.9
Frequency
49
49.1
49.2
49.3
49.4
49.5
49.6
49.7
49.8
49.9
50.1
50.2
51
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2
2
3
5
4
3
. Phase shift trip
11
10
9
8
7
6
60.3
60.4
60.5
60.6
60.7
60.8
60.9
61
Frequency
59
59.1
59.2
59.3
59.4
59.5
59.6
59.7
59.8
59.9
60.1
60.2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2
2
3
5
4
3
. Phase shift trip
11
10
9
8
7
6
This table indicates that, with an injected current frequency of 49.8 Hz and a rated frequency, the unit will trip directly due to the phase shift if the angle is set to a value equal to or lower than 3º. Above this setting value and at that frequency, the phase shift protection functions correctly.
A limitation for the protection function, dependent on the rated frequency, has also been included. If the rated frequency is 50 Hz, the protection will remain locked for frequency values equal to or lower than 49 Hz, or equal to or
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 81
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
higher than 51 Hz. If the rated frequency is 60Hz, the protection will remain locked for frequency values equal to or lower than 59Hz, or equal to or higher than 61Hz.
1.46 POWER PROTECTIONS
General
Using the current and voltage measurements, the protection calculates the real and reactive power and the power factor and, in accordance with these values, carries out the different protection functions indicated below. The trip thresholds are programmed as a percentage of the rated apparent power,
S = 3 × V × I
, in which:
V: programmed phase to phase rated voltage
I: 5 A (unit’s rated current)
Note: The measurement range is 0.02 to 6 A and the protection range is 0.1 to 10 A
Note: The outgoing real power is considered positive, whilst the incoming real power is considered negative.
Minimum power protection
General description
This function provides protection against excessive decreases in the generated power and compares the real power with the minimum power given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being inferior to the power established in the setting, the protection trips the corresponding relay. Any reverse power will be considered as below the minimum power threshold and will thus activate the function.
Settings ranges
Setting
Enabling
Minimum power trip (%)
Additional time (s)
Min Max Step Remarks
1,0 200,0 0,1
YES/NO
0,00 60,00 0,01
The trip power is set as a % of the rated power, which is defined by the rated voltage value and by the protection’s rated current.
If an additional time is programmed as 0, the trip will occur in 40 ms. Any additional time programmed is added to the aforementioned time.
Maximum power protection
General description
Provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated.
It functions in a similar manner to that described above. The protection will trip the corresponding relay when the generated real power is greater than the set value. There are two units with different ranges for the additional time, HI-Set and LO-Set.
Settings ranges
Setting
HI-Set enabled
Maximum HI-Set power trip (%)
Additional HI-Set time (s)
LO-Set enabling
Maximum LO-Set power trip (%)
Additional LO-Set time (s)
Min. Max Step Remarks
1,0 200,0 0,1
YES/NO
0,00 60,00 0,01
1,0 200,0 0,1
YES/NO
0,0 600,0 0,1
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 82
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Power inversion protection
General description
The protection is activated when the power flow is inverted and exceeds the set value. In such a situation, the protection trips the programmed relay or relays.
This function also provides the option of programming two settings with different timing ranges.
Settings ranges
Setting
HI-Set enabled
HI-Set power inversion trip (%)
Additional HI-Set time (s)
LO-Set enabling
LO-Set power inversion trip (%)
Additional LO-Set time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
1,0 200,0 0,1
YES/NO
0,00
1,0
0,0
60,00
200,0
600,0
0,01
0,1
0,1
YES/NO
Minimum apparent power protection
General description
Provides protection against excessive decreases in the power generated. Employing the voltage and current measurements, the protection calculates the real and reactive power, as well as the power factor, and compares the apparent power with the minimum power according to the setting. In the event of the generated power being inferior to the power established in the setting, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
Settings ranges
Setting
Enabling
Minimum power trip (%)
Additional time (s)
Min. Max Step Remarks
1,0 200,0 0,1
0,00 60,00 0,01
YES/NO
The trip power is set as a % of the rated power, which is defined by the rated voltage value and by the protection’s rated current (unit’s rated current).
Maximum apparent power protection
General description
Provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated.
It functions in a similar manner to that described above. The protection trips the corresponding relay when the generated apparent power is greater than the set value. There are two units with different ranges for the additional time, HI-Set and LO-Set.
Settings ranges
Setting
HI-Set enabling
Maximum HI-Set power trip (%)
Additional HI-Set time (s)
LO-Set enabling
Maximum LO-Set power trip (%)
Additional LO-Set time (s)
Min. Max Step Remarks
YES/NO
1,0 200,0 0,1
0,00 60,00 0,01
YES/NO
1,0 200,0 0,1
0,0 600,0 0,1
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 83
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.47 OVEREXCITATION PROTECTION
General description
Overexcitation protection with the following selectable characteristics (function 24):
Timed characteristic:
Inverse time
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristic:
Instantaneous element
Additional time
This protection has an operating range of 40 to 70 Hz.
Timed characteristic setting range
Setting
Phase timing enabling
Minimum voltage (V)
Timed phase pick up (%Vn/Fn)
Timed response type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Drop off time (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
40
100
120
400
1
1
0,05
0,5
0
0
1,09
30,0
100
100
0,01
0,1
0,1
0,1
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
Since the overexcitation of the protected unit can be assimilated to the voltage quotient (V) between the frequency
(Hz), the pick up is set as a decimal of the value of the quotient between the rated voltage and rated frequency.
In definite time, the relay trips upon the expiry of the programmed time as of the moment in which the start-up percentage is exceeded, independently of the overexcitation value.
When working with curves, the time that passes prior to the trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the voltage/frequency quotient value. Appendix II contains graphs and formula for calculating the time in accordance with the relation between the voltage/frequency and the pickup voltage/frequency. For quotients higher than 4.0, 4.0 is taken as a value.
The drop off time can be adapted to the protected unit’s cooling characteristic, when known. If it is not, a setting from within the prescribed range is used. A lineal drop off model is used, i.e., if the function picks up and the measurement decreases without a trip, the drop off takes into account the time during which the protection has been picked up. If a further pick up occurs before the total drop off is completed, the time prior to a trip is reduced.
An example in the case of Definite time:
Definite time: 10 sec.
Drop off time: 100 sec.
If, following the pick up, the function remains in this status for 4 sec. and the measurement decreases. The total drop off time will be 40 sec. i.e.:
Drop offtime
(sec .)
=
Setting
(
Drop offtime
)
Setting
(
Definiteti me
)
∗
Pickuptime
If the time during which the measurement decreases is 10sec., the trip time once the function has picked up once more will be 7 sec.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 84
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
i.e.:
If the function has dropped off for 10sec, it is as if the function had been picked up for 1 sec. less.
Pickuptime
(sec .)
=
Setting
(
Definiteti me
)
∗
Setting
(
Drop offtime
)
Drop offtime
(sec)
Therefore, the trip time is 10-(4-1)=7 sec.
Instantaneous characteristic settings range
Setting
Instantaneous phase enabling
Minimum voltage (V)
Instantaneous phase trip (% Vn/Fn)
Additional instantaneous time (s)
Drop off time (s)
Minimum
40
100
0
0
Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
120
400
10
100
1
1
0,01
0,1
The trip is set as a decimal of the value of the quotient between the rated voltage and rated frequency.
If an additional time is programmed as 0, the trip will occur in 60 ms. Any additional programmed time includes the indicated time, i.e., it is time limit for the trip.
Similarly, when a pick up is followed by a drop off without the occurrence of a trip and the trip conditions are repeated without a total drop off occurring, the lineal drop off will provoke the protection into waiting a shorter time before tripping.
1.48 FIELD LOSS PROTECTION
General description
Field loss protection (generator excitation) with the following selectable characteristics (function 40):
2 MHO trip zones with independent settings
1 directional unit common to both zones
1 undervoltage unit common to both zones. The enabling can be carried out independently for each zone.
General field loss settings range
Setting
Function enabling
Minimum voltage pick-up
Directional unit lead/lag
Phase to which the current trafo is connected
.
Rated voltage
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
10,0
0
65,0
180
0,1
1
YES/NO
Clockwise
50,0 165,0 0,1
Phase A / phase B / phase C
The setting for the phase to which the current transformer is connected is essential for the correct calculation of the impedance detected by the protection, as this value is calculated using the current and the phase to phase voltage of the other two phases.
The directional unit angle allows the protection to be locked in a specific direction.
Rated voltage: used to provide measurements in Procome format (the scale range of the voltage measurements is 1.2 times the rated voltage).
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 85
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
MHO zone settings range
Setting
Z1A impedance setting (offset) (Ohm)
Z1B impedance setting (diameter) (Ohm)
Zone 1 undervoltage supervision
Zone 1 alarm timing (s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
-20,0 20,0 0,1
0,0
0,0
120,0
9,9
0,1
0,1
YES/NO
Zone 1 trip timing (s)
Zone MHO 2 has the same settings range as MHO 1.
0,00 9,99 0,01
The Z1A and Z1B settings limit the MHO 1 trip zone (in the same way that Z2A and Z2B limit zone MHO 2). The Z1A setting represents the offset (in ohms) of the upper section of the zone. This value can be positive (see Z1A in figure
1) or negative (see Z2A for zone MHO 2). The Z1B setting represents the diameter of the MHO 1 zone.
The protection acts differently depending on whether the zone is in undervoltage conditions or not. A zone is under undervoltage conditions when the following conditions are fulfilled:
The measurement in any of the voltage phases is below the undervoltage pickup value, or
The undervoltage monitoring setting of the zone in question is disabled.
When a generator enters one of these MHO zones, a timer is activated. The alarm signal is produced instantaneously and the trip depends on the timer in use. If the zone is not under these undervoltage conditions, the zone alarm timer is activated. Nevertheless, if the zone is under these undervoltage conditions, the zone’s trip will be activated as a timer. This last timer must be set to a value lower than the other timer, as faults must be cleared quickly when the undervoltage conditions occur, given the limited possibilities of the generator recovering and the consequent risk of instability in the electrical system. Once the timer time has elapsed, the corresponding outputs are activated.
1.49 FAULT PASSOVER DETECTION
Isolation of the fault
If the fault passover detection automatism is detected as enabled when the unit is started, or if the automatism is enabled during the unit’s normal operation, an internal check is performed to determine whether the unit is ready to function correctly.
The internal checks to be performed are indicated below:
Voltage presence.
V absence with I presence anomaly.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 86
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
If an input is configured as a breaker status, the breaker is checked as being closed.
PL70 RC the unit cannot be in service.
If the checks are successful, the automatism begins the periodic monitoring of the phase and neutral currents, as well as the presence of voltage. To the contrary, the automatism is disabled and an entry is registered in the event log.
2
nd
harmonic restraint
This function locks the phase, neutral and neutral sensible fault passover detection (timed and instantaneous) and is equipped with restraint per phase or phases.
If programmed as a phase restraint:
To activate the lock, the following must occur simultaneously at least in the phase in question:
The fundamental current must exceed the minimum restraint value.
The relationship between the 2 nd
harmonic value and the fundamental must exceed a set threshold.
The 2nd harmonic current must exceed 0.75mA for 3A trafos and 0.50mA for 2A trafos.
The following must be met for the lock to be disabled:
The phase in question is inferior to 95% of the minimum current threshold, or
The phase in question is inferior to 95% of the restraint percentage threshold
This case is the same for the neutral and neutral sensitive. The sensitive neutral settings are the same as the neutral settings.
When programmed as "restraint for all phases”, the presence of the conditions in one phase is sufficient to lock the other phases.
The settings (4 tables) are:
Setting
Phase enabling
Neutral enabling
Threshold %I2f/If
Minimum phase current (A)
Minimum neutral current (A)
Min Max Step Remarks
5
0,015
0,003
0,008
0,002
100
3,000
3,000
3,000
2,000
1
0,001
0,001
0,001
0,001
NO
Phase restraint
Restraint for all phases
NO
YES
Models A and B
Models C and D
Models A and B
Models C and D
The settings can be found in the “2 nd harmonic restraint and manual closure prot. lock” screen in the Console.
Discrimination between inrush faults for instantaneous units
In order to distinguish inrush from instantaneous fault passover detection faults, a wave-form based algorithm has been added. In order to consider a signal as a fault, the wave must exceed 100% of setting in the fundamental component and 80% of the set threshold in instantaneous positive and negative values.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 87
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Extinguished current
The extinguished current settings (phase, neutral and neutral sensible) are adjusted in secondary values. This is the maximum current value below which the unit considers that the current is extinguished in the system.
These settings can be found in the “DPF cut organ protection” screen in the Console, or via keyboard/display (within
OCR, in EXTING. CURRENT).
Setting
Phase current (A)
Neutral current (A)
Sensitive neutral current (A)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
0,006 3,000 0.001
0,002 2,000 0,001
0.002 2,000 0,001
Voltage presence detector
Three hardware options are available for detecting voltage presence:
Digital input programming: “Voltage presence” or “Relay CAPDIS 1” and “Relay CAPDIS 2”.
Conventional voltage input (Vn = 110/125Vac)
Input adapted for the measurement provided by the
capacitive splitter. A more economic solution than the use of conventional VTs
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
PL70SC connections with input for capacitive splitter
(only certain of the DIs and DOs available in the unit are shown).
88
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
PL70RS connections with input for capacitive splitter
(only certain of the DIs and DOs available in the unit are shown).
The voltage presence detection functions as an additional security element to the fault detection and selector automatism. However, a fault in the detection function does not invalidate its functioning, given that the presence of current impedes the execution of the breaking command.
A failure in the presence signal (for example, as a result of a broken capacitive splitter) may be supervised using the
“V abs. with I pres. anomaly” signal, which indicates a lack of voltage with the presence of current – a situation which is indicative of a problem in the voltage circuit - in a phase or in the neutral.
Digital Inputs
There are two options for determining the detection of voltage presence by means of programmable digital inputs:
•
Programming of the “Relay CAPDIS 1” and “Relay CAPDIS 2” digital inputs. Both inputs must be programmed, otherwise a user configuration fault will be registered and the associated internal logic will not function. The interpretation of the digital inputs is shown below:
“Relay CAPDIS 1” ON and “Relay CAPDIS 2” ON: Absence of voltage in one or two phases.
“Relay CAPDIS 1” ON and “Relay CAPDIS 2” OFF: Voltage presence.
“Relay CAPDIS 1” OFF and “Relay CAPDIS 2” ON: Absence of voltage in the three phases.
“Relay CAPDIS 1” OFF and “Relay CAPDIS 2” OFF: Capdis failure.
•
Programming of “Voltage presence” digital input. The interpretation of this digital input is shown below:
1.
“Voltage presence” OFF: Absence of voltage in the three phases.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 89
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
2.
“Voltage presence” ON: Voltage presence.
The following priority levels have been established to determine voltage presence.
1.
“Relay CAPDIS 1” and “Relay CAPDIS 2” digital inputs.
2.
“Voltage presence” digital input.
3. Conventional voltage capacitive splitter input.
Measurement corrections
This function only applies to models with voltage measurement with an input for a capacitive splitter
(PL70SC and RS bushing insulator).
Each measurement has a correction factor, which multiplies the measurement in order to correct any differences between the different sensors and, in the case of voltage, the bushing insulators and signalling circuits.
In the case of RS, there are three voltage factors, one for each phase.
Setting
Voltage factor
Phase A voltage factor
Phase B voltage factor
Phase C voltage factor
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
0,2000 1,8000 0,0001 SC family (Models B and D)
0,2000 1,8000 0,0001 RS family
0,2000 1,8000 0,0001 RS family
0,2000 1,8000 0,0001 RS family
The unit is equipped with a further Setting: Bushing insulator capacity, which must be set in accordance with the capacity of the bushing insulator to which it is to be connected. If an incorrect setting is employed, the voltage measurement will be affected.
Setting
Bushing insulator capacity (pF)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
3,0 35,0 0,1
In the event of the bushing insulator’s capacity not being known, the defect value 20 pF should be employed. In a given installation in which a 20 pF setting measures V (kV), a change in the setting to C pF will result in the measurement being multiplied by 20/C, that is to say, if the setting is programmed at 10 pF, the measurement will be doubled.
A more precise measurement is obtained with the correction factor. If, for example, the measurement is 24 kV when it should be 22, a voltage factor of 22/22 = 0.92 should be programmed.
The same is applicable to currents: if a measurement of 580 A instead of 600 A is obtained in phase C, the
“phase C factor” should be set at 600/580 = 1.03
A specific setting indicates if xenon lights have been connected. When lights are connected, the measurements are corrected.
Setting
Light correction
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
XENON/N
O
In PL70RS units with voltage measurement and capacitive splitter input, voltage is calculated using the current circulating through a capacitive circuit. Due to the characteristics of the capacitive circuits, a phase difference is entered between the current circulating through the circuit and the voltage to be measured. This phase difference is compensated with the “lead/lag adjustment” setting.
Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
Angle correction (deg.) 0,0 359,9 0,1
These settings can be found in the “Programmable factors and bushing insulators” screen in the Console.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 90
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Phase current passover detection
General description
Fault passover detection for 2 phases (phase A and C), with the following selectable characteristics:
Timed characteristic
Normal inverse time. (I BSC or I ANSI)
Short inverse time (IL BSC)
Long inverse time (IL BSC)
Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
Special very inverse time (MIEs BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
User curve (USUAR 1)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristic
Instantaneous element
Additional time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 91
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Timed characteristic settings range
Setting
Phase fault passover detection enabling
Phase fault passover detection pick up (A)
Curve type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Min
0,015
0,003
Max
3,000
3,000
Step
0,001
0,001
Remarks
YES/NO
Models A and B
Models C and D
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
0,05
0,5
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
0,00 600,00 0,01
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in the “DPF cut-out organs protection” screen in the Console.
If the Enable setting is set at YES, the function can consider the existence of a fault. If it is set at NO, the function is not activated. This is common to the timed fault passover detection functions.
The start-up current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
When working with definite times, once the unit registers a current in one of the phases that is greater than the pick up setting during a period equal to or greater than the setting, the unit considers that there is a fault and starts all the logic inherent to the fault passover detection, as explained in “General fault passover detection settings” section.
Should the fault disappear and the current in A and C and Neutral fall below 1% of the setting (or a definite noise threshold, whichever is greater), the T. Fault Memory time will be counted down. If there is no voltage presence or current in any phase or in the neutral upon the conclusion of this period, timed phase fault passover detection is signalled.
When working with curves, the time the unit takes to consider the existence of a fault depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the current value. The normal, very inverse, extremely inverse and user curves can be selected as corresponding to the BS142 (IEC 255-4) standard or ANSI. Appendix II contains graphics and formulas for the calculation of the time in accordance with the quotient between the current and the pickup current. If the quotient is higher than 40, 40 is taken for the calculation.
Instantaneous characteristic settings range
Setting
Phase fault passover detection enabling
Phase fault passover detection pick up (A)
Definite time(s)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/YES+INRUSH/
NO
0,015
0,003
0,00
3,000
3,000
0,001
0,001
60,00 0,01
Models A and B
Models C and D
These settings can be found in the “DPF cut-out organs protection” screen in the Console.
If the Enabling setting is set to YES+INRUSH, the function can consider the existence of a fault when no inrush is detected by means of the harmonic analysis of the waveform: If it is set to YES, the unit may consider the existence of a fault regardless of the inrush. If it is set to NO, the function is not activated. This is common to the instantaneous fault passover detection functions.
The start-up current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
Once the unit registers a current in one of the phases that is greater than the pick up setting and, furthermore, no inrush is detected by means of the harmonic analysis of the wave form within a time equal to or higher than the setting (when the enabling setting is set to YES+INRUSH – to the contrary, the inrush is disregarded), the unit considers that there is a fault and starts all the logic inherent to the fault passover detection, as explained in the “General fault passover detection settings” section.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 92
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Should the fault disappear and the current in A and C and Neutral fall below 1% of the setting (or a definite noise threshold, whichever is greater), the T. Fault Memory time will be counted down. If there is no voltage presence or current in any phase or in the neutral upon the conclusion of this period, instantaneous phase fault passover detection is signalled.
Neutral fault passover detection
General description
In neutral earthed installations, this provides neutral fault passover detection with the same characteristics options as those described for phases, as well as independent settings.
Timed characteristic settings range
Setting
Neutral fault passover detection enabling
Min Max
3,000
2,000
Step
0,001
0,001
Remarks
YES/NO
Models A and B
Models C and D
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
Curve type
User curve
T h e s
Time index
Definite time(s)
0,05
0,5
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
0,00 600,00 0,01
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves e settings can be found in the “DPF cut-out organs protection” screen in the Console.
The remarks on curves and accuracy in times are the same as those quoted for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic settings range
Setting
Neutral fault passover detection enabling
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
0,00
3,000
2,000
60,00
0,001
0,001
0,01
YES/YES+INRUSH/NO
Models A and B
Models C and D
Definite time(s)
These settings can be found in the “DPF cut-out organs protection” screen in the Console.
Sensitive neutral fault passover detection
General description
This provides sensitive neutral fault passover detection with the same characteristics options as those described for phases, as well as independent settings.
The sensitive neutral fault passover detection function is effected on the neutral measurement.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 93
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Timed characteristic settings range
Setting
Sensitive neutral fault passover detection enabling
Sensitive neutral fault passover detection pick up (A)
Curve type
Time index
Definite time(s)
Min
0,008
0,002
Max
3,000
2,000
Step
0,001
0,001
Remarks
YES/NO
Models A and B
Models C and D
0,05
0,5
1,09
30,0
0,01
0,1
0,00 600,00 0,01
Definite time
Normal curve, very, extreme. Inverse, etc.
User curve
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
These settings can be found in the “DPF cut-out organs protection” screen in the Console.
The remarks on curves and accuracy in times are the same as those quoted for phases.
Instantaneous characteristic settings range
Setting
Sensitive neutral fault passover detection enabling
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/YES+INRUSH/NO
0,00
3,000
2,000
0,001
0,001
60,00 0,01
Models A and B
Models C and D
Definite time(s)
These settings can be found in the “DPF cut-out organs protection” screen in the Console.
General fault passover detection settings
Setting
Voltage presence level (V)
Voltage absence level (V)
Voltage presence/absence hysteresis level (%)
Fault memory time (s)
Minimum voltage presence drop off time (s)
Light signal drop off time (min.)
Remote signal disabling passover time (sec.)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
10,0
4000
270,0
45000
0,1
1 PL70 bushing insulator
10,0
4000
0.0
0,0
270,0
45000
100
100,0
0,1
1
0.1
0,1
PL70 bushing insulator
0,0
5
0
1800,0 0,1
181
1801 1
The voltage presence level setting is set in secondary values. It is the minimum voltage value for which the unit considers there is voltage within the system.
The voltage absence level setting is set in secondary values. It is the maximum voltage value below which the unit considers there is an absence of voltage within the system.
Programmable voltage presence/absence hysteresis (%). A single setting is used to indicate voltage presence and absence hysteresis in order to avoid unnecessary variations.
Remote passover disabled time signal (sec.) is the waiting time before the remote fault passover detection signal is disabled. If the setting is set to 1801 seconds, the signal is not deactivated once the set period has elapsed. It will only be deactivated once the system has successfully reclosed and there is voltage presence once more. Following the elapse of the
minimum voltage presence time, the current passover due to fault detection is deactivated.
The fault passover detection function uses the programmed voltage presence input to verify voltage presence.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 94
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
"Remote signal off time step" set has a different value to 1801 seconds.
"Remote signal off time step" set has a value of 1801 seconds.
The attached time diagrams shows 3 moments:
The moment in which the fault occurs
Unsuccessful reclosure
Successful reclosure
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 95
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Fault memory time
This is the time elapsed as of the moment in which the fault drop out is detected (when the current drops below 1% of the pickup setting) until the DPF signal, which is transmitted to the breaker automatism, is activated (next section). If there is voltage presence upon the expiry of this period, the DPF signal is not activated.
The LED (corresponding to the phase or neutral fault signalling programming) is activated as of the moment the start of the first fault. It can be deactivated when in the following cases: the
voltage presence minimum time has elapsed; once the system has been successfully reclosed and there is voltage presence again, the LED is deactivated following this period.
If the system is not restored (in which case there would be no voltage presence), this luminous signal is deactivated once elapsed the time programmed in the luminous signal restoration time setting.
If this setting is programmed at 181 minutes, the luminous signal is not deactivated when this time elapses. In such a case, the signal is deactivated manually by simultaneous pressing the permission (“·”) and automatism
(“A”) keys.
If the digital input programmed as “rearm” is activated.
Passover due to fault simulation
The unit’s front board has four buttons, labelled “I”, “O”, “·” (permission) and “A/M” (Automatic/Manual). By pressing
“I” for 2 seconds, the unit activates the signals related to the passover due to fault algorithm for 1 second, thus enabling the unit’s operation to be checked.
1.50 FAULT PASSOVER DETECTION DIRECTIONALITY
The fault passover detection functions can be directional in the RS family.
In such a case, each of the functions (timed and instantaneous) has an additional setting, “Torque control”, which if set
FORWARD or REVERSE indicates that the function is to act as directional (in either of the direction). If set to NO it acts as
NON DIRECTIONAL.
The settings corresponding to the directionality criteria are found in the “Overcurrent protection (3)” screen. The options are shown below, followed by descriptions of the functions.
Phase direction criterion. Applicable in the phase directional function (67). Options: “Quadrature” or “No”.
Phase lead/lag (degrees). Programmable between 0º and 360º. Applicable in the phase directional function (67).
Neutral directional type. Can be set as "Angular criterion" or "No".
Neutral directional criterion. Applied in the neutral directional function when polarized by tension. The following neutral direction criterion is employed: S0 (zero sequence voltage polarization).
Neutral lead/lag (degrees). Programmable between 0º and 360º. Applied to the neutral directional function (67N) when the S0 neutral direction criterion has been selected.
V polarization. This is the minimum polarization voltage value, below which it is considered that the direction is not known with certainty.
Minimum Vn threshold. The minimum VN threshold must be exceed in order to permit the pick up of the neutral directional unit.
Trip permission without Vpol (in display, Directional lock) If set to YES, it enables fault passover detection if the polarization voltage is lower than the minimum polarization voltage; if set to NO, fault passover detection is not allowed under such conditions.
Phase zone amplitude and Neutral zone amplitude. These settings indicate the angle covering the phase and neutral units’ trip zones, respectively. That is, if the maximum torque line is set to 0º and the amplitude of the pick zone to
70º, the relay trips between +35 º and -35 º. The lock zone is obtained by adding to 5º to each side of the zone. In this zone, the relay maintains the latest status registered (forward or reverse). That is, if it comes from a trip zone, the trip is maintained until the lock zone is crosses. If it comes from a no-trip zone, it is maintained without a trip until the zone is crossed.
If, for example, the trip zone is to be between -40º and 130º, the "setting angle" must be set at 45º and the "covered angle" at 170º.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 96
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Quadrature phase direction (67)
Operation
For the detection of directionality in phases, the polarization voltage corresponds to the quadrature connection (90º), in which the each phase’s current is compared with the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases.
Phase directional
It operates as three single phase units in which polarization voltages are the phase to phase to voltages of the healthy phases.
The phase to phase voltages are obtained from the calculation of the phase to earth voltages.
In the case of a ABC phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vab and Vbc, instead of Ic and Ia. In the case of a
CBA phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vba and Vcb, instead of Ic and Ia.
The phase b current is calculated with In, Ia and Ic.
There is a 5
º
zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained.
Memory
Polarized by the positive sequence voltage whilst it exceeds a threshold. If the voltage is below this value, polarization is effected by the voltage that was memorized 2 cycles prior to the disappearance of the voltage. This memory is maintained for 0.5 seconds.
Trip permission without Vpol (in display, Directional lock)
The setting is used when the polarization voltage falls below the threshold (V polarization setting), which when set to
YES indicates forwards (trip permission) and when set to NO indicates reverse (no permission).
The memory is treated prior to this.
Signals
Provides forward and reverse signs per phase. (Forward, Reverse).
When the Trip permission without Vpol (directional lock) is set to “NO” and the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, the direction is not signalled.
When the Trip permission with Vpol (directional lock) is set to “YES” and the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, it signals forward and reverse.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 97
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0 (V0)
Operation with polarization by V0, zero sequence voltage
The direction is determined using the neutral current (3·I0) with the neutral voltage as polarization, (3·V0). The angle determines the range in which the fault is considered as a forward fault and as a reverse fault. A forward fault is recognised in accordance with the following:
90-lead/lag setting<arg(I0)-arg(V0)<270-lead/lag setting
There is a 5 º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained.
The 3V0 measurement is obtained from the calculation of the phase to earth voltages.
Trip permission without Vpol (in display, Directional lock)
The setting is employed when the polarization voltage (3·V0) falls below the threshold (V polarization setting), which when set to YES indicates forwards and when set to NO indicates reverse.
Signals
Provides forward and reverse signs. (Forward, Reverse).
When the Trip permission without Vpol (directional lock) is set to “NO” and the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, the direction is not signalled.
When the Trip permission with Vpol (directional lock) is set to “YES” and the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, it signals forward and reverse.
1.51 BREAKER MONITORING
General description
This function causes an "event" and a control signal in the event of a number of trips higher than the programmed value during the programmed time and changes to a definite trip. The period is reset upon a manual closure.
An event is also generated each time the ∑kI2 meter exceeds the programmed threshold following a trip. While in this situation, the corresponding signal is sent to control.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 98
Excessive number of trips
Time span for number of trips (sec.)
ΣkI2 alarm threshold
Initial ΣkI2 value
Trip circuit monitoring enabled
Circuit closure monitoring enabling
Coil monitoring example
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1
300
0
0
254 1
3.600 1
65.535 1
65.535 1
YES/NO
YES/NO
The trip coil’s connections should be similar.
The relays programmed as “closure circuit fault” or “trip circuit fault” are activated 20 seconds after the fault is detected, in the event of the fault persisting upon the conclusion of this period.
The coil monitoring function is only available in models equipped with a digital I/O extension board. In order for this function to operate correctly, the breaker status must be cabled.
1.52 OPERATING LOGIC
General description
Trip sealing: if set to “YES” when a trip signal is produced, the trip contact sealing remains active until it detects the opening of the breaker, even in the event of the current having disappeared. If it is set to “NO”, the trip signal disappears when the current falls below the pick-up current (nevertheless, the relay is guaranteed as excited for at least the period programmed in the digital output programming).
The opening and closure failure time settings determine the time lapse between the issue of the corresponding command and the reception of the breaker’s activity signal, on the understanding that the breaker has acted correctly.
If not, an “event” and a control signal are activated. Furthermore, one relay is activated (in the event of a relay having been programmed in relation to this function) for the opening fault and another for the closure fault.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Trip sealing
Breaker opening fault timing (sec.)
Breaker closure fault timing (sec.)
Min Max. Step Remarks
0,020 15,000 0,005
YES/NO
0,020 15,000 0,005
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 99
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.53 BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION
General description
Output relays can be programmed as:
Breaker closure fault. Monitors the "52 status" input.
Breaker opening fault. Monitors the "52 status" input.
Breaking fault with overcurrent. It functions in accordance with the settings group generically known as "Breaker fault":
Enabling of the function
Phase drop off current
Neutral drop off current
Definite time
When enabled, the function acts as follows: if the unit issues a trip signal or receives an external protection signal via a digital input, the timer will pick-up. If, following the programmed “definite time”, the current in any of the phases is superior to the programmed “phase drop off current” or if the neutral is superior to the programmed "neutral drop off current", the relay which has been programmed as "overcurrent breaker fault" is activated. The relay is deactivated when the phase and neutral currents fall below their drop off values.
If a LED has been programmed as "Breaker fault (Breaker fault with overcurrent)", it will be activated in the same way as the relay, although it will only be deactivated through the keyboard/display in "Last fault", as the LEDs which signal trips.
The external protection signal is memorized internally, that is to say, it may be a pulse.
This manner of functioning does not contemplate the breaker status digital input, but rather the current values.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 100
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Enabling
Phase drop off (A)
Neutral drop off (A)
Definite time (sec)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0,1
0,02
0,005
0,1
0,0
100,0
20,0
5,000
100,0
0,01
0,01
0,001
0,01
60,00 0,01
IS/IT/RT families(Models C and D)
IS families (Models A and B)
Other families
These settings can be found in the Console on the “Overcurrent protection (2)” screen.
1.54 BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION (TRIP DUE TO FAULT)
Specific function for the PL70FI model.
This signal’s drop off is produced in less than 20ms. The following is employed:
The DFT drop out without delay.
If the instantaneous current (sample differences separated by N/2) does not exceed 80% of the threshold during one ½ cycle, the function is also reset.
The zero register of the phase currents. If phase currents do not register zero in a period inferior to 2/3 of the cycle, the pick up is eliminated.
INTERNAL DIGITAL SIGNAL
50BF Pickup signal
S
INTERNAL DIGITAL SIGNAL
50BF started
INTERNAL CALCULATION
Ia n-1
· Ia n
<= 0
0
Time
2/3 cycle
R
INTERNAL CALCULATION
|DFT(Ia)|
-
≥
INTERNAL CALCULATION
0.8 · (Ia n
– Ia n-N/2
)/2
SETTING
BF PICKUP CURRENT
-
≥
0
Time
1/2 cycle
Settings
A setting defines the enabling of the function:
Disabled
Enabled only for external trips
The operation mode can be selected by means of a setting:
Three-pole, only via the EXTERNAL TRIP digital input (three-phase)
Three-pole, only via the EXTERNAL TRIP (three-phase) or EXTERNAL TRIP A, B, C (single-phase) digital inputs
Single-pole, only via the EXTERNAL TRIP A, B, C (single-phase) digital inputs
Single-pole, via the EXTERNAL TRIP (three-phase) or EXTERNAL TRIP A, B, C (single-phase) digital inputs; differentiated from the three-pole by the outputs it gives.
Another setting is employed to define whether the disappearance of the trip signal is to cause the drop out of the function (memorized trip). That is, if the trip signal is to be permanent or whether a pulse is sufficient. Trip signal:
Pulse
Permanent
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 101
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Another setting defines if the monitored breaker is independent or if it is combined with others (breaker-and-a -half or ring topologies). Topology 52:
Independent
Combined. In this case, the current travelling to a breaker (even when the breaker has not opened) cannot exceed the programmed drop off threshold until the breaker opens.
Timings:
Retrip: 0 to 60 s, step 0.001 s
BF trip: 0 to 60 s, step 0.001 s
Drop off current (phases and neutral): 0.1 to 100 A, step 0.01 A.
Three-pole operation
Case 1. Three-pole, activation by general or single-phase, pulse, 52 independent
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents drop off.
Case 2. Three-pole, activation by general or single-phase, permanent, 52 independent
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents or the trip signal drop off.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 102
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Case 3. Three-pole, activation only by general, pulse, 52 independent.
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents drop off.
Case 4. Three-pole, activation only by general, permanent, 52 independent.
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents or the trip signal drop off.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 103
Single-pole operation
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Case 5. Single-pole, activation by general or single-phase, pulse, 52 independent
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents drop off.
If the cause of the activation is general, the retrip is applied over the three phases.
Case 6. Single-pole, activation by general or single-phase, permanent, 52 independent
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents or the trip signal drop off.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 104
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Case 7. Single-pole, activation by single-phase, pulse, 52 independent
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents drop off.
Case 8. Single-pole, activation by single-phase, permanent, 52 independent
In this case, the picked up timers only drop off when all the currents or the trip signal drop off.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 105
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Case 9. Three-pole, activation only by general, pulse or permanent, combined.
In the cases of “combined” breaker topology, the timers start as soon as the signal appears. Depending on whether the signal is permanent or pulse, the timers drop off or not when the signal disappears.
Remarks:
The logics of all the possible combinations are not shown, since it is assumed that the options are clear enough.
However, in case of doubt, contact Ingeteam Technology SA.
The effect of input “52 locked”, when applicable, in any of the cases is to eliminate the timings in order to immediately provoke a general trip when the currents exceed the drop off threshold.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 106
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Breaker failure with low load or neutral
Name Description Range
CB1 Breaker fault with low load enabling YES/NO
CB2 Two-phase trip permission: YES/NO
CB3 Neutral detection unit enabling
CB4 Neutral current threshold:
CB5 Retrip time with low load
CB6 Retrip time with low load
YES/NO
0.1A -100 A
0-60s / step 0.001 s
0-60s / step 0.001 s
It picks up if:
The breaker contacts (setting to choose N/O or N/C) indicate closure (any pole, one is sufficient) or that the neutral current threshold is exceeded (CB4), when enabled (CB3)
A three-phase trip is received via a DI or a trip in at least tow phases is received via a DI (if the CB2 two-phase trip permission setting is set to YES).
It trips if:
None of the pick up conditions disappear once having elapsed the set time (CB6).
It retrips if:
None of the pick up conditions disappear once having elapsed the set time (CB6).
The Pole discrepancy function is used to determine the breakers’ status. If the pole discrepancy detects a fault (the
N/O and N/C contacts are simultaneously active and inactive in a pole following the fault time), this breaker fault functions locks and no trip or retrip is produced.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 107
End fault protection
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
When a pole is open and the corresponding phase current is higher than the setting, the breakers associated to the end fault are sent a trip signal.
The "52-Breaker Status” input (GENERAL DI), when programmed, prevails over the phase signals.
Timings:
End fault: 0 to 1 s, step 0.001 s
End fault threshold: 0.1 to 100 A, step 0.1 A.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 108
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Breaker failure upon opening with load
A setting defines the enabling of the function:
Disabled
Enabled
The operating mode (three-pole, single-pole) is the same as that defined for faults before a trip (in fault).
The disappearance of the trip signal DOES NOT to cause the drop off of the function (memorized trip).
It functions the same as the fault failure, although with its own settings:
Load threshold: 0.1 to 10 A, step 0.1 A.
Timings:
Failure in load 1: 0 to 1 s, step 0.001 s
Failure in load 2: 0 to 1 s, step 0.001 s
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 109
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Breaker failure upon closure
Settings:
Operating mode: three-pole or single-pole.
Failure upon closure time: 0.020 to 5 s, step 0.005 s
(both this setting and the failure upon opening time are to be found in the “Logic operation” screen).
If, in three-pole mode and following the issue of a closure command (for any cause) the “52 Status” DI remains open following the elapse of the programmed time, the "52 closure failure" signal is issued.
If, in single-pole mode and following the issue of a closure command (for any cause) the “52X (X = A, B or C) DI remains open following the elapse of the programmed time, the "pole A, B or C closure failure" signal is issued.
Flashover detection
The operating mode is defined by a setting:
By current only
No (disabled)
Flashover detection (current only)
Single-pole or three-pole functioning, as programmed in the breaker failure. If the contact indicates that the
52 is broken and that there is current, there is flashover.
Settings: flashover pick up: 0.05 to 100 A, step 0.01 A.
Flashover time: 0.01 to 1 s, step 0.01 s
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 110
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 111
23BPROTECTION FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
1.55 PROTECTION FUNCTION LOCK
Each of the protection functions can be locked by a digital input or by a logical function (combination of inputs and/or control signals). See “Logical signal programming” in the Configuration section.
The lock is programmed via the keyboard/display as any other setting within the corresponding function.
By means of the Console, the lock is programmed via the “Locks” screen, with the number depending on the unit’s optional functions.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 112
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
AUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
1.56 RECLOSER
General description
The units allows up to 4 reclosures to be effected.
Different closure times for phase to phase and phase to earth faults.
Programmable safety period following manual closure and following automatic closure.
The 5 closure meters (total, first, second, third and fourth closures) are stored in non-volatile memory and can be viewed on the display. These meters can be set to 0 via the keyboard.
Definitions:
Surveillance or rest status.
This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any trips. If any trips occur, the recloser is activated.
Current cycle status.
The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip up to the closure of the breaker and the elapse of the safety period (successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have been unsuccessfully executed.
In the first case, the recloser switches to “surveillance” and, in the second, to “definitive trip”
Definitive trip status.
The recloser’s final situation once it has run all the programmed attempts and the breaker remains open due to the existence of a permanent fault. It only abandons this status when the breaker is closed manually.
First, second, third and fourth closure.
The waiting time following the breaker trip until the recloser issues a closure order in each of the reclosure phases.
Safety period following manual closure.
The time following the manual closure of the breaker, during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored.
In such a case, a definitive trip is triggered instead of a change to surveillance status.
Safety period following automatic closure.
The time following the automatic closure of the breaker during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored. In such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to surveillance status.
Closure conditions time (optional).
The time margin following a protection trip during which the closure conditions (Reference voltage presence) must be fulfilled in order for the cycle to continue. It is not used if no inputs are programmed as “reference voltage”.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 113
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
Operation
The figures below show the sequence of events for a reclosure which has been programmed for three reclosure attempts (TR1, TR2 and TR3, respectively), with a safety period of Tsec, for different situations: a.- Successful first reclosure.
Once the Surveillance status has been reached, a new trip causes of a new cycle to begin and reclosure 1 is started once more, as shown below:
WARNING! A low current permanent fault may cause tripping following the elapse of the safety period. In such a situation and in 1order to avoid all the reclosures being considered first reclosures and the non-existence of a definitive trip, the safety period is automatically extended if a pick up is produced before the period expires and until such time as a drop-off or trip is produced. b.- Successful second reclosure.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 114
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
c.- Successful third reclosure. d.- Changes to definitive trip after exhausting the number of programmed of reclosures. e.- Changes to definitive trip due to a trip during the safety period following a manual closure.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 115
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Recloser in service
Number of reclosures
Waiting time for first reclosure for faults between phases (s)
Waiting time for second reclosure for faults between phases (s)
Waiting time for third reclosure for faults between phases (s)
Waiting time for fourth reclosure for faults between phases (s)
Waiting time for first reclosure for earth faults (s)
Waiting time for second reclosure for earth faults (s)
Waiting time for third reclosure for earth faults (s)
Waiting time for fourth reclosure for earth faults (s) 1
Safety period following automatic closure for faults between phases (s) 1
Safety period following automatic closure for earth faults (s)
Safety period following manual closure (s)
Waiting time for reference voltage (s)
1
1
1
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
0
0,05
4
600,0
1
0,01
1
1
1
0,05
1
1
600
600
600
600,0
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
1
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Trip enabling (4 tables)
By selecting “YES" or "NO", the trip enabling is programmed for each of the possible tripping conditions phase timing (each level) neutral timing (each level) sensitive neutral timing (each level) phase instantaneous (each level) neutral instantaneous (each level) sensitive neutral instantaneous (each level) broken conductor and current unbalance external protection activation residual current instantaneous residual current timed
If it is enabled or not in each of the following circumstances in stand-by following manual closure following first reclosure following second reclosure following third reclosure following fourth reclosure
Trip disabling by means of this procedure is effective during the corresponding safety period and with the condition that the recloser is engaged.
If the enabling of "trip due to action of external protection" is set to "NO", the recloser will not consider the input in question during the safety period. If a circuit breaker opens as a result and without a trip command having been issued by the corresponding protection, the opening will be considered as a manual opening and, therefore, reclosure will not occur.
Closure enabling (4 tables)
By selecting "YES" or "NO", the permissions for each of the possible reclosures following each of the possible causes capable of provoking trips as detailed in the previous section are programmed, as well as for external protection trips.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 116
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
In the event of various units issuing trip commands with different recloser enabling criteria during a fault, the reclosure is decided internally in accordance with the settings established for the first trip (in order, not in time) produced, according to the following order: phase timing (each level) neutral timing (each level) sensitive neutral timing (each level) phase instantaneous (each level) neutral instantaneous (each level) sensitive neutral instantaneous (each level) broken conductor or unbalance external protection activation residual current instantaneous residual current timed
If the recloser is not enabled, the following recloser is analysed and so on either until an enabled recloser is found or until a definitive trip is produced.
To prevent reclosure by a specific protection unit, the R1 to R4 reclosure lock settings must be set to "NO" as of the last required reclosure. For example, if no reclosure is required following a timed phase trip and the maximum number of programmed closures is 1, all closures (R1 to R4) following this type of trip must be set to "NO".
Other operating characteristics
Recloser out of service.
This status is reached by pressing the push-button R on the keyboard, or by means of a Control command. All relays associated to the recloser are de-excited.
Definitive trip
In addition to the above-mentioned causes, this status is also reached by means of a trip when the recloser is locked.
Recloser locked
This status is reached by the activation of an input or logic programmed as a recloser lock. No cycle is initiated in this status, whilst any cycle already initiated is abandoned, changing to the Definitive trip if the breaker is opened by a protection trip.
Bus bar voltage monitoring
Optionally, if a digital input is programmed as “Reference voltage” and applied to a busbar voltage relay, a function which prevents the automatic closure of the breaker when the busbar is de-energized is run. The use of this input is optional. If no input is programmed as Vref, the busbar voltage condition is not required for the recloser automatism to perform a closing operation.
Manual operation during the cycle.
If, during the operating cycle, a manual order (or command) is given to the circuit breaker, the recloser suspends the cycle switches to idle status.
Digital outputs associated to the recloser (and which can be programmed as output relays): recloser in ongoing cycle. Active from the moment the breaker is opened by a trip until the monitoring or definitive trip status is reached. recloser locked. Active if the recloser is out of service or if the external recloser lock input is activated. closure (breaker closure order) definitive trip. Active while the status is maintained. override of instantaneous. Active during the safety period following an automatic closure. It can be used to lock other protections (external).
Logic inputs associated to the recloser, which can be assigned to physical inputs:
Breaker status. This input is necessary for the reclosure function.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 117
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
Reference voltage. Not necessary. If programmed, the recloser function requires proof of the closure of this input in order to carry out the reclosure. If it is not programmed, this condition does not apply.
Recloser lock. As its name indicates, it locks the automatism. It is not necessary if the locking function is not required.
External protection. It can provoke the initiation of a reclosure cycle if the reclosure enablings are set to
"YES" due to the "external protection" cause. Not necessary.
1.57 SEQUENCE COORDINATION
The aim of this function is to enable the recloser to advance along the reconnection sequence in the event of an interruption of a fault by another recloser located down current, even when the initial recloser does not trip its own breaker.
If the coordination function is enabled, the recloser will enter into a current cycle upon the detection of the start-up of protection (instead of a trip, which is more usual). As of this moment, it will meter (cyclewise) the current interruptions as trips and the current drop offs as reclosures.
Thus, in the case of two units in series (with the downstream unit programmed with shorter tripping times than the upstream unit) faced with a permanent fault located even further downstream, the downstream unit effectively carries out trip and reclosure operations, whilst the upstream unit continues in its own cycle status.
If, for example, 3 fast and 1 slow trips have been programmed for each, the only unit to act, with the 4 trips, is the downstream unit. If there is no coordination, the downstream units would trip 3 times, the upstream unit 3 times and the downstream unit once more (definitive), cutting the line between both units on 3 occasions without motive.
The only setting related to this function is Enable YES/NO. It can be found on the “Recloser (1)” screen. By keyboard/display, on the level following “Recloser”.
1.58 RECLOSURE FOLLOWING A MINIMUM FREQUENCY TRIP
General description
The unit, following a minimum frequency trip and in the event of the function having been enabled and not locked, will only attempt one reclosure.
When the trip occurs, the 79f-breaker closure lock signal is activated and the period programmed as the definite trip waiting time is observed. If the minimum frequency condition is set to “NO” or if the frequency is higher than the minimum programmed frequency during the programmed reclosure time, a closure order is sent to the breaker if the minimum voltage reclosure condition is set to “NO” or if the voltage is higher than the programmed minimum.
If the programmed definitive trip waiting time elapses without the reclosure conditions having been met, the definitive trip is adopted.
A safety period is observed following the closure of the breaker. If a new minimum frequency trip occurs during this period, it moves to definitive trip.
Setting the recloser out of service by command or by a digital input lock affects this operating mode.
Settings
Setting
Enabling
Min. freq. reclosure condition
Min. reclosure frequency
Min. volt. reclosure condition
Min. reclosure voltage
Closure time (s)
Safety period (s)
Definitive trip waiting time enabling
Definitive trip waiting time(s)
12
1
1
0
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
40 70 0,01
YES/NO
YES/NO
200
1.000
300
1
1
1
86400 1
YES/NO
YES/NO
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 118
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
1.59 SYNCHROCHECK
Synchrocheck
General description
The “synchrocheck” function (function 25) is employed to condition the breaker closure to the compliance of the conditions established by setting. Two digital outputs may be programmed as “closure permission” and
“syncrocheck failure” (which always have opposite statuses, except when the voltage lies between the
“Presence” and “Absence” limits, the signals of which may both shown zero). They are used in the closure coil command circuit or as a signal for a closure automatism, when applicable.
This function can be disabled (by a setting or by a digital input). In such a case, there will always be closure permission.
The function compares the voltage signals of the same phase on both sides of the breaker (which we will call
A and B). The unit directly compares the voltages received by its analogue inputs, i.e., the secondary values of the voltage measurement transformers. It is supposed that the transformation ratio of these is the same in the busbar and in the line. There is no correction factor in the event of these ratios not coinciding.
There are two types of closure conditions:
1. Undervoltage permission. Permission is given if there is no voltage on one or on both sides of the breaker, according to the following settings:
Permission if there is no voltage in A nor in B (YES or NO)
Permission if there is no voltage in A but there is voltage in B (YES or NO)
Permission if there is no voltage in B but there is voltage in A (YES or NO)
Voltage is understood not to be present on one side of the breaker when the voltage measured is lower than the value programmed as “minimum voltage” for the side in question.
In the event of voltage presence on both sides, the “synchronism permission” function is activated.
The analysis of the undervoltage conditions is only carried out if the synchrocheck function is enabled, i.e., it is not an undervoltage protection (type 27), but rather an auxiliary element to enable closure in certain conditions in which a comparison between the busbar and the line voltages would grant give permission. As has been mentioned, if the synchrocheck function is disabled the closure permission is issued.
2. Synchrocheck permission. Permission is given when following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled during a programmable time:
Difference between VA and VB lower than the programmed value
Difference in phase angles lower than the programmed value
Difference in frequencies lower than the programmed value
Each one of these three conditions can be enabled/disabled. If disabled, permission if granted.
Any relay programmed as “closure permission” is activated when the mentioned conditions are fulfilled.
Thus, any closure can be locked if the relay is used as a lock for the manual command.
Please note that this permission refers only to the synchrocheck function, which is in turn responsible for controlling the “closure permission” relay. This must not be confused with “closure”, which is a relay controlled by closure commands (digital input or command).
The function does not take into account the breaker status, i.e., it can grant closure permission although it is closed.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 119
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
Settings
Setting
Enabling of the function
Voltage presence on side A (V)
Voltage presence on side B (V)
Absence of voltage on side A (V)
Absence of voltage on side B (V)
Enabling of “without voltage in A or B”
Enabling of “without voltage in A, voltage in B”
Enabling of “without voltage in B, voltage in A”
Voltage diff. condition enabling .
Voltage difference (V)
Frequencies diff. condition enabling .
Frequency difference (Hz)
Angle diff. condition enabling .
Lead/lag difference (º)
Conditions compliance time (s)
2
0.05
5
0
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
10
10
10
10
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
YES/NO
90
2
50
100
YES/NO
YES/NO
1
0.01
YES/NO
YES/NO
1
0,01
YES/NO
Undervoltage protection
Settings
Setting
Undervoltage enabling
Trip voltage on side A (V)
Trip voltage on side B (V)
Additional timing (sec.)
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
YES/NO
10
10
0
200
200
600
0,1
0,1
0,1
Operation
The protection is tripped when the voltage drops below the trip settings established for each side during the programmed period.
1.60 SECTIONALIZER AUTOMATISM
As of version “a”, a new functioning mode has been added to the sectionalizer automatism (mode 2 or simplified). These 2 modes of functioning MODO 1 and MODO 2 or simplified are selectable via settings.
This automatism can be enabled or disabled in both remote and local modes:
Local: by means of the “Automatic/manual” button. By pushing the button for 0.25 seconds, the status alternates between
“automatic” and “manual”.
Remote. By means of a control command. The unit will accept the command only and solely if the digital input programmed as “Local/Telecommand” is activated (0 exclusively local mode, 1 local and telecommand mode).
MODE 1
This scheme allows up to 3 current passovers due to fault detection prior to the issuing of an opening command.
The following page contains a flow diagram of this automatism. The different elements which appear in the diagram are described below:
PDF: Current passover due to fault signal. This is the signal generated by the current passover due to fault detection function. It is a logical “OR” between the passover due to phase fault and the passover due to neutral fault.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 120
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
PRES.V: Voltage presence. It corresponds to the signal, also present in the passover due to fault function.
RECL: Number of reclosures in the head line. Settable.
TIM. T1, T2, T3: Timings set in seconds
AT REST
AUTOMATION
YES
SURVEILLANCE
NO
COUNTER = 0
RESET TIM. 1,2,3
Detection 1 st
COUNTER = 1
Pick up TIM.T1
OPE
COMMAND
NO
YES
V PRES.
TEMP T1 on going
Detection 2 nd
NO
YES
COUNTER= 2
V. PRES
NO
YES
YES
NO
V. PRESEN
END. TIM. 3
PICK UP TIM. 3
V PRES.
NO
YES
RECL = 2
PICK UP TIM. 2
NO
YES
PICK UP TIM 2 END TIM. 2
COUNTER = 3
YES
TIM T2 on going
Detection 3 rd
RECLOS=3
NO
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 121
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
MODE 2 or simplified
In the simplified mode, each passover due to fault detection is accompanied by the start up of a time meter which, once having reached its limit, sets the current passover counter to zero and the automatism is reset.
If the breaker is closed with the automatism enabled (auto ), the existence of new faults or opening commands is monitored.
In the event of detecting a current passover:
The fault meter is increased.
A Treset timer .picks up
As of this moment, the monitoring for new faults is active. In the event of new current passovers due to fault detection, the meter will increase until matching the number of faults defined for the opening, which is when the breaker opens. Nevertheless, in the event of a time superior to Treset elapsing after the last fault without a new fault occurring, the fault meter will be set to zero and await a new cycle.
The functioning scheme of the entire automatism, including DPF, is shown below.
This scheme allows up to 4 current passovers due to fault detection prior to the issuing of an opening command.
1. Current passover due to fault detection and sectionalizer diagram
Example of functioning (mode 2)
The following example shows the functioning sequence for a fault downstream from sectionalizer B in mode
2.
The normal operating sequence is:
1. Upon the appearance of the fault, the recloser 79-1 trips due to overcurrent and opens the head breaker. Sectionalizers A and B detect the overcurrent and the subsequent disappearance of the same. Following a voltage-free time (fault memory t), sectionalizers A and B count the first fault
(DPF at 1). Any fault which is not downstream from the sectionalizer will not be seen as a fault (as in the case of sectionalizer C).
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 122
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
2. The recloser 79-1 closes the breaker. A persistent fault will be cleared within a set time. Following the opening of the breaker, the current disappears and, following a voltage-free period, A and B count a 2 nd current passover. Simultaneously, B issues an opening order, having been programmed to act when the meter registers 2 current passovers.
3. The recloser 79-1 issues a second successful closure command following the 2 nd
The faulty stretch is cleared by the sectionalizer in B.
reclosure time.
79-1
79-2
79-3
A Counter Limit = 3
Counter Limit = 2
B
C
Counter Limit = 2
Fault occurrence
Opening main head breaker
Closing main head breaker over fault
Opening main head breaker
Opening order sectionalizer B
Closing main head breaker after opening sectionalizer B
T 1st Reclosing (79-1) T 2nd Reclosing (79-1)
Closed
Open
t
T fault memory
200ms
T between faults < T reset
T fault memory
200ms
T fault memory
PDF=1
Counter=1
<Limit(2)
200ms
T between faults < T reset
T fault memory
PDF=1
Counter =2
=Limit(2)
200ms
PDF=1
Counter=1
<Limit (3)
PDF=1
Counter=2
<Limit(3)
T reset
T reset t
Counter=0
t t
Counter=0
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 123
24BAUTOMATISM FUNCTIONS
Settings
These settings can be found in the protection console in the “Cut-out organs protection” screen.
Setting
Number of faults before breaking
Time period T1 (sec.)
Time period T2 (sec.)
Time period T3 (sec.)
Reset time TR (sec)
Sectionalizer automatism enabling
1
1
Minimum Maximum Step Remarks
2 4 1
1
1
99
99
1
1
Mode 1 only
Mode 1 only
99
99
1
1
Mode 1 only
Mode 2 only
Mode 1 / Mode 2
If the number of faults prior to an opening is set at 4 in mode 1 of the sectionalizer automatism, the automatism acts as if it had been set at 3.
As opposed to mode 1, there is no waiting time prior to the issue of an opening command in mode 2.
1.61 SLACK SPRING AUTOMATION:
It is formed of:
"Slack spring" digital input
"Spring motor opening" LED
"spring tensing time" setting (0.1 to 99.9 sec)
Operation: when the “slack spring” input is activated, an internal “closure lock due to slack springs” signal is generated and a timing period, defined by the "tensing time" setting, is initiated. If the input is disabled before the elapse of the programmed time, the lock is removed. If the timed period concludes without an opening, the “spring motor opening” LED is activated, a Procome “slack spring alarm” signal is issued and the lock is maintained. The alarm and the lock do not disappear until the input is deactivated.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 124
25BOTHER SETTINGS
OTHER SETTINGS
1.62 LOGICAL OUTPUT PROGRAMMING
The user can configure up to 10 logical outputs, called "logic 1" to "logic 10", which can be assigned to relays as well as to
LEDs, locking inputs, signals to be registered on the oscillograph, etc.
The logical outputs can only be programmed through the Protections console, not via keyboard/display, in accordance with the basic signals available, which are detailed in the Appendix "Available signals" (as many of the signals correspond to optional functions, not every model is equipped with all the signals). The programming procedure is described in another document: the Protections Console Manual.
The logic signals can be generated according to the following scheme:
As can be observed in the definition of a logic output, the following elements intervene: up to 16 signals from among those available (or those negated), forming an “OR” function up to 16 signals from among those available (or those negated), forming an “AND” function an “OR” or “AND” function (programmable) of the results of the two previous functions a programmable timing ("delay") to activate the output a programmable time for the duration of the output activation
The delay time is the period as of the moment in which logic 1 is registered at the logic ports’ output until the corresponding logic output is activated. If during the "1" disappears during this time, the output is not be activated. It can be programmed between 0 and 99.9 s, with steps of 0.1 s.
The pulse time (duration) is the time during which the logic signal remains active. The programming allows for two options:
"By logic": following the delay, the output is active as long as there is 1 is registered at the programmed logic output.
"By time": the time during which the output is active is programmed. Upon the expiry of this period, the output is deactivated, independently of the status of the programmed logic output. Only a new step from 0 to 1 will activate the output once more following the delay.
The time range is 0.1 s to 600 s, with steps of 0.1 s.
A logic output "i" can be used as an available signal for the programming input of another logic signal "j", or of “i” itself.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 125
25BOTHER SETTINGS
A very simple application example: digital output DO7 is to follow digital input DI6 with a delay of 1 s.
Input DI6
Logic output 1
Input DI6
Delay
Duration
Logic/i Logic output 1
Application 1. Timed
T delay = 1s.
Duration = "by logic"
Programming of output DO7: Logic 1
1.63 HISTORICAL RECORD
The settings corresponding to the historical report are detailed in the “Historical report” section of the “Data Acquisition
Functions” chapter.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 126
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
1.64 EVENTS REPORTS
The list of events which can be generated by the protection (if it has the corresponding functions, which are optional in many cases) is indicated as follows. Each event is accompanied by its date, time and phase and neutral measurements. The protection saves a 400-event queue in non-volatile memory, which is retrievable from the PC.
Certain events may be masked via the console in the “Event Masking” screen.
Non maskable events
Activation table 1
Activation table 2
Activation table 3
Activation table 4
Settings (change) table 0
Change settings table 1
Change settings table 2
Change settings table 3
Change settings table 4
Recloser out of service
Recloser in service
Relay out of service
Relay in service
Maskable events
Communications
Local mode (activation from keyboard/display)
Local mode (activation through front port)
Remote mode (activation through rear port)
Current protection
Phase A timing pick up
Phase B timing pick up
Phase C timing pick up
Phase A instantaneous pickup
Phase B instantaneous pickup
Phase C instantaneous pickup
Activation of phase A timing output (trip)
Activation of phase B timing output
Activation of phase C timing output
Activation of phase instantaneous output
Activation of phase B instantaneous output
Activation of phase C instantaneous output
Neutral timing pick up
Neutral instantaneous pickup
Activation of neutral timing output
Activation of neutral instantaneous output
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 127
Current unbalance timing pickup
Current unbalance instantaneous pickup
Activation of current unbalance timing output
Activation current unbalance instantaneous output
Broken conductor unit pickup
Broken conductor output activation
Breaker failure
Trip circuit failure
Closure circuit failure
Breaker monitoring accumulator maximum (set limit) exceeded
Overflow (numeric limit) of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator
Voltage protection
Phase A surge timing pick up
Phase B surge timing pick up
Phase C surge timing pick up
Neutral surge timing pick up
Phase A instantaneous pickup
Phase B surge instantaneous pickup
Phase C surge instantaneous pickup
Neutral surge instantaneous pick up
Activation of phase A surge timing output (trip)
Activation of phase B surge timing output
Activation of phase C surge timing output
Activation of neutral surge timing output
Activation of phase A surge instantaneous output
Activation of phase B surge instantaneous output
Activation of phase C surge instantaneous output
Activation of neutral surge instantaneous output
Phase A undervoltage timing pick up
Phase B undervoltage timing pick up
Phase C undervoltage timing pick up
Neutral undervoltage timing pick up
Phase A undervoltage instantaneous pickup
Phase B surge instantaneous pickup
Phase C undervoltage instantaneous pickup
Neutral undervoltage instantaneous pickup
Activation of phase A undervoltage timing output (trip)
Activation of phase B undervoltage timing output
Activation of phase C undervoltage timing output
Activation of neutral undervoltage timing output
Activation of phase A undervoltage instantaneous output
Activation of phase B undervoltage instantaneous output
Activation of phase C undervoltage instantaneous output
Activation of neutral undervoltage instantaneous output
Synchrocheck
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
128
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
Inputs
Undervoltage pick up side A and B
Undervoltage pick up side A
Undervoltage pick up side B
Undervoltage trip side A and B
Synchrocheck fault
Activation of digital input xx ( 1 to 8)
Deactivation of digital input xx (1 to 8)
Recloser
External locking of the recloser
External unlocking of the recloser
No reference voltage
Reclosure order
Definitive trip
Recloser in idle
Recloser in ongoing cycle
Command
Excessive number of trips
Breaker closure
Breaker opening
Breaker closure command (control message or input)
Breaker opening command ( control message or input )
Closure command failure
Breaking command failure
Self-check
Critical Hardware Error
Converter reference voltage error
Converter error
FLASH memory recording error
Relay activation error
SPI communication error (between micro and DSP converter)
Non critical Hardware error
“ clock synchronization error
HW error corrected
1.65 FAULT REPORTS
The protection stores a queue of the last 20 faults in non volatile memory, which is retrievable from the PC with the following information
Available units
Units tripped during the fault
Units picked up during the fault
Fault start date and time (first unit picked up)
Trip date and time (first tripped unit)
Fault end date and time (when the trip signal disappears)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 129
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
Current cleared by circuit breaker (maximum of the phase currents detected between the moment of the trip order and the breaker opening)
Setting table active during the fault.
Fault and trip type: 3-letter code composed of combinations of the characters A, B, C, N and D, depending on whether the trip was effected for each phase, neutral or unbalance-broken conductor. Example: ACN is a two phase (A and C) to earth fault.
Pre-fault Phase A current (module and angle).
Pre-fault Phase B current
Pre-fault Phase C current
Pre-fault neutral current
Phase A prefault voltage (module and angle).
Phase B pre-fault voltage
Phase C prefault voltage
Neutral pre-fault voltage
The 4 pre-fault currents and voltages are simultaneous and correspond to the values existing 3 cycles prior to the pick-up.
Phase A fault current (module and angle)
Phase B fault current
Phase C fault current
Neutral fault current
Phase A fault voltage(module and angle)
Phase B fault voltage
Phase C fault voltage
Neutral fault voltage
The 4 fault currents are simultaneous and correspond to the values existing upon the issue of the trip order.
Furthermore, they are kept in non-volatile memory and they are retrievable through the keyboard /display. The following data corresponds to the last 5 faults:
Tripped phases
Maximum currents and voltages of each phase and neutral during the fault
Fault start and finish date and time
1.66 MEASUREMENTS
Measurements in the secondary
These measurements refer to the fundamental component and are used by the protection functions:
By keyboard/display
Phase, neutral, sensitive neutral, residual currents (in Amperes)
Current maximeter (in Amperes)
Inverse sequence component I2 / I1 in %
Phase, neutral, phase to phase voltages (in Volts)
Frequency (Hz)
Note on the maximeter: The maximeter shows the maximum average value of the average current of the three phase during a specific time interval. The time interval is the period programmed as the “time window for samples” in the “Historical report” setting. The functioning is as follows: the average current of the three phases is calculated each second and accumulated; upon completion of the interval, the accumulated
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 130
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
value is divided by the corresponding number of seconds and, thus, the average value of this interval is obtained. If this value is higher than the maximeter value, the new value is used, together with date and time when it was obtained.
Via PC (Protections Console)
The first "STATUS" screen shows the following:
Phase, neutral, sensitive neutral and residual currents (module in Amperes and angle in degrees)
Current maximeter (in Amperes)
Phase and neutral voltages (module in Volts and angle in degrees)
All the angles refer to Phase A.
Measurements in the primary
By keyboard/display
Phase, neutral, sensitive neutral, residual currents (in Amperes)
Phase, neutral, phase to phase voltages (in kilovolts)
Via PC (Protections Console)
The “MEASUREMENTS” screens show:
Phase, neutral, sensitive neutral and residual currents (module in Amperes and angle in degrees)
Phase, neutral, phase to phase voltages (module in kilovolts and angle in degrees)
Frequency (Hz)
Current maximeter (in Amperes)
Maximeter date and time
1.67 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT
General description
In versions released before firmware version “a”, the protection saves a 200 record queue in a non-volatile memory. In versions “a” and subsequent versions, the number of records saved by the protection in the non-volatile memory depends on the “Nº of records to be registered” setting. These settings can be found in the protections console in the
“Historical reports” screen. See section “Dynamic management of historical reports and disturbance recorder”.
Changes to the “Nº of historical reports to be recorded” setting will delete both the historical report queue and the disturbance recorder queue.
The historical report information may be accessed from a PC (Protections Console).
Each record includes the maximum and minimum average currents, the maximum and minimum average phase to earth voltages and the maximum and minimum real, reactive and apparent power (calculated within a programmable time window) detected during a programmable recording period. The currents are secondary Amperes, and the voltages are secondary Volts.
The functioning is as follows: the current values (three phase average) are increased each second and added to their respective accumulators. Upon the conclusion of the time window, the accumulated value is divided into the number of seconds corresponding to the window in order to obtain the average value. Upon completion of the programmed registration interval, the maximum and minimum values of the measurements obtained during the interval are registered.
The registration interval is automatically synchronised with the clock. Thus, if a 15-minute period is programmed, 4 reports are generated per hour (at 0, 15, 30 and 45 minutes).
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 131
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
Calendar mask functioning:
If the "Calendar Mask” setting is set to “NO”, the report is generated each day of the week. If it is set to "YES", the daily programming is observed. All days set to “YES” are reported, whilst all days set to “NO” are omitted.
Settings range (4 tables)
Setting
Time window for average(min.)
Historical report interval (min.)
Calendar mask day week
Calendar mask
Report start time
Report end time
Min Max Step Remarks
1 15 1
1 1.440 1
Monday to Sunday YES/NO
0 24
0 24
1
1
YES/NO
1.68 STATISTICAL DATA
The same information can be obtained by keyboard/display or via PC ("STATISTICAL DATA" screen): kl2 sum (kA broken per breaker pole, squared)
Automatic reclosure meters
First reclosure
Second "
Third "
Fourth "
Total
Breaker openings meter (by trips or by manual breaks)
All these meters can be set to 0, with the kI2 sum set to the initial value programmed as a setting.
1.69 PROTECTION STATUS
By keyboard/display
The following can be consulted:
Date and time of the relay.
Status of each of the digital inputs: open (O) or closed (C).
Via PC (Protections Console)
In addition to the above-mentioned measurements, the following can also be consulted via the "STATUS" screens: on screen 1
Date and time of the relay
Active table on screen 2
Protection units picked up at the present moment
Protection units tripped at the present moment
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 132
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
on screen 3
Units tripped during the last trip
Command orders
Circuit breaker monitoring status
Closure and trip circuit monitoring status
1.70 OSCILLOGRAPH DATA RECORDER
In versions prior to the firmware version "a", the protection saves up to 600 cycles in non-volatile memory. The cycles may be distributed in records containing 20 30-cycle disturbances, 10 60-cycle disturbances or 5 120-cycle disturbances (the number of cycles prior to pick-up is programmable in each case). In versions “a” and subsequent versions, the number of records saved by the protection in the non-volatile memory depends on the “Nº of records to be registered” setting. These settings can be found in the protections console in the “Historical reports” screen. See section “Dynamic management of historical reports and disturbance recorder”.
The information that can be saved by the oscillograph function depends on the number of cycles to be saved in relation to each disturbance and the number of historical reports. See section “Dynamic management of historical reports and disturbance recorder”.
Changes to the “Nº of historical reports to be recorded” setting will delete both the historical report queue and the
disturbance recorder queue.
The number of cycles related to each disturbance and the number of cycles prior to the pick up are selectable via settings.
Increasing the number of cycles to be saved in relation to each disturbance reduces the number of disturbances that may be saved. These settings can be found in the protection console in the “Disturbance recorder configuration” screen.
Up to 5 analogical channels and up to 32 digital channels, which can be chosen from a list selected from the available signals, are registered for each disturbance.
Each disturbance recorder can be launched by a rising slope from any of the digital signals considered by the protection model.
The analogical channels are sent to the console and multiplied by the transformation ratio in order to appear in primary values. The number of samples per analogical channel cycle is 32.
1.71 DYNAMIC MANAGEMENT OF HISTORICAL REPORTS AND DISTURBANCE
RECORDERS
The unit manages the memory dedicated to the historical reports and disturbance recorder dynamically. The two data queues share the same memory zone. Thus, increases in the number of historical reports saves imply a reduction in the number of disturbance reports saved.
The number of historical reports recorded by the unit may be varied via a setting. The setting can be found in the protections console in the “Historical reports” screen.
Setting
No. of historical reports to be recorded
Values
200, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000
Changes to the “Nº of historical reports to be recorded” setting will delete both the historical report queue and the disturbance recorder queue.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 133
26BDATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
The following table shows the number of disturbance reports saved for different numbers of historical reports and different disturbance durations in cycles.
Disturba
nce cycles
70
80
90
100
150
200
10
20
30
40
50
60
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
200
17
15
13
12
10
7
60
40
30
24
20
3
2
2
2
2
1
5
4
3
500
57
38
28
23
19
16
14
12
11
10
7
5
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
Queued historical reports
1000 2000 3000
54
36
27
21
18
15
13
12
10
9
6
5
4
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
46
31
23
18
15
13
11
10
9
8
5
4
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
39
26
19
15
13
11
9
8
7
7
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
4000
31
21
15
12
10
9
7
7
6
5
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
*: In the RS family, the maximum number of queued historical measurement reports to be recorded is 2000.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 134
27BOTHER FUNCTIONS
OTHER FUNCTIONS
1.72 TIME SETTING AND SYNCHROCHECK
Time setting
The time can be set via the keyboard/display (within "Change Settings") or via the Protection Console (“STATUS" screen 1).
Synchrocheck
There is an input for demodulated IRIG-B synchrochecking (see section “IRIG-B input” in “Technical characteristics”). This system allows the synchronization of the times assigned to events between connected devices to be effected with a 1 ms margin.
The IRIG-B time code is a frame that is generated once a second. The code used is B 003, in which the frame is constituted by a train of variable-width TTL-level pulses. The time indicated corresponds to the PPS (Pulse per second) coincident with the Frame Reference Mark at the start of the frame.
In integrated protection and control systems (SIPC), the unit is synchronized periodically (every minute) by the UCS.
In this case, any change made to the time via the keyboard or the Protection console will be immediately eliminated by the UCS.
1.73 CONTROL MESSAGES
The protection responds to the following control messages
Measurement, change and meter requests
Digital status requests
Clock synchronization
Meter freezing
Statistical data initialization commands
Relay and specified digital signal orders
Statistical data requests
The Procome event queue handles 400 events.
The following measurements are transmitted:
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
No. Bytes Format
2 Word
2
2
Word
Word
2
2
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
2 Word
Word
Word
Word
Specification
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Data
Current Maximeter
VSYNC module
VA module
VB module
VC module
VAVERAGE module
VAB module (Phase to phase voltage)
VBC module (Phase to phase voltage)
VCA module (Phase to phase voltage)
VCAVERAGE module (Phase to phase voltage)
IA module
IB module
IC module
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 135
27BOTHER FUNCTIONS
2
2
2
2
2
2
No. Bytes Format
2 Word
2
2
2
2
2
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Specification
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Procome Format
Data
IAVERAGE module
IN module
P (Real power)
Q (Reactive power)
S (Apparent power)
Frequency
Frequency synchrocheck
INS Module
VN Module (neutral)
INIsolated module
Unit temperature
Iresidual module
The following table shows the measurements and the order (numbered from 1 onwards) for each of the families up to firmware version D:
Measurements IT IS IM RT TH TT SV PO IV MO SC
Maximeter I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
VSYNC
VA
VB
1
2
1
2
1 2 2
VC
VAVERAGE
VAB
IB
IC
3
4
3
4
I AVERAGE 5 5
VBC
VAC
VCAVERAGE
IA 2 2 2
3
4
5
3
4
6 6
7 7
8 8
5
2 3 2
4 3
5 4
6 5
3
4
5
IN
P
Q
S
Frequency
Freq.sync.
INS
VN
INIsolated
I residual
6
6
7 7
2
9 9
1 10 10
3
4
5
7 7
6
From firmware subsequent to version E, the measurements programmed from among those available for each family are transmitted. The order in which they are sent can also be programmed. The programming is carried out through the SIPCON/P protection console.
The digital signals indicated as “Available signals” in the corresponding Appendix are treated (changes and status). The
Procome Protocol facilitates the programming of the signals to be sent, together with the signal number.
The statistical data initialisation commands allow the closure meters, energy meters, the maximeter and the break meter to be set to 0, as well as allowing the initial value programmed as the kI2 sum setting to be established. The Procome Protocol command orders can be programmed (by Console) from among the following options:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 136
Action
Open breaker
Close breaker
Activate any relay from 1 to 11
Set recloser as out of service
Set recloser as in service
Table 1 activation
Table 2 activation
Table 3 activation
Table 4 activation
Set in LOCAL
Set in TELECOMMAND
Permanent activation output 1
Permanent activation output 2
Permanent activation output 3
Permanent activation output 4
Permanent activation output 5
Permanent activation output 6
Permanent activation output 7
Permanent activation output 8
Permanent activation output 9
Permanent activation output 10
Permanent activation output 11
Deactivate output 1
Deactivate output 2
Deactivate output 3
Deactivate output 4
Deactivate output 5
Deactivate output 6
Deactivate output 7
Deactivate output 8
Deactivate output 9
Deactivate output 10
Deactivate output 11
ISC
programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable programmable
Default
22
24
1 to 11
28
26
60
61
62
63 not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed not programmed
27BOTHER FUNCTIONS
1.74 COMMAND KEYS
The SC, RC, RS and CT families are equipped with additional keys, indicated as “I”, “O”, “” (permission), “A/M”
(Automatic/Manual) and, in the case of the RC family, “R” (protections in service/out of service) and “L/R” (Local/Remote). In order for these keys to become operational, the “ENAB.PUSHBUT.” setting must be enabled. This setting is accessible through the keyboard/display and the protections console. It is accessible via the keypad/display in "CHANGE SETTINGS" =>
"PROG TABLE 0” => “PROG. SPECIALS” => “ENAB.PUSHBUT.”. This setting is accessed via the protections console in
“General SETTINGS”, "General Configuration" screen.
By simultaneously pressing the “I” and “·” buttons for 0.25 sec, the breaker’s “closure” relay is activated. By simultaneously pressing the “O” and “·” buttons, the breaker’s “opening” relay is activated. The relays remain active in accordance with the programming indicated in the “Sealing logic” section.
The functionality of the “A/M” key is explained in the “Sectionalizer automatism” section.
1.75 LOCAL/REMOTE COMMAND
The unit can be in local or remote (Tele-control) status.
The transition from the one status to the other can be effected by a digital input programmed for this purpose. The functioning is alternative, i.e., the status changes each time the input is activated (rising slope). In the SC, RC, RS and CT units, the change from one status to another one can be carried out by pushing the “L/R” (Local/Remote) key successively.
The control commands described in the previous section are only operative in Remote status.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 137
27BOTHER FUNCTIONS
The breaking and closure commands via digital input (when programmed) are operative both in the Local and in Remote status (to facilitate the command via contacts activated by a remote terminal).
The unit always picks up in the “Remote” status.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 138
28BOPERATING MODE
OPERATING MODE
1.76 VIA KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
Introduction
The keyboard/display unit facilitates the local entering of settings and commands into the unit via push-buttons, as well as enabling the display of settings, measurements and faults.
Keyboard/display unit elements
Normal push-buttons
They are 4 normal push-buttons, signalled as INTRO and ESC.
Push-button “↓”
This is the only push-button which accessible when the protection cover is in place.
By successive pushing the button, the following information appears:
Digital input status
Phase A current (primary A)
Phase B current
Phase C current
Phase A voltage
Phase B voltage
Phase C voltage
VAB voltage (primary kV)
VBC voltage
VCA voltage
Real power (MW)
Reactive power (MVAR)
Power factor
Information on the last fault
Phases involved
Fault current in phase A
Fault current in phase B
Fault current in phase C
Fault current in neutral
Fault start date and time
End date and time
Fault recognition (press 2 sec. and release). Turn off the trip LEDs
Display
Alphanumerical, liquid crystal and with 2 8-column rows.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 139
28BOPERATING MODE
LEDs
They are 7 LEDs, which can be programmed to show certain of the statuses indicated in the "LEDs programming" section.
Operating mode
General description
In idle, the display shows “PL70 XX”, in which “XX” corresponds to the unit’s family (for example: IT, TT, etc.). The second line shows the following 3 digits of the commercial code and the corresponding software version. The screen on which the stand-by status is to be viewed can be selected by simultaneously pressing
“↓“ and “↑“ in the new screen.
By pressing the “ESCAPE” key at any moment during the process which is described below, the unit is taken to the element of the menu corresponding to the immediately prior level.
The menus can be scrolled downwards or upwards with the keys “↓” and “↑”, and they are circular, i.e., following the final position they return to the beginning.
Generally, when scrolling through a menu, the first line of the display indicates the active function, which can be entered by pressing INTRO, in turn facilitating access to the next menu level (when applicable) specific to the function in question.
The menu tree for the display or adjustment of settings within each group is hierarchical. If the INTRO key is pressed when the display is idle, the first element of the following menu is shown:
DISPLAY TIME
DISPLAY ACTIVE TABLE
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
MEASUREMENTS
STATISTICAL DATA
LAST FAULTS
DISPLAY SETTINGS
CHANGE SETTINGS
The complete hierarchy of menus and submenus is shown in the Appendix I.
Using the keyboard/display
Display settings and magnitudes
Using the keys "↑" and "↓", the user can scroll up or down through the menu or submenu (as indicated above), as the menus are circular.
By pressing “INTRO”, the next level of the menu is accessed. If there is no submenu, the status of the display does not change when “INTRO” is pressed.
Pressing “ESC” takes the user to the menu’s immediately superior element, i.e., the element via which we have arrived at the current status.
In the final menus, which have no submenus (settings), the first line shows the name of the setting of the group selected via the keyboard, whilst the second the line shows the current value.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 140
28BOPERATING MODE
Change settings
Up to the last level of the menus, the functions are the same as those for displaying settings and magnitudes (the same key functions).
To access to this function, key in "↑↑↓↓". This grants access to all the settings and initializations, with the exception of those contained in the "Special protections" sections. IN order to access these settings, key in "↑↓↵↵".
In the last level of the menus, which display the names of the settings to be changed, the keyboard functions are different to those explained above.
The functioning of the keyboard when entering each group in order to change the settings
(final menu) is as follows:
1) Numerical settings. The first line of the display shows the name of the selected setting.
Line 2 shows the current setting value.
The setting value is changed figure by figure. The user must use the "↑" key to select the figure to be changed. Each pulse moves us one figure to the left, in a circular manner. The selected figure will flash on the screen. In order to change it, press "↓" until the desired value is reached. Once all the figures have been set to their corresponding values, press "INTRO" in order to move to the following setting. If an invalid value is entered, an “INVALID” warning message will appear in line 2. In such a case, press "↑" and carry out the setting again. By pressing “ESC” in the final menu, the screen shows the previous menu element. The changes that have been made are not saved at this point.
The changes are saved when, upon reaching the group’s final setting and pressing “INTRO”, a “VALIDATE?” message appears in line 1. Line 2 will display the message “YES”, to which we respond by pressing “INTRO” to validate the changes. If we do not want to validate the changes, select “NO” using “↓” and then press “INTRO”. Independently of whether the changes are validated, pressing “INTRO” returns the screen to the next element of the superior menu (see menus chart). By pressing “ESC”, we return to the menu element from which we reached the current status.
2) Non numerical settings. There are settings, such as the enabling settings, which must be set either at YES or at NO. There are also time delayed curves with specific names, input and output configurations, etc., which are easier to select by their name rather than by entering a numerical value.
In these cases, the setting name appears in line 1, whilst a text indicating the present value appears in line 2. By pressing "↓" or "↑" in the second line, the values that may be chosen for the setting in question are displayed.
By pressing “INTRO”, either the following setting within the group or, if the setting is the last, the validation message is shown.
In the case of input, output, LED configuration, pressing “INTRO” takes us from the configuration of input/output/led “i” to the configuration of input/output/led “i+1”.
As with the numerical settings, pressing “ESC” takes us to the menu element from which we reached the current status.
When configuring inputs, outputs and LEDs, pressing "INTRO" takes us from the configuration of input/output/LED "i" to the configuration of input/output/LED “i+1”. As with the numerical settings, pressing “ESC” takes us to the menu element from which we reached the current status.
Initializations and special settings.
The first “Change settings" submenu offers the following option: "VARIOUS INITIAL.”, which requires a specific explanation.
By pressing "INTRO" in "VARIOUS INITIAL", the following is displayed:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 141
28BOPERATING MODE
"CLOS.METER=0?”. By pressing “INTRO”, the total and partial reclosure meters and the break meters are set to 0. If the meters are not to be set at 0, press "↓" or "ESC".
"MAXIMETER=0?". By pressing “INTRO”, the maximeter is set to 0.
"SUM KI2=INIT?". By pressing “INTRO”, the accumulator adopts the setting value corresponding to the table indicated by the active table.
The “Special changes” submenu" of “Change settings" offers the following option:
“DELETE QUEUES?". By pressing "INTRO", all event, fault, historical report and oscillograph data record queues are reset.
Change active table.
In the first level of "CHANGE SETTINGS", pressing "INTRO" when in "ACTIVATE TABLE" displays "TABLE 1". “↑” and “↓” are used to change to "TABLE 2" and “TABLE 3”. When the table in question is reached, press "INTRO" to activate.
Display view of last 5 faults.
When accessing the LAST FAULTS menu, 5 submenus with the following texts are available:
FALTA Nº n
Fault 1 is the most recent fault, whilst fault 5 is the oldest.
The fault data can be viewed by accessing the corresponding submenu using INTRO.
Fault 1 can be recognised (switch off LEDs, etc.) by accessing the fault 1 submenu. This procedure is not applicable to the other faults.
Press “ESC” to return to the previous level
Display view of last fault.
When a trip is produced, the display shows the beginning of a fault report. The complete information is accessed by pressing “↓”.
If the fault is recognised or “ESC” is pressed, the first screen containing a description of the relay is shown.
1.77 VIA PC
The PL70 protection relays can be monitored by PC. This makes it possible to access the display the system measurements and settings and their programming.
The PC “Protection Console” programme developed by Ingeteam Technology S.A. is called SIPCON/P.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 142
29BRECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS
RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS
1.78 RECEPTION AND STORAGE
The protections are supplied in special transport packaging.
Upon reception, the units should be checked for any signs of external damage caused during transport. If any such damage is detected, the transport company and the manufacturer should be contacted.
The material received should also be checked in order to ascertain that it coincides with the order.
If the protection is not to be used immediately, it should be stored in its original packaging in a dry and dust-free location.
The protection units must be transported in their original packaging.
1.79 CONNECTION
The protections must be connected in accordance with the enclosed external connection diagram. This is a general diagram.
The individual programming of inputs and outputs should be taken into consideration in each specific case.
Auxiliary power supply
The polarity is indifferent.
Earth connection
The earth connection must be effected correctly in order that the protection’s disturbance rejection devices function correctly.
The connection must be as short as possible (less than 25 cm.), using multiwired, 4 mm 2 section cable.
RS232 cable connections to be used between the PC and the PL70
Case 1: 25 pin PC output connector.
PL70 side
9-pin male connector
RxD 2
TxD 3
GND 5
DSR 6
RTS 7
CTS 8
CD 1
DTR 4
PC side
25-pin female connector
2 TxD
3 RxD
7 GND
20 DTR
8 CD
5 CTS
4 RTS
6 DSR
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 143
29BRECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS
Case 2: 9-pin PC output connector.
PL70 side
9-pin male connector
RxD 2
TxD 3
GND 5
DSR 6
RTS 7
CTS 8
CD 1
DTR 4
PC side
9-pin female connector
3 TxD
2 RxD
5 GND
4 DTR
1 CD
8 CTS
7 RTS
6 DSR
1.80 UNIT ADDRESSING
See the “Communications configuration” section.
1.81 START-UP
The PL70 protections are supplied with the default factory settings.
Before start-up, the units must be set via the keyboard/display and/or PC with the correct values and following the procedures indicated.
The protection has been checked at the factory in order to guarantee the accuracy of the different parameter settings points.
However, the testing of various points during reception and start-up is recommended in order to ensure that the protection is fully operative.
Once the line is connected, the relay’s real measurements can be consulted in order to check their correct connection and operation.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 144
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
APPENDIX I. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
In the following pages we enclose a table which graphically illustrates and shows the easy handling of the different menus and settings which can be changed with the keyboard/display. We recommend this appendix be at hand when you start to use the keyboard, in order to easily find the settings to be changed.
The structure is generic for the whole family of PL70, corresponding to current units, that is, it does not correspond to a certain model, but to IT, IS, IM, IA, ID, IP, IV MO and FI families. In each model the settings and measurements corresponding to its available functions will only appear.
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
DIG. INPUT
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS (read)
SETPOINTS (change)
RECLOSER ON/OFF
INP. STAT
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
(9 and 10)
(11)
See page 4
See page 4
See page 4
See page 6
See page 15
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output11
Recloser On /Off
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 145
TYPE
Fau Ph A
IsG C
IsG V
MAX. (A)
Vsup 3, 3V
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
Pha.A
Pha.B
Pha.C
GND
S. GND
IsG C
IsG V
.Res C
N 2 C
N 3 C
MAX. (A)
(%) NEG SEQ
Pha.A
Pha.B
Pha.C
GND
S. GND
Fau Ph.B
Fau Ph.C
Faul GND
Fa S GND
Fau Res.
Faul.G2
Faul.G3
F IsGND
Vo IsGND
START T
END T
LedReset
TEMP.=0?
SECO REC
THIR REC
FOUR REC
OPEN No.
KI2 P(A)
KI2 P(B)
KI2 P(C)
FAULT n
AUXIL. MEASURES
THER. IMAG
TOT REC
FIRS REC
SECONDARY MEASUR
PRIMARY MEASURES
STATIS. DATA
LAST FAULTS
MEASUREMENTS
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
Phase A current.
Phase B current
Phase C current
Neutral current
Sensitive neutral current
Neutral isolated current
Neutral isolated voltage
Residual current
Ground current 2
Ground current 3
Maximum average current in an interval t
Reverse component (%)
Phase A current.
Phase B current
Phase C current
Neutral current
Sensitive neutral current
Neutral isolated current
Neutral isolated voltage
Maximum average current in an interval t
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Thermal image temperature
Total number of reclosures.
Number of first reclosures.
Number of second reclosures.
Number of third reclosures.
Number of fourth reclosures.
Total number of trips given by the protection.
KI2 sum for maintenance, phase A
KI2 sum for maintenance, phase B
KI2 sum for maintenance, phase C
Phase/s involved in the last fault.
Phase A current when the fault occurred (S).
Phase B current when the fault occurred (S).
Phase C current when the fault occurred (S).).
Neutral current when the fault occurred (S)
Sensitive neutral current when the fault ocurred (S).
Residual current when the fault occurred (S).
Neutral 2 current when the fault occurred (S).
Neutral 3 current when the fault occurred (S).)
Isolated neutral current when the fault occurred (S)
Isolated neutral voltage when the fault occurred (S)
Fault start date and time.
Fault end date and time.
Fault acknowledgement to switch off the Led.
Trip acknowledgement by thermal image
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 146
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see) TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 1 (see)
PROTECT
PROTECT RESIDUAL IOC
G SENS IOC
IMAGE TERMIC
NEGATIVE
SEQUENCE
UNBALAN.TOC
UNBALAN.IOC
G SENS TOC
PHASES IOC
GROUND TOC
PHASES TOC
GROUND TOC
RESIDUAL TOC
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
PARAMS
PICK. C
ENABLED
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
ENABLE
HEAT. CO.
RE. CONST
AL. THRES
BLOCKING
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABL ACCELE.
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
Inst. Int. Residual
Sensitive ground instant
Thermal image
Broken conductor
Current unbalance time
Current unbalan instant.
Phase TOC
Ground TOC
Residual current TOC
Sensitive ground TOC
Phase IOC (low level)
Ground IOC (low level)
147
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 1 (see)
GR TOC 2
GR TOC 1
GR IOC 1
GR IOC 2
DIRECT.
IS. GND
HIGH IOC
PROTECT
CURVES
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVES
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
TRQ. CTROL
CURR. LOW
CURR. HIG
VOLT. LOW
VOLT. HIGH
T.1ST TR
SWI.INST
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
HIGH IOC PHA
HIGH IOC GND
HIGH IOC SGND
DIR. ANG
POLAR. V.
P BLOCK
ZONE WID
BLOCKING
ENABLED
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
Directional protection
Isolated ground
Ground TOC 1
Ground TOC 2
Ground IOC 1
Ground IOC 2
Phase instantaneous High 1
Ground instantaneous High 1
Sen.ground instant.s High 1
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 148
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
PROTECT TABLE 1 (see) BREAKER FAILURE
ROTOR LOCKED
IDLE RUNNING
LONG PICK UP
SUCESSIV PICKUPS
RESTRIC GND.
UNDERCURR. 2 LEVELS
PROTECT TABLE 1 (see) BREAKER FAILURE
PHAS.TOC LIMITAT.
OPERATION MODE
TRIP BY FAULT
OPEN.WITH CHARGE
INTERN.ARCH DET
DEAD ZONE
LOW CHAR/GND
PTOC BLK
ENABLED
PH. DROP
GND. DROP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK TIM
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK NUM
TIME WIN
OP. ACT. T
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK-UP L1
F.TYPE L1
PICK-UP L2
F.TYPE L2
ENABLED
DEAD Z.THR
DEAD Z.TIM
BLOCKING
L.C/N.EN
B.T. PER
N. DET.EN
N.C.THR
RETRIP T
TRIP SIGNAL
BLOCKING
HABILIT. MODE
TRIP SIGNA
52 TOPOLOGY
PH. DROP
GND. DROP
RETRIP T
TRIP T
BLOCKING
HABILITATED
CHARG THRES
CHG. FAL T1
CHG. FAL T2
INTERN.ARCH DET
INT.ARCH PICKUP
INTERN.ARCH TIME
Family Breaker failure, oper. mode I
Type of enabling in trip due to fault
Trip signal
Topology 52
Phase restoration (A)
Neutral restoration (A)
Retrip definite time (sec.)
Trip definite time (sec.)
Enabling to the opening with load
Load threshold (A)
Definite time failure in load 1 (sec.)
Definite time failure in load 2 (sec.)
Rear arch detection enabling
Rear arch pick up (A)
Rear arch time(sec.)
Dead zone enabling
Dead zone threshold (A)
Dead zone definite time (sec.)
En. breaker failure in low load or grnd
Two-trip permission trip
Enabling detection by ground
Ground current threshold (A)
Retrip time (sec.)
Trip signal
Phase TOC block
Breaker failure
Enable YES/NO
Pick up current
Definite time
Enable YES/NO
Pick up current
Definite time
Enable YES/NO
Pick up TIME
Enable YES/NO
Pickup number
Time window
Output activation time
Enable YES/NO
Pick up current
Definite time
Pickup current level 1
Definite time level 1
Pickup current level 2
Definite time level 2
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 149
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 1 (see)
PROTECT
RECLOS
GND TOC LIMITAT.
SGND TOC LIMITAT.
LIM.CUR.
GTOC BLK
LIM.CUR.
TOC BLK
PHS TOC HIGH2
GND TOC HIGH2
SGND TOC HIGH2
PHS IOC HIGH2
GND IOC HIGH2
SGND IOC HIGH2
RECLOSER. ON/OFF
RECLOSE
DIVERSE TIMES
CYCLE CONTROL
TRIP ENABLE
RECLOSE ENABLE
WAIT.Vref
S.P.F.T
S.G.F.T
S.M.CL.T
RECL.NUM
AT REST
Af.REC.1
Af.REC.2
Af.REC.3
Af.REC.4
RECLO.ON
T. RE1, P
T. RE1,T
T. RE2,P
T. RE2,T
T. RE3,P
T. RE3,T
T. RE4,P
T. RE4,T
Af.M.CL
Af.P.TOC
Af.G.TOC
A.SG.TOC
RES.TOC
Tr.IOC F
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
Limit current
Neutral TOC block
Limit current
Sensitive Neutral TOC block
Recloser in service/out of service.
1st closure time for phase to phase faults.
1st closure time for phase to earth faults.
2nd closure time for phase to phase faults.
2nd closure time for phase to earth faults.
3rd closure time for phase to phase faults.
3rd closure time for phase to earth faults.
4th closure time for phase to phase faults.
4th closure time for phase to earth faults.
Voltage reference waiting time.
Reclaim time for faults.
Reclaim time for GND.
Security time after manual closing.
No. of closures allowed.
Trip permission at rest
Trips allowed after first reclosure.
Trips allowed after second reclosure.
Trips allowed after third reclosure.
Trips allowed after fourth reclosure.
Trips allowed after manual closure.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to phase toc.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to neutral toc.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to sensitive neutral toc.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to residual current toc.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to phase ioc
.
Phase TOC High2
Ground TOC High2
Sensitive Ground TOC High2
Phase IOC High2
Ground IOC High2
Sensitive Ground IOC High2
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 150
SETPOINTS (see) TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 3 (see)
TABLE 4 (see)
RECLOS SEQ.CORD
RECLOSERBLOCK.C.
BREAKER
OPERAT
SAME AS TABLE
SAME AS TABLE 1
SAME AS TABLE 1
EX.TR.N.
WI.TR.N
AlarmKI2
Init KI2
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
Af.G.IOC
RES.IOC
A.SG.IOC
F.H.IOC
N.H. IOC
Af.OP.PH
Af.EXT.P
ENABLED
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
Allowed recl. after tripping due to neutral ioc.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to res. current ioc
Allowed recl. after tripping due to sens. neutral ioc
Allowed recl. after tripping due to High phases instant.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to High neutral instant
Allowed recl. after tripping due to Broken Conductor
Allowed recl. after external actuation
Sequence coordination
Recloser locking conditions.
Excessive number of trips.
Time for counting excessive number of trips
KI2 sum alarm for maintenance.
Initial KI2 sum(settings).
Trip circuit monitoring enable.
Close circuit monitoring enable.
Trip locking.
Open failure time
Close failure time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 151
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
TABLE 1
(see)
SETPOINTS
(see)
CONFIGURAT I/O. CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PH.RATIO
GNDRATIO
R.T.SGND
LANGUAGE
FAULT.M.
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
FEEDING SUPERVI.
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
PHASES P
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR. T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T.
FROZ.T.
STAT.S.
PHS.B C.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTRL. SIG
ADDRESS
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase current transformatio ratio
Ground current transformatio ratio.
Sensistive ground current transformatio ratio.
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
Enable feeding supervision
MEASURE / CALCULATED
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Definite collsision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Especial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
IS and IT family
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 152
(if 103 programmed)
TCP/IP
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
SEE COM TCPIP
SEE PAR TCPIP
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 1 (see) SPECIAL PROTEC V.CTRL.(51V)
COLD LOAD
TABLE 0 (see)
SETPOINTS(change)
Enter KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS(change)
DATE/ TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1 (change)
PROTECTIONS
TABLE 1 ?
TABLE 2 ?
TABLE 3?
TABLE 4?
PROTECTION
COLDLOAD PICKUP
PHASE TOC
GND TOC
GROUND
IOC
SENS
GROUND
TOC
SENS
GROUND
IOC
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
FIX TIME
ENABL ACCELE.
BLOCKING
ENABLED
CTRLV
PHASE TOC
COLDLOAD PICKUP
PHASES TOC
GROUND TOC
PHASES IOC
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
See TCP/IP communications (NO,
PROCOME)
ADDRESS
V CTRL
.CTRLV
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
ENABLED
C.L.D.T
C.L.A.T
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
153
Cold Load Pickup
Make table 1 active
Make table 2 active
Make table 3 active
Make table 4 active
Phases time
Ground time
Voltage control
Cold load detection time
Cold load activation time
Cold Load Pickup
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
SETPOINTS(change)
SETPOINTS(change)
TABLE 1 (change) PROTECTION
RESIDUAL TOC
G SENS TOC
PHASES IOC
GROUND TOC
PROTECTION TABLE 1 (change)
HIGH IOC
UNBALANCE TOC
UNBALANCE IOC
RESIDUAL IOC
G SENS IOC
IMAGE TERMIC
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
DIRECC.
IS. GND
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLE
HEAT. CO.
RE. CONST
AL. THRES
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
HIGH IOC PHA
HIGH IOC GND
HIGH IOC SGND
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
PARAMS
PICK C
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
DIR. ANG
POLAR. V.
P BLOCK
ZONE WID
BLOCKING
ENABLED
TRQ. CTROL
Residual current time
Sensitive ground time
Phase instantaneous (low level)
Ground instantaneous (low level)
Reidual current instant
Sen. neutral instantaneous
Enable
Heating constant
Cooling constant
Alarm threshold
Restore threshold
Broken conductor
Current unbalance time
Current unbalance instant.
Phase High instantaneous
Neutral High instantaneous
Sensistive neutral High instant.
Directional protection
Isolated neutral
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 154
GR TOC 1
GR TOC 2
GR IOC 1
GR IOC 2
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
CURR. LOW
CURR. HIG
VOLT. LOW
VOLT. HIGH
T.1ST TR
SWI.INST
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVES
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVES
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
Neutral 1 Time
Neutral 2 Time
Neutral 1 instantaneous
Neutral 2 instantaneous
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 155
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
ENABLED
PH. DROP
GND. DROP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK TIM
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK NUM
TIME WIN
OP. ACT. T
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK-UP L1
F.TYPE L1
PICK-UP L2
F.TYPE L2
Breaker failure
Enable YES/NO
Pick up current
Definite time
Enable YES/NO
Pick up current
Definite time
Enable YES/NO
Pick up time
Enable YES/NO
Number of pick ups
Time window
Output activation time
Pickup current level 1
Definite time level1
Pickup current level 2
Definite time level 2
OPERATION MODE
TRIP BY FAULT
OPEN.WITH CHARGE
INTERN.ARCH DET
DEAD ZONE
LOW CHAR/GND
PTOC BLK
LIM.CUR.
GTOC BLK
LIM.CUR.
TOC BLK
HABILIT. MODE
TRIP SIGNA
52 TOPOLOGY
PH. DROP
GND. DROP
RETRIP T
TRIP T
BLOCKING
ENABLED
CHARG THRES
CHG. FAL T1
CHG. FAL T2
ENABLED
INT.ARCH PICKUP
INTERN.ARCH TIME
ENABLED
DEAD Z.THR
DEAD Z.TIM
BLOCKING
L.C/N.EN
B.T. PER
N. DET.EN
N.C.THR
RETRIP T
TRIP SIGNAL
BLOCKING
Family Breaker failure, operat. mode I
Type of enabling in trip due to fault
Trip signal
Topology 52
Phase restoration (A)
Neutral restoration (A)
Retrip definite time (sec.)
Trip definite time (sec.)
Enabling to the opening with load
Load threshold (A)
Definite time failure in load 1 (sec.)
Definite time failure in load 2 (sec.)
Rear arch detection enabling
Rear arch pick up (A)
Rear arch time(sec.)
Dead zone enabling
Dead zone threshold (A)
Dead zone definite time (sec.)
En. breaker failure in low load or gnd
Two-trip permission trip
Enabling detection by ground
Ground current threshold (A)
Retrip time (sec.)
Trip signal
Phase TOC block
Limit current
Neutral TOC block
Limit current
Sensitive Neutral TOC block
156
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
SETPOINTS(change)
SETPOINTS(change)
TABLE 1 (change) PROTECT
TABLE 1 (change) RECLOSER RECLOSER. ON/OFF
RECLOS. TIME
DIVERSE TIMES
CYCLE CONTROL
TRIP ENABLE
RECLOSE ENABLE
PHS TOC HIGH2
GND TOC HIGH2
SGND TOC HIGH2
PHS IOC HIGH2
GND IOC HIGH2
SGND IOC HIGH2
Af.REC.4
Af.M.CL
Af.P.TOC
Af.G.TOC
A.SG.TOC
RES.TOC
Tr.IOC F
Af.G.IOC
RES.IOC
A.SG.IOC
F.H.IOC
F.N. IOC
Af.OP.PH
RECLO.ON
T. RE1, P
T. RE1,T
T. RE2,P
T. RE2,T
T. RE3,P
T. RE3,T
T. RE4,P
T. RE4,T
WAIT.Vref
S.P.F.T
S.G.F.T
S.M.CL.T
RECL.NUM
AT REST
Af.REC.1
Af.REC.2
Af.REC.3
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
Recloser on/off
Recloser 1 st for faults among phases
Recloser 1 st for faults to ground
Recloser 2 nd
for faults among phases
Recloser 2 nd for faults to ground
Recloser 3 rd for faults among phases
Recloser 3 rd for faults to ground
Recloser 4 th for faults among phases
Recloser 4 th
for faults to ground
Reference voltage waiting time
Security time for faults
Security time for GND.
Security time after manual close.
Number of permitted reclosers.
Permitted trips at rest
Permitted trips after first recloser
Permitted trips after second recloser
Permitted trips after third recloser
Permitted trips after fourth recloser.
Permitted trips after manual close.
Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase toc.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to neutral toc.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to sensitive neutral toc.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to residual current toc.
Allowed reclo. after fter tripping due to phase ioc.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to neutral ioc.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to residual current ioc
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to sensitive neutral ioc
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to High phases instant.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to High neutral instant
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to Broken Conductor
Phase TOC High2
Ground TOC High2
Sensitive Ground TOC High2
Phase IOC High2
Ground IOC High2
Sensitive Ground IOC High2
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 157
SETPOINTS(change)
RECLOS SEQ.CORD
RECLOSER BLOCK.C.
Af.EXT.P
ENABLED
TABLE 1 (change)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 3 (see)
TABLE 4 (see)
BREAKER
OPERAT
SAME AS TABLE 1
SAME AS TABLE 1
SAME AS TABLE 1
EX.TR.N.
WI.TR.N
AlarmKI2
Init KI2
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
Allowed reclo. after external actuation
Sequence coordination
Recloser locking conditions.
Excessive number of trips.
Time due to excessive number of trips.
Alarm sigma KI2 for maintenance
Initial sigma KI2(setting).
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 158
TABLE 0
(change)
SETPOINTS(change)
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PH.RATIO
GND RATIO
R.T.SGND
LANGUAGE
FAULT MEASURE
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
CAL SET
DELETES?
PHASES P
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
Enter keyword ↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
PHS.B C.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T.
FROZ.T.
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT
11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
IS and IT family
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Conf. of the 7 program. leds (function and type)
Phase current transformatio ratio
Ground current transformatio ratio.
Sensistive ground current transformatio ratio.
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
For exclusive use of INGETEAM Technology
Reset the events, faults and oscillo queues
MEASURE / CALCULATED
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS wait. time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER wait. time for DNP communic.(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communic.(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for
DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Def. collision time for DNP communic.(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 159
0BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCKS OF CURRENT FAMILIES)
SETPOINTS(change)
SETPOINTS(change)
TABLE 0 (change)
COUNTER SETTINGS
TABLE 0 (change) PROTECTIONS ESPECIALES
PROTECTIONS ESPECIALES
OPEN= 0?
RECLOSE COUNT= 0 ?
MAX. =0?
KI2=INI. ?
(if 103 programmed)
TCP/IP
COLDLOAD PICKUP
V CNTRL (51V)
COLD LOAD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
TCPIP COM SELEC
PG.TCPIP PARAM
PA.CTRLV
PHASE TOC
COLDLOAD PICKUP
PHASES TOC
GROUND TOC
PHASES IOC
GROUND IOC
SENS GROUND TOC
SENS GROUND IOC
ENABLE
V CNTRL
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
ENABLED
C.L.D.T
C.L.A.T
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
Voltage control
Cold Load detection time
Cold Load activation time
Cold Load Pickup
Cold Load Pickup
Set opening counters to zero
Set reclosure and trip counters to zero
Set maximeter to zero.
Initialize KI2 sum to its setting value.
Select TCP/IP communications
(PROCOME, NO)
ADDRESS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 160
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
APPENDIX II. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
DIG. INPU
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS (read)
SETPOINTS (change)
In the following pages we enclose a table which graphically illustrates and shows the easy handling of the different menus and settings which can be changed with the keyboard/display. We recommend this appendix be at hand when you start to use the keyboard, in order to easily find the settings to be changed.
The structure is generic for the whole family of PL70, corresponding to current units, that is, it does not correspond to a certain model, but to TT, SV, TF, TH and SY families. In each model the settings and measurements corresponding to its available functions will only appear.
INP. STAT
(9 and 10)
(11)
See page 4
See page 4
See page 4
See page 6
See page 15
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output11
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 161
STATIS. DATA
LAST FAULTS
MEASURES
FREQUENCY
SYNCHRO. V.
SYNCHRO.FRQ
ANGLE DIF.
AUXIL. MEASURES
OPEN No.
FAULT n
SECONDARY MEASUR
PRIMARY MEASURES
Faul.V.A
Faul.V.B
Faul.VB
Faul.V.N
Hz FAULT
START T
END T
LedReseT
Vsup 3, 3V
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
TYPE
Vol VA
Vol VB
Vol VC
Vol VN
Mean. Vol
Rel. VAB
Rel. VBC (V)
Rel. VCA
Vcomp(V)
Vol VA(kV)
Vol VB(kV)
Vol VC(kV)
Vol VN(kV)
Rel. VAB (kV)
Rel. VBC (kV)
Rel. VCA (kV)
Mean Rel(kV)
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
Phase A voltage.
Phase B voltage
Phase C voltage
Neutral voltage
Mean voltage
Compound voltage AB
Compound voltage BC
Compound voltage CA
Mean compound voltage
Phase A voltage in primary
Phase B voltage in primary
Phase B voltage in primary.
Ground voltage in primary.
AB in compound voltage in primary
BC in compound voltage in primary
CA in compound voltage in primary
Mean compound voltage in primary
Frequeny (Hz)
Voltages sides A and B of synchronism
Frequencies sides A and B of synchronism
Angle differences sides A and B of synchronism
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Total number of trips given by the protection
Phase/s in which the last fault has occurred
Voltage in phase A when the fault occurred (Sec).
Voltage in phase B when the fault occurred (Sec).
Voltage in phase C when the fault occurred (Sec).
Voltage in neutral when the fault occurred (Sec).
Frequency when the fault occurred (Hz).
Fault start date and time.
Fault end date and time.
Fault acknowledgement to switch off the Led.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 162
SETPOINTS (see)
PROTECT TABLE 1 (see) OVERVOLT. TOV
OVERVOLT. IOV
UNDERVOLT. TOV
UNDERVOLT. IOV
TENSIÓN NEUTRO
VOLTAG UNBALANCE
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
PICK UP
TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
Neutral voltage
Overvoltage time
Overvoltage Instantaneous
Undervoltage time
Undervoltage Instantaneous
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 163
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 1 (see) FREQUENCY
LOW VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY GRADIENT
OUT OF STEP
SYNCHRO
PROTECT
FIX TIME 1
SPV.F.2
F.GRAD 2
FIX TIME 2
SPV.F.3
F.GRAD 3
FIX TIME 3
SPV.F.4
F.GRAD4
FIX TIME 4
BLOCKING
MIN. V. S
CYCLES N.
DF/DT CYCLES
ENABLED
SPV.F.1
F.GRAD 1
FREQ. 3
FREQ. 4
FREQ. 5
FREQ. 1
FREQ. 2
SI.CH.EN
A.DIF.EN
F.DIF.EN
V.DIF.PU
A.DIF.PU
F.DIF.P
MIN. V A
MIN. V B
VA ABSEN
VB ABSEN
CL.CON.T
BLOCKING
BLOCKING
ENABLED.
ANGLE
MIN. V.
TRIP
BLOCKING
SI.CH.EN
SUBV.CO
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
!A and !B
!A and B
A and!B
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
Frequency step 1
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 2
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 3
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 4
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 5
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Min.voltage of freq. supervision
Number of pick up cycles
Number of df/dt cycles
En. Freq. rate of change function
Supervision frequency step 1
Frequency rate of change step 1
Definite time step 1
Supervision frequency step 2
Frequency rate of change step 2
Definite time step 2
Supervision frequency step 3
Frequency rate of change step 3
Definite time step 3
Supervision frequency step 4
Frequency rate of change step 4
Definite time step 4
En. synchronism general function
Enable no voltage in A or B
Enable no voltage in A, but in B
Enable no voltage in B, but in A
Enable voltage difference
Enable angle difference
Enable frequency difference
Pick up voltage difference
Pick up angle difference
Pick up frequency difference
Minimum voltage in A
Minimum voltage in B
Lack of voltage in A
Lack of voltage in B
Close conditions timing
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 164
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 0
(see)
TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 2 (see)
PROTECT
BREAKER MONITOR
RECL. FREQUENCY
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
VOL.RAT
NOM. VOLT
IN V
LANGUAGE
FAULT.M.
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
FEEDING SUPERVI.
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
LOW VOLTAGE
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
ENABLED
FREQ COND.
MIN FREQ
VOLT. COND
MIN. VOLTAGE
RECL TIME
SECU TIME
S.M.CL.T
ENAB. WAIT.T..
DDF. WAIT. T.
BLOCKING
TRIP LAT
OP.F.TIM
CL.F.TIM
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT
11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
TYPE V
MEAS.V
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG.
ADDRESS
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ENABLE
S.A PICK
S.B PICK
FIX. TIME
BLOCKING
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Voltage transformatio ratio
Nominal voltage
Voltage input,voltage type (simples or compounds)
Voltage measurement
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
Enable feeding supervision
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Enab. min. V function of synchronism
Pick up voltage side A
Pick up voltage side B
Definite time
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Enable frequency recloser
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 165
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
(if 103 programmed)
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR. T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Definite collsision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 166
SETPOINTS (change)
ENTER KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS (change)
TABLE1 ?
TABLE 2 ?
TABLE 3?
TABLE 4?
PROTECTION
DATE/TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1 (change)
UNDERVOLT IUV
GROUND VOLT
OVERVOLT TOV ENABLED
PICKUP
OVERVOLT IOV
CURVE
INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
TIME
BLOCKING
UNDERVOLT TUV ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIXED TIME
IOC.PICK
INS.TIME
BLOCKING
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
Make table 1 active.
Make table 2 active..
Make table 3 active.
Make table 4 active.
Time overvoltage
Instantaneous overvoltage
Time undervoltage
Instantaneous undervoltage
Ground voltage
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 167
SETPOINTS (change)
PROTECTION TABLE 1 (change)
FREQ. 4
FREQ. 5
BLOCKING
MIN. V. S
CYCLES N.
DF/DT CYCLES
ENABLED
SPV.F.1
F.GRAD 1
FIX TIME 1
SPV.F.2
F.GRAD 2
FREQ. 1
FREQ. 2
FREQ. 3
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
FIX TIME 2
SPV.F.3
F.GRAD 3
FIX TIME 3
SPV.F.4
F.GRAD4
FIX TIME 4
BLOCKING
ENABLED.
ANGLE
MIM. V.
TRIP
BLOCKING
OUT OF STEP
VOLTAG UNBALANCE
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
FREQUENCY
LOW VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY GRADIENT
TYPE
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
ENABLED
PICK UP
TIME
TYPE
ENABLED
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
Frequency step 1
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 2
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 3
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 4
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency step 5
Pick up frequency
Time
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Min.voltage of freq. supervision
Number of pick up cycles
Number of df/dt cycles
Enable frequency rate of change function
Supervision frequency step 1
Frequency rate of change step 1
Definite time step 1
Supervision frequency step 2
Frequency rate of change step 2
Definite time step 2
Supervision frequency step 3
Frequency rate of change step 3
Definite time step 3
Supervision frequency step 4
Frequency rate of change step 4
Definite time step 4
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 168
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
SETPOINTS (change)
SETPOINTS (change)
TABLE 1 (change) PROTECTION SYNCHRO
LOW VOLTAGE
TABLE 1 (change)
TABLE 2 (change)
TABLE 3 (change)
TABLE 4 (change)
BREAKER MONITOR
OPERATION LOGIC
RECL. FREQUENCY
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LAT
OP.F.TIM
CL.F.TIM
ENABLED
FREQ COND.
MIN FREQ
VOLT. COND
MIN. VOLTAGE
RECL TIME
SECU TIME
S.M.CL.T
ENAB. WAIT.T..
DDF. WAIT. T.
BLOCKING
SI.CH.EN
SUBV.CO
RECLOSER UV. CONDIT.
SI.CH.EN
A.DIF.EN
F.DIF.EN
V.DIF.PU
A.DIF.PU
F.DIF.P
MIN. V A
MIN. V B
VA ABSEN
VB ABSEN
CL.CON.T
BLOCKING
ENABLE
S.A PICK
S.B PICK
FIX. TIME
BLOCKING
!A and !B
!A and B
A and !B
!A and !B
!A and B
A and !B
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
Enable frequency recloser
Enable synchronism general function
Enable no voltage in A or B
Enable no voltage in A, but in B
Enable no voltage in B, but in A
Enable no voltage in A nor in B
Enable no voltage in A, but there is in B
Enable no voltage in B, but there is in A
Enable voltage difference
Enable angle difference
Enable frequency difference
Pick up voltage difference
Pick up angle difference
Pick up frequency difference
Minimum voltage in A
Minimum voltage in B
Lack of voltage in A
Lack of voltage in B
Close conditions timing
Enab. min. V function of synchronism
Pick up voltage side A
Pick up voltage side B
Definite time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 169
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
TABLE 0
(change)
SETPOINTS
(change)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
Enter KEYWORD ↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG.
ADDRESS
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR. T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1-
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS
ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
TYPE V
MEAS.V
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
LANGUAGE
VOL.RAT
NOM. VOLT
IN V
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
FAULT MEASURE
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
CAL.SET.
DELETE?
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Comfig of the 7 program leds (function and type)
Spanish/English
Voltage transformatio ratio
Nominal voltage
Volt input, voltage type (simples or compounds)
Voltage measurement
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
For exclusive use of INGETEAM Technology
Resets the events, faults, oscillo queues.
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS wait. time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER wait. time for DNP communic.(csec)
Stabilization time for DNP communic.(csec)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communicat.
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Def. colision time for DNP communic.(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 170
SETPOINTS
(change)
COUNTER
SETTING
OPEN= 0?
(if 103 programmed) BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
1BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF VOLTAGE FAMILIES)
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
Set opening counters to zero
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 171
2BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PO FAMILY)
APPENDIX III. KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PO FAMILY)
MEASURES
STATIS. DATA
LAST FAULTS
In the following pages we enclose a table in which the details and available settings in units belonging to the PO family are indicated.
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
DIG. INPU
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS(read)
SETPOINTS (change)
INP. STAT
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
(9 and 10)
(11)
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output 11
SECONDARY MEASUR
PRIMARY MEASURES
POWER MEASUR.
AUXIL. MEASURES.
OPEN No.
FAULT n
Curr (A)
Volt
Curr (A)
Volt
ACTUAL P
IDLE POW
APP.POW.
LAG FACT
Vsup 3, 3V
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
TYPE
FAU.PO
FAULT Q.
START T
END T
LedReseT
Current
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Active power (secondary)
Reactive power (secondary)
Apparent power (secondary)
Power factor
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Number of total openings by the protection
Cause of the last fault
Active power when the fault occurred (Sec)
Reactive power when the last fault occurred (Sec)
Fault start date and time.
Fault end date and time.
Fault acknowledgement to switch off the Led.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 172
2BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PO FAMILY)
TABLE 1 (see)
SEE TABLE 1
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 3 (see)
TABLE 4 (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 0 (see) CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
VOL.RAT
TRF.RAT.
NOM. VOLT
LANGUAGE
FAULT.M.
FREQUEN.
FEEDING SUPERVI.
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
PROTECTION
BREAKER MONITOR
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LAT
OP.F.TIM
CL.F.TIM
UNDERPOW.
OVERPOW HI-SET
OVERPOW LO-SET
REVERSE POWER HI
REVERSE POWER LO
APPARENT UNDERPOW
OV.AP.PO HI-SET
OV.AP.PO LO-SET
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT
11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Voltage transformatio ratio
Current transformatio ratio
Nominal voltage
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
50 / 60 Hz
Enable feeding supervision
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Minimum power
Maximum power (High)
Maximum power (Low)
Reverse power (High)
Reverse power (Low)
Minimum apparent power
Max. apparent power (High)
Max. apparent power (Low)
En. trip circuit surveillance
En. close circuit surveillance
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 173
2BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PO FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (change)
ENTER KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS (change)
DATE/TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1 (change)
TABLE1 ?
TABLE 2 ?
TABLE 3?
TABLE 4?
PROTECTION UNDERPOW.
OVERPOW HI-SET
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG.
ADDRESS
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
SEE COM TCPIP
SEE PAR TCPIP
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
(if 103 programmed)
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
TCP/IP
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
Make table 1 active.
Make table 2 active..
Make table 3 active.
Make table 4 active.
Minimum power
Maximum power (High)
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS Signal
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Definite collsision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Max number of non requested messages for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission Time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
See TCP/IP communications (NO, PROCOME)
ADDRESS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 174
2BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PO FAMILY)
SETPOINTS
(change)
SETPOINTS (change)
TABLE 0 (change)
TABLE 1 (change)
TABLE 2 (change)
TABLE 3(change)
TABLE 4 (change)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
Enter KEYWORD ↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
BREAKER
MONITOR
OPERATION
LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LAT
OP.F.TIM
CL.F.TIM
OVERPOW LO-SET
REVERSE POWER HI
REVERSE POWER LO
APPARENT
UNDERPOW
OV.AP.PO HI-SET
OV.AP.PO LO-SET
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
VOL.RAT
TRANSFORM. RATIO
NOM. VOLT
LANGUAGE
FAULT MEASURE
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
CAL.SET
DELETE?
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT
11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
TRF.RAT.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
Trip circuit monitoring enable.
Close circuit monitoring enable.
Trip locking.
Open failure timing.
Close failure timing.
Maximum power (Low)
Reverse power (High)
Reverse power (Low)
Minimum apparent power
Maximum apparent power (High)
Maximum apparent power (Low)
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Conf. of the 7 program. leds (function and type)
Voltage transformatio ratio
Current transfomatio ratio
Nominal voltage
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
For exclusive use of INGETEAM Technology
SA
Resets the events, faults, oscillo queues.
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 175
COUNTER
SETTING
SETPOINTS
(change)
OPEN=0?
2BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PO FAMILY)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
(if 103 programmed)
TCP/IP
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
TCPIP COM SELEC
PG.TCPIP PARAM
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for
DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for
DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Def.collision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission Time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
Set opening counters to zero
Select TCP/IP communications (NO,
PROCOME)
ADDRESS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 176
3BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PC FAMILY)
APPENDIX IV. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PC FAMILY)
In the following pages we enclose a table in which the details and available settings in units belonging to the PC family are indicated.
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
DIG. INPU
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS (read)
SETPOINTS (change)
INP. STAT
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
(9 and 10)
(11)
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output11
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 177
3BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PC FAMILY)
STATIS. DATA
LAST FAULTS
MEASURES
SETPOINTS (see)
SECONDARY MEASUR
MED. PRIMARIO
IMPEDANC. MEASURES
AUXILIAR
OPEN No.
FAULT n
TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 3 (see)
TABLE 4 (see)
PROTECT
SUPERVI. BREAKER
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
Z real
Z imag
Vsup 3, 3V
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
TYPE
Faul.V.A
Faul.V.B
Faul.VB
Faul.V.N
Hz FAULT
START T
END T
LEDreset
Curr (A)
Vol VA
Vol VB
Vol VC
Mean. Vol
Rel. VAB
Rel. VBC (V)
Rel. VCA
Vcomp(V)
Inten (A)
VA (kV)
VB (kV)
VC (kV)
VAB (kV)
VBC (kV)
VCA (kV)
Vcom(kV)
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LAT
OP.F.TIM
LOSS OF FIELD
CL.F.TIM
ZONE 2
GENERAL.
ZONE 1
Current
Phase A voltage.
Phase B voltage
Phase C voltage
Mean voltage
Compound voltage AB
Compound voltage BC
Compound voltage CA
Mean compound voltage
Current
Phase A voltage in the primary
Phase B voltage in the primary
Phase C voltage in the primary
Compound voltage AB in the primary
Compound voltage BC in the primary
Compound voltage CA in the primary
Average compound voltage in the primary
Real value of the calculated impedance
Imaginary value of the calculated impedance
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Total number of trips given by the protection
Phase/s in which the last fault has occurred
Voltage in phase A when the fault occurred (Sec).
Voltage in phase B when the fault occurred (Sec).
Voltage in phase C when the fault occurred (Sec).
Voltage in the ground when the fault occurred (Sec).
Frequency when the fault occurred (Hz).
Fault start date and time.
Fault end date and time.
Fault leds reset.
TRIP T.
OFFSET
DIAMETER
SUBV VIG
ALARM T
TRIP T.
ENABLED
MIN.VOL.
DIR.ANG.
C PHASE
NOM.VOL.
BLOCKING
OFFSET
DIAMETER
SUBV VIG
ALARM T
Enabled
Minimum voltage
Directional angle
Phase in which current is measured
Nominal voltage
Blockings
Offset zone 1
Diameter zone 1
Undervoltage surveillance zone 1
Time alarm zone 1
Time trip zone 1
Offset zone 2
Diameter zone 2
Undervoltage surveillance zone 2
Time alarm zone 2
Time trip zone 2
Enable trip circuit supervision
Enable close circuit supervision
Trip latch
Opening failure time.
Losing failure time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 178
3BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PC FAMILY)
SETPOINTS
(see)
TABLE 0
(see)
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PH.RATIO
VOL.RAT
LANGUAGE
FAULT.M.
FREQUEN.
FEEDING SUPERVI.
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
(if 103 programmed)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
CONFIG.COMMUNIC..
INPUT1- INPUT 8
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase transformatio ratio
Voltage transformatio ratio
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
50 / 60 Hz
Enable feeding supervision
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Definite collsision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 179
3BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PC FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (change)
ENTER KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS (change)
SETPOINTS
(change)
TABLE 0 (change)
DATE/TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1 (change)
TABLE 2 (change)
TABLE 3 (change)
TABLE 4 (change)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL
SPECIAL
Enter KEYWORD ↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
TCP/IP
TABLA 1 ?
TABLA 2 ?
TABLA 3?
TABLA 4?
PROTECT
SUPERVI. BREAKER
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PHAS.RAT
VOL.RAT
LANGUAGE
FAULT MEASURE
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
CAL SET
DELETE?
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LAT
OP.F.TIM
CL.F.TIM
LOSS OF FIELD
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
SEE COM TCPIP
SEE PAR TCPIP
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
GENERAL.
INPUT1- INPUT 8
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
TRIP T.
BLOCKING
OFFSET
DIAMETER
SUBV VIG
ALARM T
TRIP T.
OFFSET
DIAMETER
SUBV VIG
ALARM T
ENABLED
MIN.VOL.
DIR.ANG.
C PHASE
NOM.VOL.
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
Hacer activa la tabla 1.
Hacer activa la tabla 2.
Hacer activa la tabla 3.
Hacer activa la tabla 4.
Enabled
Minimum voltage
Directional angle
Phase in which current is measured
Nominal voltage
Blockings
Offset zone 1
Diameter zone 1
Undervoltage surveillance zone 1
Time alarm zone 1
Time trip zone 1
Offset zone 2
Diameter zone 2
Undervoltage surveillance zone 2
Time alarm zone 2
Time trip zone 2
Enable trip circuit supervision
Enable close circuit supervision
Trip latch
Opening failure time.
Losing failure time
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase transformatio ratio
Voltage transformatio ratio
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
Para uso exclusivo de INGETEAM Technology
Resetea las colas de sucesos, faltas, oscilos...
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for DNP communications
See TCP/IP communications (NO,
PROCOME)
ADDRESS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 180
OPEN=0? COUNTER
SETTING
SETPOINTS
(change)
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
TCPIP COM SELEC
PG.TCPIP PARAM
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
(if 103 programmed)
(if DNP programmed)
TCP/IP
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Definite collsision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
Set opening counters to zero
3BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF PC FAMILY)
Select TCP/IP communications
(NO, PROCOME)
ADDRESS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 181
4BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
APPENDIX V. KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
MEASURES
STATIS. DATA
LAST FAULTS
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS (read)
SETPOINTS (change)
In the following pages we enclose a table in which the details and available settings in units belonging to the NT family are indicated.
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
DIG. INPU
INP. STAT
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
(9 and 10)
(11)
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output11
OPEN No.
FAULT n
SECONDARY MEASUR
PRIMARY MEASURES
FREq(Hz)
AUXIL. MEASURES
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
TYPE
Faul.GND
Faul.GND 2
Faul.GND 3
Hz FAULT
START T
END T
LedReseT
GND. (A)
N 2 C (A)
N 3 C (A)
V (V)
GND (A)
N 2 C (A)
N 3 C (A)
V (kV)
Vsup 3, 3V
Current ground
Current ground 2
Current ground 3
Voltage
Current ground in the primary
Current ground 2 in the primary
Current ground 3 in the primary
Voltage in the primary
Frequency
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Total number of trips given by the protection
Phase/s in which the last fault has occurred
Current in the neutral when the fault occurred (Sec)
Current in the neutral 2 when the fault occurred (Sec)
Current in the neutral 3 when the fault occurred (Sec)
Frequency(Hz) when the fault occurred
Fault start date and time.
Fault end date and time.
Fault acknowledgement to switch off the Led.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 182
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 1 (see) PROTECT
GROUND TOC 2
GROUND IOC 1
GROUND IOC 2
BREAKER FAILURE
GROUND TOC
MAX.HI POTENCIA
MAX.LO POTENCIA
INV.HI POTENCIA
GROUND IOC
GROUND TOC 1
ENABLED
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEFINITE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEFINITE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
GND DROP
DEFINITE TIME
BLOCKING
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEFINITE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
4BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 183
4BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS
(change)
TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 2 (change)
TABLE 3 (change)
TABLE 4 (change)
PROTECT
SUPERVI. BREAKER
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
TABLE 0
(change)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERALS
SPECIAL
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
GNDRATIO
PHAS.RAT
VOL.RAT
LANGUAGE
FAULT.M.
FREQUEN.
FEEDING SUPERV
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
MIN V
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEF. TIME
RST.TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
MIN V
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
RST.TIME
BLOCKING
OVER.I
RESTRIN. GND
OVER.T
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
Enabled restricted ground
Pick up
Definite time
Bloking conditions
Enable overexcitation timing
Overexcitation minimum voltage
Pick up
Curves
Index
Additional time
Restoration time
Locking
Enable overexcitation instantaneous
Overexcitation minimum voltage
Pick up
Additional time
Restoration time
Locking
Trip circuit monitoring enable.
Close circuit monitoring enable.
Trip locking.
Open failure timing.
Close failure timing.
INPUT1- INPUT 8
ADDRESS
CTROL SIG
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
POR.W.T
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT
11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Ground current transformatio ratio
Phase transformatio ratio
Voltage transformatio ratio
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
50 / 60 Hz
Enable
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
UCL address for DNP communications
RTS signal
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 184
4BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (change)
ENTER KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS (change)
DATE/TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1 (change)
TABLE1 ?
TABLE 2 ?
TABLE 3?
TABLE 4?
PROTECTION
GROUND TOC 2
GROUND IOC 1
GROUND TOC MAX.HI POTENCIA
MAX.LO POTENCIA
INV.HI POTENCIA
GROUND IOC
GROUND TOC1
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
BACK
(if 103 programmed)
POSTTR T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T",
COL.V. T",
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEFINTE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEFINTE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEFINTE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEFINTE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
Make table 1 active.
Make table 2 active..
Make table 3 active.
Make table 4 active.
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Definite collsision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
UCL address
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 185
4BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (change)
TABLE 1 (change)
TABLE 2 (change)
TABLE 3 (change)
TABLE 4 (change)
PROTECTION
SUPERVI. BREAKER
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
GROUND IOC 2
DEFINTE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEFINTE TIME
BLOCKING
MIN V
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
RST.TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
GND DROP
DEFINITE TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICK UP
DEF. TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
MIN V
PICK UP
CURVES
INDEX
DEF. TIME
RST.TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
OVER.T
OVER.I
BREAKER FAILURE
RESTRIN. GND Enable
Pickup
Fixed time
Locking condition
Enable overexcitation timing
Overexcitation minimum voltage
Pick up
Curves
Index
Additional timing
Restoration timing
Locking
Enable overexcitation instantaneous
Overexcitation minimum voltage
Pick up
Additional timing
Restoration timing
Locking
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 186
SETPOINTS
(change)
4BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL
SPECIAL
Enter KEYWORD ↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
TABLE 0 (change) CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
GND RATIO
G1 RATIO
G2 RATIO
VOLT. RAT.
NOMINALVOLTAGE
LANGUAGE
BACK
(if MODBUS programmed)
FAULT MEASURE
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
CAL SET
DELETE?
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if DNP programmed)
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
COUN.B.N
N.R.MSG
PR.COLL
COL.F. T
COL.V. T
RESEND T
N.R.MAX
"ESPECIAL
FORMAT
POSTTR T.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
POR.W.T
STAB. T
ACK.W.T
SYNC. T
ACK LINK
BYT.AP.N
CHANG.T
FROZ.T
STAT.S.
MEAS.B.N
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
MAST. AD
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
FIX.RTS
COMMS C
CTS W.T
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
PARITY
T.AC.RTS
T.CARRIE
T.DE.RTS
FORMAT
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configurat. of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Neutral current transformation ratio
Transformatio ratio of the G1 current
Transformatio ratio of the G2 current
Voltage transformation ratio
Nominal voltage
Spanish/English
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
For exclusive use of INGETEAM Technology SA
Resets the event, fault, osillograph queues
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BIT for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications(csec.)
Stabilization time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP(csec.).
Synchronixation time for DNP communications(csec.)
Link acknowledge for DNP c
Number of application messages bytes for DNP
Change sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurement format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested messages sending for DNP
Collision prevision for DNP communications
Definite collsision time for DNP communications(csec.)
T. de colisión variable for DNP (csec.)
T. de reenvío de msgs. no pedidos for DNP
Num. máx. mensajes no pedidos for DNP
Sspecial for DNP communications
UCL address for DNP communications
Posttransmission time
UCL address
Baud rate
Parity
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Format for MODBUS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 187
SETPOINTS
(change)
COUNTER
SETTING
OPEN=0?
BACK
(if 103 programmed)
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BITS
RTS ACT.
CARRIER
RTS DIS.
DATA FOR
4BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY (BLOCK OF NT FAMILY)
UCL address
Baud rate in DNP communications
Parity in DNP communications
Number of STOP. BIT.
RTS activation waiting time
Carrier waiting time
RTS deactivation waiting time
Compatible VDEW/Extended
Set opening counters to zero
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 188
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
APPENDIX VI. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
MEASURES
STATIS. DATA
In the following pages we enclose a table in which the details and available settings in units belonging to the SC and CT family are indicated.
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
DIG. INPU
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS(read)
SETPOINTS (change)
SECONDARY MEASUR
PRIMARY MEASURES
AUXIL. MEASURES.
OPEN No.
INP. STAT
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
(9 and 10)
(11)
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
PhaseA (A)
Phase C (A)
Phase (A)
V (V)
Phase A (A)
Phase C (A)
Gnd. (A)
V (kV)
Vsup 3, 3V
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output 11
Current in phase A.
Current in phase fase C.
Current in ground
Voltage
Current in phase A in the primary
Current in phase fase C in the primary
Current in ground in the primary
Tensión en el primario
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Number of total openings by the protection
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 189
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 3 (see)
TABLE 4 (see)
TABLE 0 (see)
TABLE 1 (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
EXTING.CURRENT
RESTRAIN HARM.2
DF AUTOMAT
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PH. RATIO
GND RATIO
VOL. RAT
NOMINALVOLTAGE
TIME UNKNOWN 52
SLACK SPRINGS
GND DF INST
S.GND DF INST
DF GENERAL
PHASE DF T.U.
GND DF T.U.
S.GND DF T.U.
PHASE DF INST
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL
SUPERVI. BREAKER
OCR
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
Vvp LEV.
FAU.M.T.
V.TIME
L.TIME
Vva LEV.
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
THRESH %
R.T.R.S.
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
SNEU.CUR
PHS.ENAB
GND.ENAB
THRESH %
P.MIN.C.
G.MIN.C.
RECL.N.
T1 TIME
T2 TIME
T3 TIME
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
TIME UNKNOWN 52
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Enable time phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable instantaneous phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Voltage presence level
Fault memory time
Restoration voltage presence minimum time
Light signal restoration time
Voltage ausence level
Voltage presence/ausence threshold (%)
Restore Time of Remote control Signal (sec)
Phases extinguish current
Neutral extinguish current
Sensitive neutral extinguish current
Phases enable
Neutral enable
I2f/If threshold (%)
Phase minimum current
Neutral minimum current
Recloser number
Time T1 (sec.)
Time T2 (sec.)
Time T3 (sec.)
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase current transformation ratio
Neutral current transformation ratio
Voltage transformation ratio
Nominal voltage
Timing of the unknown state 52
Spring slacks
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 190
PORT COM2
(If DNP)
SPECIAL
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
LANGUAGE
BACK
(if Gestel)
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
EN.BUTT.
FEEDING SUPERVI
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Dir.log.
P.Sincr.
LCU ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
TYPE OF PARITY
STOP ITS
FIXED RTS
RTS AND CTS CTRL
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)
STABIL TIME . (csec)
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)
LINK ACK.
AP. MESS BYTE N.
T.CHANGES
T.FROZEN
STATUS SEND
MEAS. BITS NUM.
COUNT. BITS NUM.
NON REQUEST. MESS.
PREV.CONFLICT
FIXED COL. TIME (csec)
VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)
T.RESEND
N.MAX.NO REQUEST.
SPECIAL
MEASURES FORMAT
T.POSTTR
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
Spanish/English
Programmable phase current measurements scale limit
Programmable neutral current measurements scale limit
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
Enable pushbuttons
Enable feeding supervision
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Remote station logical direction
Synchronsm permission
LCU address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate for DNP communications
Parity for DNP communications
Stop bits for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
Stabilization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
Synchronization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge for DNP communications
N. bytes of application messages for DNP
Changes sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurements format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested message sending for DNP
Conflict prev. for DNP communications
Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
Variable conflict time for DNP
Non requested messages resend time for DNP
Max. non requested messages number for DNP
Special for DNP communications
Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
Posttransmssion time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 191
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
CTS
AC. POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Reb. De. N
Reb. Ac. T.
R. reac.
.
ADDRESS
APPL. ADDR
BALANCED
Tipo Can
BAUDRATE
PARITY
STOP BIT.
POR.W.T.
RTS T.A.
T.DE.RTS
CTS W.T.
CD DEA.T.
RTS AND CTS CTRL
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)
STABIL TIME . (csec)
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)
LINK ACK.
AP. MESS BYTE N.
T.CHANGES
T.FROZEN
STATUS SEND
MEAS. BITS NUM.
COUNT. BITS NUM.
NON REQUEST. MESS.
PREV.CONFLICT
FIXED COL. TIME (csec)
VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)
T.RESEND
N.MAX.NO REQUEST.
SPECIAL
MEASURES FORMAT
T.POSTTR
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
T.ac.Sil
P.G.Cam.
D.Sen.F.
T.c.Sen.
P.Sincr.
LCU ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
TYPE OF PARITY
STOP ITS
FIXED RTS
PORT COM2
(If DNP)
BACK
(if PID1)
REAR PORT
(If SAP20 programmed
REAR PORT
(If 101 programmed)
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Line silence activation time (sec.)
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signalchange time
Synchronsm permission
LCU address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate for DNP communications
Parity for DNP communications
Stop bits for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
Stabilization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
Synchronization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge for DNP communications
N. bytes of application messages for DNP
Changes sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurements format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested message sending for DNP
Conflict prev. for DNP communications
Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
Variable conflict time for DNP
Non requested messages resend time for DNP
Max. non requested messages number for DNP
Special for DNP communications
Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
Posttransmssion time
UCL Address for communications SAP20
Baud rate in the SAP20 communication
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Carrier activation time (Hundredths of seconds)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Number for deactivation by rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for reactivation by rebounces
Remote address for 101 communications
Application address for 101 communications
Balanced mode
Channel type, connection
Baud rate in the 101 communication
Parity in the 101 communication
STOP BIT in the 101 communication
Carrier time
RTS activation time
RTS deactivation time
CTS waiting time
TCD activation time
192
TCP/IP
RTS+CTS
SETPOINTS (change)
Enter KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS (change)
DATE/TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1(change)
TABLE 1 ?
TABLE 2 ?
TABLE 3?
TABLE 4?
SUPERVI.
BREAKER
OCR
ORD BUFF.
RESP W.T.
TR. MIN. T.
RETRAN.T
FIAB.TIM
QEUE1.F
QEUE1.D
QEUE2.ER
Reb.De.N
Reb.Ac.T
R.Reac.N
STA1 IOA
STA2 IOA
DSTA IOA
MEAS.IOA
FU.Q IOA
MF.Q IOA
FIAB IOA
FI.H.IOA
IOA BY.N
SEE COM TCPIP
SEE PAR TCPIP
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
PHASE DF T.U.
GND DF T.U.
S.GND DF T.U.
PHASE DF INST
GND DF INST
S.GND DF INST
DF GENERAL
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
Vvp LEV.
FAU.M.T.
V.TIME
L.TIME
Vva LEV.
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
RTS and CTS Control
Measurement change time
Transmission time
Order buffer size
Response waiting time
Minimum time between transmissions
Number of retransmissions
Period for LinkTtest(sec)
% filling queue 1
% dumping queue 2
Delete queue 2
Number for the deactivation due to rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for the reactivation due to rebounces
IOA 1st point simple states (1)
IOA 1st point simple states (2)
IOA 1st point double states
IOA 1st point measurement
IOA 1st point full queue
IOA 1st point semifull queue
IOA 1st point reliability
IOA Reliable time
NUM.Bytes IOA
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
See TCP/IP communications (NO, PROCOME)
ADDRESS
Make table 1 active.
Make table 2 active.
Make table 3 active.
Make table 4 active.
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Enable time phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable instantaneous phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Voltage presence level
Fault memory time
Restoration voltage presence minimum time
Light signal restoration time
Voltage ausence level
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 193
SETPOINTS
(change)
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
TABLE 0
(change)
TABLE 2 (change)
TABLE 3 (change)
TABLE 4 (change)
OPERATION LOGIC
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
EXTING.CURRENT
RESTRAIN HARM.2
DF AUTOMAT
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
THRESH %
T2 TIME
T3 TIME
R.T.R.S.
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
SNEU.CUR
PHS.ENAB
GND.ENAB
THRESH %
P.MIN.C.
G.MIN.C.
RECL.N.
T1 TIME
Voltage presence/ausence threshold (%)
Restore Time of Remote control Signal (sec)
Phases extinguish current
Neutral extinguish current
Sensitive neutral extinguish current
Phases enable
Neutral enable
I2f/If threshold (%)
Phase minimum current
Neutral minimum current
Recloser number
Time T1 (sec.)
Time T2 (sec.)
Time T3 (sec.)
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PH. RATIO
GND RATIO
VOL. RAT
NOMINALVOLTAGE
TIME UNKNOWN 52
SLACK SPRINGS
LANGUAGE
BACK
(if Gestel)
PHS.CUR. S.LIMIT
NEUT.CUR S.LIMIT
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
CAL SET
DELETE?
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome)
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL
SPECIAL
Enter keyword ↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
INPUT1- INPUT 8
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Dir.log.
Prio.Al.
P.A.Arr.
NEUT.CUR
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT
11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
TIME UNKNOWN 52
PHS.CUR.
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase current transformation ratio
Neutral current transformation ratio
Voltage transformation ratio
Nominal voltage
Timing of the unknown state 52
Slacks spring
Spanish/English
Programmable phase current measurements scale limit
Programmable neutral current measurements scale limit
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
For exclusive use of INGETEAM Technology SA
Resets the event, fault, osillograph queues
Procome, DNP, MODBUS
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Remote station logical direction
Remote station alarm priority
Remote station alarm priority when picking up
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 194
SETPOINTS (change)
TABLE 0 (change)
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
REAR PORT
(If SAP20 programmed)
REAR PORT
(If 101 programmed)
TRANS T.
BACK
(if PID1)
PORT COM2
(If DNP)
CONFIG.COMMUNIC. ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
T.ac.Sil
P.G.Cam.
D.Sen.F.
T.c.Sen.
P.Sincr.
LCU ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
TYPE OF PARITY
STOP ITS
FIXED RTS
RTS AND CTS CTRL
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)
STABIL TIME . (csec)
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)
LINK ACK.
AP. MESS BYTE N.
T.CHANGES
T.FROZEN
STATUS SEND
MEAS. BITS NUM.
COUNT. BITS NUM.
NON REQUEST. MESS.
PREV.CONFLICT
FIXED COL. TIME (csec)
VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)
T.RESEND
N.MAX.NO REQUEST.
SPECIAL
MEASURES FORMAT
T.POSTTR
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Line silence activation time (sec.)
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signalchange time
Synchronsm permission
LCU address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate for DNP communications
Parity for DNP communications
Stop bits for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
Stabilization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
Synchronization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge for DNP communications
N. bytes of application messages for DNP
Changes sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurements format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested message sending for DNP
Conflict prev. for DNP communications
Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
Variable conflict time for DNP
Non requested messages resend time for DNP
Max. non requested messages number for DNP
Special for DNP communications
Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
Posttransmssion time
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
CTS
AC. POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Reb. De. N
Reb. Ac. T.
R. reac.
.
ADDRESS
APPL. ADDR
BALANCED
Tipo Can
BAUDRATE
PARITY
STOP BIT.
POR.W.T.
RTS T.A.
T.DE.RTS
CTS W.T.
CD DEA.T.
Transmission time
LCU address for SAP20 communications
Baud rate in the SAP20 communication
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Carrier activation time (Hundredths of seconds)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Number for deactivation by rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for reactivation by rebounces
Remote address for 101 communications
Application address for 101 communications
Balanced mode
Channel type, connection
Baud rate in the 101 communication
Parity in the 101 communication
STOP BIT in the 101 communication
Carrier time
RTS activation time
RTS deactivation time
CTS waiting time
TCD activation time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 195
COUNTER
SETTING
SETPOINTS
(change)
OPEN=0?
5BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF SC AND CT FAMILIES)
RTS+CTS
MEA.CH.T
ORD BUFF.
RESP W.T.
TR. MIN. T.
RETRAN.T
FIAB.TIM
QEUE1.F
QEUE1.D
QEUE2.ER
Reb.De.N
Reb.Ac.T
R.Reac.N
STA1 IOA
STA2 IOA
DSTA IOA
MEAS.IOA
FU.Q IOA
MF.Q IOA
FIAB IOA
FI.H.IOA
IOA BY.N
TCPIP COM SELEC
PG.TCPIP PARAM
TCP/IP
RTS and CTS Control
Measurement change time
Order buffer size
Response waiting time
Minimum time between transmissions
Number of retransmissions
Period for LinkTtest(sec)
% filling queue 1
% dumping queue 2
Delete queue 2
Number for the deactivation due to rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for the reactivation due to rebounces
IOA 1st point simple states (1)
IOA 1st point simple states (2)
IOA 1st point double states
IOA 1st point measurement
IOA 1st point full queue
IOA 1st point semifull queue
IOA 1st point reliability
IOA Reliable time
NUM.Bytes IOA
TCPIP P.
PROCOME PARAM.
Select TCP/IP communications (NO, PROCOME)
ADDRESS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 196
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
APPENDIX VII. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
STATIS. DATA
LAST FAULTS
MEASUREMENTS
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
INPUTS
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS (read)
SETPOINTS (change)
RECLOSER ON/OFF
In the following pages we enclose a table in which the details and available settings in units belonging to the RC family are indicated.
INP. STAT
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(3 and 4)
(5 y 6)
(7 and 8)
(9 and 10)
(11)
See page 4
See page 4
See page 4
See page 6
See page 15
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output11
Recloser On /Off
KI2 P(A)
KI2 P(B)
KI2 P(C)
FAULT n
SECONDARY MEASUR
PRIMARY MEASURES
AUXIL. MEASURES
TOT REC
FIRS REC
SECO REC
THIR REC
FOUR REC
OPEN No.
TYPE
Fau Ph A
Fau Ph.B
Fau Ph.C
Faul GND
START T
END T
LedReset
Pha.A (A)
Pha.C (A)
GND (A)
V (V)
MAX. (A)
(%) NEG SEQ
Pha.A (A)
Pha.C (A)
GND (A)
V (V)
MAX. (A)
Vsup 3, 3V
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
Phase A current.
Phase C current
Neutral current
Voltage
Maximum average current in an interval t
Reverse component (%)
Phase A current.
Phase C current
Neutral current
Voltage
Maximum average current in an interval t
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Total number of reclosures.
Number of first reclosures.
Number of second reclosures.
Number of third reclosures.
Number of fourth reclosures.
Total number of trips given by the protection.
KI2 sum for maintenance, phase A
KI2 sum for maintenance, phase B
KI2 sum for maintenance, phase C
Phase/s involved in the last fault.
Phase A current when the fault occurred (S).
Phase B current when the fault occurred (S).
Phase C current when the fault occurred (S).).
Neutral current when the fault occurred (S)
Fault start date and time.
Fault end date and time.
Fault acknowledgement to switch off the Led.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 197
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (see)
SETPOINTS (see)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 1 (see) RECLOS RECLOSER. ON/OFF
RECLOSE
DIVERSE TIMES
CYCLE CONTROL
TRIP ENABLE
RECLOSE ENABLE
RECLOS SEQ.COORD
RECLOSER BLOCK.C.
PROTECT
PHASES IOC
GROUND TOC
S.GND TOC
PHASES TOC
GROUND TOC
S.GND TOC
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
Phase TOC
Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground TOC
Phase IOC (low level)
Ground IOC (low level)
Sensitive Ground IOC
Af.REC.1
Af.REC.2
Af.REC.3
Af.REC.4
Af.M.CL
Af.P.TOC
Af.G.TOC
Af.IOC F
Af.G.IOC
Af.EXT.P
ENABLED
RECLO.ON
T. RE1, P
T. RE1,T
T. RE2,P
T. RE2,T
T. RE3,P
T. RE3,T
T. RE4,P
T. RE4,T
WAIT.Vref
S.P.F.T
S.G.F.T
S.M.CL.T
RECL.NUM
AT REST
Recloser in service/out of service.
1st closure time for phase to phase faults.
1st closure time for phase to earth faults.
2nd closure time for phase to phase faults.
2nd closure time for phase to earth faults.
3rd closure time for phase to phase faults.
3rd closure time for phase to earth faults.
4th closure time for phase to phase faults.
4th closure time for phase to earth faults.
Voltage reference waiting time.
Reclaim time for faults.
Reclaim time for GND.
Security time after manual closing.
No. of closures allowed.
Trip permission at rest
Trips allowed after first reclosure.
Trips allowed after second reclosure.
Trips allowed after third reclosure.
Trips allowed after fourth reclosure.
Trips allowed after manual closure.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to phase toc.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to neutral toc.
Allowed recl. after tripping due to phase ioc
Allowed recl. after tripping due to neutral ioc.
Sequence coordination
Recloser locking conditions.
198
SETPOINTS (see)
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
TABLE 1 (see)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 3 (see)
TABLE 4 (see)
BREAKER
OCR
OPERAT
SAME AS TABLE 1
SAME AS TABLE 1
SAME AS TABLE 1
S.GND DF T.U.
PHASE DF INST
GND DF INST
S.GND DF INST
DF GENERAL
EX.TR.N.
WI.TR.N
AlarmKI2
Init KI2
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
PHASE DF T.U.
GND DF T.U.
EXTING.CURRENT
RESTRAIN HARM.2
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
Vvp LEV.
FAU.M.T.
V.TIME
L.TIME
Vva LEV.
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
THRESH %
R.T.R.S.
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
SNEU.CUR
PHS.ENAB
GND.ENAB
THRESH %
P.MIN.C.
G.MIN.C.
Excessive number of trips.
Time for counting excessive number of trips
KI2 sum alarm for maintenance.
Initial KI2 sum(settings).
Trip circuit monitoring enable.
Close circuit monitoring enable.
Enable time phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable instantaneous phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Voltage presence level
Fault memory time
Restoration voltage presence minimum time
Light signal restoration time
Voltage ausence level
Voltage presence/ausence threshold (%)
Restore Time of Remote control Signal (sec)
Phases extinguish current
Neutral extinguish current
Sensitive neutral extinguish current
Phases enable
Neutral enable
I2f/If threshold (%)
Phase minimum current
Neutral minimum current
Trip locking.
Open failure time
Close failure time
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 199
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (see)
TABLE 0 (see) CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PH.RATIO
GNDRATIO
VOL. RAT
NOMINALVOLATAGE
SPRING SLACKS
LANGUAGE
PHS.CUR. S.LIMIT
NEUT.CUR S.LIMIT
FAULT.M.
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
FEEDING SUPERVI.
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
CONFIG. GESTEL
(If Gestel programmed)
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTRL. SEN.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
Chan. Typ
AC.POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Dir.log.
Prio.Al.
P.A.Arr.
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase current transformatio ratio
Ground current transformatio ratio.
Voltage transformation ratio
Nominal voltage
Spring slacks
Spanish/English
Programmable phase current measurements scale limit
Programmable neutral current measurements scale limit
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
Enable feeding supervision
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (even) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (even) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS Control
LCU address for Gestel communications
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (even) yes or no.
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Remote station logical direction
Remote station alarm priority
Remote station alarm priority when picking up
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 200
REAR PORT
(If SAP20 programmed
REAR PORT
CONFIG. PID1
(if PID1 programmed)
PORT COM2
(If DNP)
(If 101 programmed)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
T.ac.Sil
P.G.Cam.
D.Sen.F.
T.c.Sen.
P.Sincr.
LCU ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
TYPE OF PARITY
STOP ITS
FIXED RTS
RTS AND CTS CTRL
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)
STABIL TIME . (csec)
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)
LINK ACK.
AP. MESS BYTE N.
T.CHANGES
T.FROZEN
STATUS SEND
MEAS. BITS NUM.
COUNT. BITS NUM.
NON REQUEST. MESS.
PREV.CONFLICT
FIXED COL. TIME (csec)
VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)
T.RESEND
N.MAX.NO REQUEST.
SPECIAL
MEASURES FORMAT
T.POSTTR
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
CTS
AC. POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Reb. De. N
Reb. Ac. T.
R. reac. .
ADDRESS
APPL. ADDR
BALANCED
Tipo Can
BAUDRATE
PARITY
STOP BIT.
POR.W.T.
RTS T.A.
T.DE.RTS
CTS W.T.
CD DEA.T.
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Line silence activation time (sec.)
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signalchange time
Synchronsm permission
LCU address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate for DNP communications
Parity for DNP communications
Stop bits for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
Stabilization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
Synchronization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge for DNP communications
N. bytes of application messages for DNP
Changes sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurements format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested message sending for DNP
Conflict prev. for DNP communications
Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
Variable conflict time for DNP
Non requested messages resend time for DNP
Max. non requested messages number for DNP
Special for DNP communications
Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
Posttransmssion time
UCL Address for communications SAP20
Baud rate in the SAP20 communication
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Carrier activation time (Hundredths of seconds)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Number for deactivation by rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for reactivation by rebounces
Remote address for 101 communications
Application address for 101 communications
Balanced mode
Channel type, connection
Baud rate in the 101 communication
Parity in the 101 communication
STOP BIT in the 101 communication
Carrier time
RTS activation time
RTS deactivation time
CTS waiting time
TCD activation time
201
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
SETPOINTS(change)
Enter KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS(change)
TCP/IP
DATE/ TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1 (change)
SETPOINTS(change) TABLE 1 (change) RECLOSER
SEE COM TCPIP
SEE PAR TCPIP
TABLE 1 ?
TABLE 2 ?
TABLE 3?
TABLE 4?
PROTECTION
TRANS T.
MEA.CH.T
ORD BUFF.
RESP W.T.
TR. MIN. T.
RETRAN.T
FIAB.TIM
QEUE1.F
QEUE1.D
QEUE2.ER
Reb.De.N
Reb.Ac.T
R.Reac.N
STA1 IOA
STA2 IOA
DSTA IOA
MEAS.IOA
FU.Q IOA
MF.Q IOA
FIAB IOA
FI.H.IOA
IOA BY.N
Transmission time
Measurement change time
Order buffer size
Response waiting time
Minimum time between transmissions
Number of retransmissions
Period for LinkTtest(sec)
% filling queue 1
% dumping queue 2
Delete queue 2
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
TIME DIAL
FIX TIME
BLOCKING
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
S.GND TOC
PHASES IOC
GROUND TOC
S.GND TOC
PHASE TOC
GND TOC
Number for the deactivation due to rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for the reactivation due to rebounces
IOA 1st point simple states (1)
IOA 1st point simple states (2)
IOA 1st point double states
IOA 1st point measurement
IOA 1st point full queue
IOA 1st point semifull queue
IOA 1st point reliability
IOA Reliable time
NUM.Bytes IOA
TCPIP P. -> See TCP/IP communications (NO, PROCOME)
PROCOME PARAM. -> ADDRESS
Make table 1 active
Make table 2 active
Make table 3 active
Make table 4 active
Phases time
Ground time
Residual current time
Sensitive Ground TOC
Phase instantaneous (low level)
Ground instantaneous (low level)
Sensitive Ground IOC
RECLOSER. ON/OFF RECLO.ON Recloser on/off
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 202
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
SETPOINTS(change)
TABLE 1 (change) BREAKER
OCR
RECLOS. TIME
DIVERSE TIMES
CYCLE CONTROL
TRIP ENABLE
RECLOSE ENABLE
RECLOS SEQ.CORD
RECLOSER BLOCK.C.
Af.REC.3
Af.REC.4
Af.M.CL
Af.P.TOC
Af.G.TOC
Tr.IOC F
Af.G.IOC
F.H.IOC
F.N. IOC
Af.OP.PH
Af.EXT.P
ENABLED
T. RE1, P
T. RE1,T
T. RE2,P
T. RE2,T
T. RE3,P
T. RE3,T
T. RE4,P
T. RE4,T
WAIT.Vref
S.P.F.T
S.G.F.T
S.M.CL.T
RECL.NUM
AT REST
Af.REC.1
Af.REC.2
Recloser 1st for faults among phases
Recloser 1st for faults to ground
Recloser 2nd for faults among phases
Recloser 2nd for faults to ground
Recloser 3rd for faults among phases
Recloser 3rd for faults to ground
Recloser 4th for faults among phases
Recloser 4th for faults to ground
Reference voltage waiting time
Security time for faults
Security time for GND.
Security time after manual close.
Number of permitted reclosers.
Permitted trips at rest
Permitted trips after first recloser
Permitted trips after second recloser
Permitted trips after third recloser
Permitted trips after fourth recloser.
Permitted trips after manual close.
Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase toc.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to neutral toc.
Allowed reclo. after fter tripping due to phase ioc
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to neutral ioc.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to High phases instant.
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to High neutral instant
Allowed reclo. after tripping due to Broken Conductor
Allowed reclo. after external actuation
Sequence coordination
Recloser locking conditions.
EX.TR.N.
WI.TR.N
AlarmKI2
Init KI2
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
PHASE DF T.U.
GND DF T.U.
S.GND DF T.U.
PHASE DF INST
GND DF INST
S.GND DF INST
DF GENERAL
EXTING.CURRENT
RESTRAIN HARM.2
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
Excessive number of trips.
Time due to excessive number of trips.
Alarm sigma KI2 for maintenance
Initial sigma KI2(setting).
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Enable time phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable time sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Enable instantaneous phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Enable instantaneous sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
FIX TIME
Vvp LEV.
FAU.M.T.
V.TIME
L.TIME
Vva LEV.
THRESH %
Additional timing
Voltage presence level
Fault memory time
Restoration voltage presence minimum time
Light signal restoration time
Voltage ausence level
Voltage presence/ausence threshold (%)
R.T.R.S.
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
SNEU.CUR
Restore Time of Remote control Signal (sec)
Phases extinguish current
Neutral extinguish current
Sensitive neutral extinguish current
PHS.ENAB Phases enable
GND.ENAB Neutral enable
THRESH % I2f/If threshold (%)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 203
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
SETPOINTS(change)
SETPOINTS(change)
TABLE 0
(change)
TABLE 0
(change)
TABLE 2 (see)
TABLE 3 (see)
TABLE 4 (see)
OPERAT
SAME AS TABLE 1
SAME AS TABLE 1
SAME AS TABLE 1
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
P.MIN.C.
G.MIN.C.
Phase minimum current
Neutral minimum current
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL.
SPECIAL
Enter keyword
↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
ACTIV.TI
LEDs
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 11
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
PH.RATIO
GND RATIO
R.T.SGND
LANGUAGE
PHS.CUR. S.LIMIT PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR S.LIMIT NEUT.CUR
FAULT MEASURE
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
CAL SET
DELETES?
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS CONFIG. GESTEL
(If Gestel programmed)
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan. Typ
AC.POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Dir.log.
Prio.Al.
P.A.Arr.
CONFIG. PID1
(if PID1 programmed)
INPUT1- INPUT 8
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
T.ac.Sil
P.G.Cam.
8 input configuration
Input filter
11 output configuration (function and type)
Conf. of the 7 program. leds (function and type)
Phase current transformatio ratio
Ground current transformatio ratio.
Sensistive ground current transformatio ratio.
Spanish/English
Programmable phase current measurements scale limit
Programmable neutral current measurements scale limit
Primary/Secondary
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
For exclusive use of INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION SA
Reset the events, faults and oscillo queues
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (even) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (even) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
LCU address for Gestel communications
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (even) yes or no.
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Remote station logical direction
Remote station alarm priority
Remote station alarm priority when picking up
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Line silence activation time (sec.)
Change general request
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 204
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
CTS
AC. POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Reb. De. N
Reb. Ac. T.
R. reac. .
ADDRESS
APPL. ADDR
BALANCED
Tipo Can
BAUDRATE
PARITY
STOP BIT.
POR.W.T.
RTS T.A.
T.DE.RTS
CTS W.T.
CD DEA.T.
TRANS T.
RTS+CTS
MEA.CH.T
ORD BUFF.
D.Sen.F.
T.c.Sen.
P.Sincr.
LCU ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
TYPE OF PARITY
STOP ITS
FIXED RTS
RTS AND CTS CTRL
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)
STABIL TIME . (csec)
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)
LINK ACK.
AP. MESS BYTE N.
T.CHANGES
T.FROZEN
STATUS SEND
MEAS. BITS NUM.
COUNT. BITS NUM.
NON REQUEST. MESS.
PREV.CONFLICT
FIXED COL. TIME (csec)
VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)
T.RESEND
N.MAX.NO REQUEST.
SPECIAL
MEASURES FORMAT
T.POSTTR
REAR PORT
(If SAP20 programmed)
REAR PORT
(If 101 programmed)
PORT COM2
(If DNP)
Reliability signal address
Reliability signalchange time
Synchronsm permission
LCU address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate for DNP communications
Parity for DNP communications
Stop bits for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
Stabilization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
Synchronization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge for DNP communications
N. bytes of application messages for DNP
Changes sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurements format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested message sending for DNP
Conflict prev. for DNP communications
Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
Variable conflict time for DNP
Non requested messages resend time for DNP
Max. non requested messages number for DNP
Special for DNP communications
Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
Posttransmssion time
LCU address for SAP20 communications
Baud rate in the SAP20 communication
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Carrier activation time (Hundredths of seconds)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Number for deactivation by rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for reactivation by rebounces
Remote address for 101 communications
Application address for 101 communications
Balanced mode
Channel type, connection
Baud rate in the 101 communication
Parity in the 101 communication
STOP BIT in the 101 communication
Carrier time
RTS activation time
RTS deactivation time
CTS waiting time
TCD activation time
Transmission time
RTS and CTS Control
Measurement change time
Order buffer size
205
SETTING
TCP/IP
OPEN=0?
RECLOSE COUNT= 0
?
MAX = 0 ?
KI2(A) ?
KI2(C) ?
6BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RC FAMILY)
RESP W.T.
TR. MIN. T.
RETRAN.T
FIAB.TIM
QEUE1.F
QEUE1.D
QEUE2.ER
Reb.De.N
Reb.Ac.T
R.Reac.N
STA1 IOA
STA2 IOA
DSTA IOA
MEAS.IOA
FU.Q IOA
MF.Q IOA
FIAB IOA
FI.H.IOA
IOA BY.N
TCPIP COM SELEC
PG.TCPIP PARAM
Response waiting time
Minimum time between transmissions
Number of retransmissions
Period for LinkTtest(sec)
% filling queue 1
% dumping queue 2
Delete queue 2
Number for the deactivation due to rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for the reactivation due to rebounces
IOA 1st point simple states (1)
IOA 1st point simple states (2)
IOA 1st point double states
IOA 1st point measurement
IOA 1st point full queue
IOA 1st point semifull queue
IOA 1st point reliability
IOA Reliable time
NUM.Bytes IOA
TCPIP P. -> Select TCP/IP communications (NO, PROCOME)
PROCOME PARAM. -> ADDRESS
Set opening counters to zero
Set reclosure and trip counters to zero
Set maximeter to zero
Initial KI2 sum phase A with its value in the setting
Initial KI2 sum phase C with its value in the setting.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 206
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
APPENDIX VIII. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
MEASURES
STATIS. DATA
In the following pages we enclose a table in which the details and available settings in units belonging to the RS family are indicated.
DATE/TIME (see)
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
DIG. INPU
DIG. OUT
MEASURES
STATIST. DATA
LAST FAULTS
SETPOINTS(read)
INP. STAT
(1 and 2)
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
OUT.STAT.
(3 and 4)
(5 and 6)
(7 and 8)
(9 and 10)
(11)
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
See following pages
Units date and time are visualized.
Present active table
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 1 and 2
Status of inputs 3 and 4
Status of inputs 5 and 6
Status of inputs7 and 8
Status of outputs 1 and 2
Status of outputs 3 and4
Status of outputs 5 and 6
Status of outputs 7 and 8
Status of outputs9 and10
Status of output 11
SECONDARY MEASUR
PRIMARY MEASURES
POWER MEASURES
AUXIL. MEASURES.
OPEN No.
PhaseA (A)
Phase C (A)
Gnd (A)
VA (kV)
VB (kV)
VC (kV)
Phase A (A)
Phase C (A)
Gnd. (A)
VA (kV)
VB (kV)
VC (kV)
ACTUAL P
IDLE POW
APP.POW.
LAG FACT
Vsup 3, 3V
Vbat3, 3V
Extern V
TEMP (ºC)
Current in phase A.
Current in phase fase C.
Current in ground
A phase voltage (kV)
B phase voltage (kV)
C phase voltage (kV)
Current in phase A in the primary
Current in phase fase C in the primary
Current in ground in the primary
A phase voltage (kV)
B phase voltage (kV)
C phase voltage (kV)
Active power (secondary)
Reactive power (secondary)
Apparent power (secondary)
Power factor
Supply internal measurement 3.3V
Battery internal measurement 3.3V
Supply external measurement
Unit temperature (ºC)
Number of total openings by the protection
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 207
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
SETPOINTS
(see)
TABLE 1 (see) SUPERVI. BREAKER
OCR
OPERATION LOGIC
DIRECTIONALITY
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
PHASE DF T.U.
GND DF T.U.
S.GND DF T.U.
PHASE DF INST
GND DF INST
S.GND DF INST
DF GENERAL
EXTING.CURRENT
RESTRAIN HARM.2
DF AUTOMAT
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
PHS.DIR.
NEUT.DIR
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Enable time phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Torque Control
Enable time neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Torque Control
Enable time sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Torque Control
Enable instantaneous phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Torque Control
Enable instantaneous neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Torque Control
Enable instantaneous sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Torque Control
Voltage presence level
Fault memory time
Restoration voltage presence minimum time
Light signal restoration time
Voltage ausence level
Voltage presence/ausence threshold (%)
Restore Time of Remote control Signal (sec)
Phases extinguish current
Neutral extinguish current
Sensitive neutral extinguish current
Phases enable
Neutral enable
I2f/If threshold (%)
Phase minimum current
Neutral minimum current
Recloser number
Time T1 (sec.)
Time T2 (sec.)
Time T3 (sec.)
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
Phase direction criteria
Phase angle (degrees)
Polarization voltage(V)
Phase zone width (degrees)
Trip permission without Vpol
Neutral direction criteria
Neutral angle (degrees)
ENABLED
R.T.R.S.
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
SNEU.CUR
PHS.ENAB
GND.ENAB
THRESH %
P.MIN.C.
G.MIN.C.
RECL.N.
T1 TIME
T2 TIME
T3 TIME
P.D.CRIT
PHS.ANGL
PICKUP
FIX TIME
TORQUE C.
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
TORQUE C.
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
TORQUE C.
Vvp LEV.
FAU.M.T.
V.TIME
L.TIME
Vva LEV.
THRESH %
POL.V
PHS.Z.R
TRIP PER.
N.D.CRIT
GND ANGL
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
TORQUE C.
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
TORQUE C.
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
TORQUE C.
208
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
SETPOINTS
(see)
TABLE 0
(see)
TABLE 2 (see) AS TABLE 1
TABLE 3 (see) AS TABLE 1
TABLE 4 (see) AS TABLE 1
GND Z.R.
MIN.VN T
Neutral zone width (degrees)
Vn minimun threshold
CONFIGURAT I/O. CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
GENERAL PH. RATIO
GND RATIO
VOL. RAT
NOMINALVOLTAGE
TIME UNKNOWN 52
SLACK SPRINGS
LANGUAGE
CORRECT. FACTOR
BUSHING CAPACIT.
SPECIAL
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
LAMP
ANGLE C.
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
EN.BUTT.
FEEDING SUPERVI
CONFIG.COMMUNIC. SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome programmed)
BACK
(if Gestel)
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 6
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
TIME UNKNOWN 52
VA FACT
VB FACT
VC FACT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Dir.log.
Prio.Al.
P.A.Arr.
8 input configuration
Input filter
6 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase current transformation ratio
Neutral current transformation ratio
Voltage transformation ratio
Nominal voltage
Timing of the unknown state 52
Spring slacks
Spanish/English
Phase A voltaje correction factor for bushing
Phase B voltaje correction factor for bushing
Phase C voltaje correction factor for bushing
Bushing capacity
Programmable phase current measurements scale limit
Programmable neutral current measurements scale limit
Lamp correction
Angle correction
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
Enable pushbuttons
Enable feeding supervision
Procome, DNP, MODBUS,103
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Remote station logical direction
Remote station alarm priority
Remote station alarm priority when picking up
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 209
REAR PORT
(If SAP20 programmed
REAR PORT
(If 101 programmed)
CONFIG. PID1
(if PID1 programmed)
PORT COM2
(If DNP)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Reb. Ac. T.
R. reac. .
ADDRESS
APPL. ADDR
BALANCED
Tipo Can
BAUDRATE
PARITY
STOP BIT.
POR.W.T.
RTS T.A.
T.DE.RTS
CTS W.T.
CD DEA.T.
NON REQUEST. MESS.
PREV.CONFLICT
FIXED COL. TIME (csec)
VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)
T.RESEND
N.MAX.NO REQUEST.
SPECIAL
MEASURES FORMAT
T.POSTTR
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
CTS
AC. POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Reb. De. N
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
T.ac.Sil
P.G.Cam.
D.Sen.F.
T.c.Sen.
P.Sincr.
LCU ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
TYPE OF PARITY
STOP ITS
FIXED RTS
RTS AND CTS CTRL
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)
STABIL TIME . (csec)
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)
LINK ACK.
AP. MESS BYTE N.
T.CHANGES
T.FROZEN
STATUS SEND
MEAS. BITS NUM.
COUNT. BITS NUM.
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Line silence activation time (sec.)
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signalchange time
Synchronsm permission
LCU address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate for DNP communications
Parity for DNP communications
Stop bits for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
Stabilization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
Synchronization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge for DNP communications
N. bytes of application messages for DNP
Changes sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurements format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested message sending for DNP
Conflict prev. for DNP communications
Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
Variable conflict time for DNP
Non requested messages resend time for DNP
Max. non requested messages number for DNP
Special for DNP communications
Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
Posttransmssion time
UCL Address for communications SAP20
Baud rate in the SAP20 communication
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Carrier activation time (Hundredths of seconds)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Number for deactivation by rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for reactivation by rebounces
Remote address for 101 communications
Application address for 101 communications
Balanced mode
Channel type, connection
Baud rate in the 101 communication
Parity in the 101 communication
STOP BIT in the 101 communication
Carrier time
RTS activation time
RTS deactivation time
CTS waiting time
TCD activation time
210
Enter KEYWORD
↑↑↓↓
SETPOINTS(change)
SETPOINTS(change)
TCP/IP
EN.ISOL.SW.AUT
DATE/ TIME (change)
ACTIVATE TABLE
TABLE 1 (change)
OCR
TABLE 1 ?
TABLE 2 ?
TABLE 3?
TABLE 4?
SUPERVI. BREAKER
TRANS T.
RTS+CTS
MEA.CH.T
ORD BUFF.
RESP W.T.
TR. MIN. T.
RETRAN.T
FIAB.TIM
QEUE1.F
QEUE1.D
QEUE2.ER
Reb.De.N
Reb.Ac.T
R.Reac.N
STA1 IOA
STA2 IOA
DSTA IOA
MEAS.IOA
FU.Q IOA
MF.Q IOA
FIAB IOA
FI.H.IOA
IOA BY.N
SEE COM TCPIP
SEE PAR TCPIP
AUT.ENAB
E.T.C.SV
E.C.C.SV
PHASE DF T.U.
GND DF T.U.
S.GND DF T.U.
PHASE DF INST
GND DF INST
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
TORQUE C
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
TORQUE C
ENABLED
PICKUP
CURVE
INDEX
FIX TIME
TORQUE C
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
TORQUE C
ENABLED
PICKUP
Transmission time
RTS and CTS control
Measurement change time
Order buffer size
Response waiting time
Minimum time between transmissions
Number of retransmissions
Period for LinkTtest(sec)
% filling queue 1
% dumping queue 2
Delete queue 2
Number for the deactivation due to rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for the reactivation due to rebounces
IOA 1st point simple states (1)
IOA 1st point simple states (2)
IOA 1st point double states
IOA 1st point measurement
IOA 1st point full queue
IOA 1st point semifull queue
IOA 1st point reliability
IOA Reliable time
NUM.Bytes IOA
TCPIP P. -> See TCP/IP communications (NO, PROCOME)
PROCOME PARAM. -> ADDRESS
Mode 1 / Mode 2
Make table 1 active
Make table 2 active
Make table 3 active
Make table 4 active
Enable trip circuit surveillance
Enable close circuit surveillance
Enable time phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Torque Control
Enable time neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Torque Control
Enable time sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Curves
Index
Additional timing (s)
Torque Control
Enable instantaneous phase fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Torque Control
Enable instantaneous neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 211
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
SETPOINTS (change)
TABLE 0 (change) CONFIGURAT I/O.
GENERAL
TABLE 2 (change)
TABLE 3 (change)
TABLE 4 (change)
OPERATION LOGIC
DIRECTIONALITY
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
AS TABLE 1
CONFIG. INPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LEDs
PH. RATIO
GND RATIO
VOL. RAT
NOMINALVOLTAGE
TIME UNKNOWN 52
SLACK SPRINGS
LANGUAGE
CORRECT. FACTOR
S.GND DF INST
DF GENERAL
EXTING.CURRENT
RESTRAIN HARM.2
DF AUTOMAT
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T
CLOS FAIL T
PHS.DIR.
NEUT.DIR
FIX TIME
TORQUE C
ENABLED
PICKUP
FIX TIME
TORQUE C
Vvp LEV.
FAU.M.T.
V.TIME
L.TIME
Vva LEV.
THRESH %
R.T.R.S.
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
SNEU.CUR
PHS.ENAB
GND.ENAB
THRESH %
P.MIN.C.
G.MIN.C.
RECL.N.
T1 TIME
T2 TIME
T3 TIME
P.D.CRIT
PHS.ANGL
POL.V
PHS.Z.R
TRIP PER.
N.D.CRIT
GND ANGL
GND Z.R.
MIN.VN T
Additional timing
Torque Control
Enable instantaneous sensitive neutral fault passover detection
Pick up current
Additional timing
Torque Control
Voltage presence level
Fault memory time
Restoration voltage presence minimum time
Light signal restoration time
Voltage ausence level
Voltage presence/ausence threshold (%)
Restore Time of Remote control Signal (sec)
Phases extinguish current
Neutral extinguish current
Sensitive neutral extinguish current
Phases enable
Neutral enable
I2f/If threshold (%)
Phase minimum current
Neutral minimum current
Recloser number
Time T1 (sec.)
Time T2 (sec.)
Time T3 (sec.)
Trip latch
Open failure time
Close failure time
Phase direction criteria
Phase angle (degrees)
Polarization voltage(V)
Phase zone width (degrees)
Trip permission without Vpol
Neutral direction criteria
Neutral angle (degrees)
Neutral zone width (degrees)
Vn minimun threshold
INPUT1- INPUT 8
SELECT NO/NC
INPUTS ACTIV.TI
OUTPUT1- OUTPUT 6
OUTPUTS ACTIV.TI
LED 1 to LED 7
TIME UNKNOWN 52
VA FACT
VB FACT
VC FACT
8 input configuration
Input filter
6 output configuration (function and type)
Configuration of the 7 programmable leds (function and type)
Phase current transformation ratio
Neutral current transformation ratio
Voltage transformation ratio
Nominal voltage
Timing of the unknown state 52
Slacks spring
Spanish/English
Phase A voltaje correction factor for bushing
Phase B voltaje correction factor for bushing
Phase C voltaje correction factor for bushing
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 212
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
SETPOINTS
(change)
SPECIAL
Enter keyword ↑↓↵↵
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
TABLE 0
(change)
CONFIG.COMMUNIC.
(If DNP)
BACK
(if PID1)
PORT COM2
BUSHING CAPACIT.
PHS.CUR.
NEUT.CUR
LAMP CORRECT.
ANGLE CORRECT.
PH ORDER
FREQUEN.
BACK
(if Gestel)
CAL SET
DELETE?
SELECT B COMMS
FRONT
BACK
(if Procome)
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
T.ac.Sil
P.G.Cam.
D.Sen.F.
T.c.Sen.
P.Sincr.
LCU ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
TYPE OF PARITY
STOP ITS
FIXED RTS
RTS AND CTS CTRL
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec)
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec)
STABIL TIME . (csec)
LAMP
ANGLE C.
STOP BIT
CTROL SIG
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
CTS
Chan.Typ
AC.POR.T
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Dir.log.
Prio.Al.
P.A.Arr.
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
STOP BIT
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
Bushing capacity
Programmable phase current measurements scale limit
Programmable neutral current measurements scale limit
Lamp correction
Angle correction
A-B-C / C-B-A
50 / 60 Hz
For exclusive use of INGETEAM Technology SA
Resets the event, fault, osillograph queues
Procome, DNP, MODBUS
Protection address
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
Protection address.
Baud rate (bauds).
Parity (par) yes or no.
Number of STOP BITS
RTS signal
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Remote station logical direction
Remote station alarm priority
Remote station alarm priority when picking up
UCL address for Gestel communications
Baud rate in Gestel communications
Parity Gestel communications
(Hund. Sec.)
Channel type (Normal or RTC/GSM)
Carrier activation time (hund.sec)
(Hund. Sec.)
(Hund. Sec.)
Line silence activation time (sec.)
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signalchange time
Synchronsm permission
LCU address for DNP communications
Master address for DNP communications
Baud rate for DNP communications
Parity for DNP communications
Stop bits for DNP communications
YES/NO
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
Stabilization time for DNP communications
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 213
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec)
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min)
LINK ACK.
AP. MESS BYTE N.
T.CHANGES
T.FROZEN
STATUS SEND
MEAS. BITS NUM.
COUNT. BITS NUM.
NON REQUEST. MESS.
PREV.CONFLICT
FIXED COL. TIME (csec)
VBLE. COL. TIME (csec)
T.RESEND
REAR PORT
(If SAP20 programmed)
REAR PORT
(If 101 programmed) APPL. ADDR
BALANCED
Tipo Can
BAUDRATE
PARITY
STOP BIT.
POR.W.T.
RTS T.A.
T.DE.RTS
CTS W.T.
CD DEA.T.
TRANS T.
RTS+CTS
MEA.CH.T
ORD BUFF.
RESP W.T.
TR. MIN. T.
RETRAN.T
FIAB.TIM
QEUE1.F
QEUE1.D
QEUE2.ER
Reb.De.N
Reb.Ac.T
R.Reac.N
STA1 IOA
N.MAX.NO REQUEST.
SPECIAL
MEASURES FORMAT
T.POSTTR
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
CTS
AC. POR T.
DELTA 1
DELTA 4
Reb. De. N
Reb. Ac. T.
R. reac. .
ADDRESS
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
Synchronization time for DNP communications
Link acknowledge for DNP communications
N. bytes of application messages for DNP
Changes sending time for DNP communications
Counter freezing time for DNP
Status sending for DNP communications
Measurements format for DNP communications
Counter format for DNP communications
Non requested message sending for DNP
Conflict prev. for DNP communications
Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
Variable conflict time for DNP
Non requested messages resend time for DNP
Max. non requested messages number for DNP
Special for DNP communications
Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
Posttransmssion time
LCU address for SAP20 communications
Baud rate in the SAP20 communication
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Carrier activation time (Hundredths of seconds)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
(Hundredths of seconds.)
Number for deactivation by rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for reactivation by rebounces
Remote address for 101 communications
Application address for 101 communications
Balanced mode
Channel type, connection
Baud rate in the 101 communication
Parity in the 101 communication
STOP BIT in the 101 communication
Carrier time
RTS activation time
RTS deactivation time
CTS waiting time
TCD activation time
Transmission time
RTS and CTS Control
Measurement change time
Order buffer size
Response waiting time
Minimum time between transmissions
Number of retransmissions
Period for LinkTtest(sec)
% filling queue 1
% dumping queue 2
Delete queue 2
Number for the deactivation due to rebounces
Rebounce activation time
Number for the reactivation due to rebounces
IOA 1st point simple states (1)
214
SETPOINTS
(change)
COUNTER
SETTING
OPEN=0?
TCP/IP
EN.ISOL.SW.AUT.
STA2 IOA
DSTA IOA
MEAS.IOA
FU.Q IOA
MF.Q IOA
FIAB IOA
FI.H.IOA
IOA BY.N
TCPIP COM SELEC
PG.TCPIP PARAM
AUT.ENAB.
7BKEYBOARD / DISPLAY (BLOCK OF RS FAMILY)
TCPIP P.
PROCOME
PARAM.
IOA 1st point simple states (2)
IOA 1st point double states
IOA 1st point measurement
IOA 1st point full queue
IOA 1st point semifull queue
IOA 1st point reliability
IOA Reliable time
NUM.Bytes IOA
Select TCP/IP communications (NO,
PROCOME)
ADDRESS
Mode1 / Mode 2
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 215
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
APPENDIX IX. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
IX.1. CURVES CEI 255-4 / BS142
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:
Normal Inverse characteristic
Very Inverse characteristic.
Extremely Inverse characteristic.
User curve.
These curves comply with the general formula:
T
:=
M
⋅
I
I
0 k
α
−
1
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1 being:
T: Trip time (sec)
T
DROP
: Drop time (sec)
M: multiplier (“time index”). Valid range from 0.05 to 1.09 in steps of 0.01
I: Measured current
Io: Pickup current setting
K, α, constants which depend on the type of curve
Constant Normal inverse Short
K
α tr
0.14
0.02
9.7
0.05
0.04
0.5
Long inverse Very inverse Extrem. inverse MI Special
120
1
120
13.50
1.00
43.2
80.00
2.00
58.2
2.60
1.00
21.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are another 4.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 216
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Inverse curve
T
:=
M
⋅
I
I
0 k
α
−
1
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
0.95
1.00
1.05
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.17
0.18
0.19
0.65
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
M I/Io
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
K = 0,14,
α = 0,02
Theoretical values given by the formula:
0
0.970
1.067
1.164
1.261
1.358
1.455
0.485
0.582
0.679
0.776
0.873
1.552
1.649
1.746
1.843
1.940
2.425
2.910
3.395
3.880
7.275
7.760
8.245
8.730
9.215
9.700
10.185
4.365
4.850
5.335
5.820
6.305
6.790
1.035
1.138
1.242
1.345
1.449
1.552
0.25
0.517
0.621
0.724
0.828
0.931
1.655
1.759
1.862
1.966
2.069
2.587
3.104
3.621
4.139
7.760
8.277
8.795
9.312
9.829
10.347
10.864
4.656
5.173
5.691
6.208
6.725
7.243
1.293
1.423
1.552
1.681
1.811
1.940
0.5
0.647
0.776
0.905
1.035
1.164
2.069
2.199
2.328
2.457
2.587
3.233
3.880
4.527
5.173
9.700
10.347
10.993
11.640
12.287
12.933
13.580
5.820
6.467
7.113
7.760
8.407
9.053
2.217
2.439
2.661
2.882
3.104
3.326
0.75
1.109
1.330
1.552
1.774
1.995
3.547
3.769
3.991
4.213
4.434
5.543
6.651
7.760
8.869
16.629
17.737
18.846
19.954
21.063
22.171
23.280
9.977
11.086
12.194
13.303
14.411
15.520
14.340
15.774
17.208
18.642
20.076
21.510
1.05
7.170
8.604
10.038
11.472
12.906
22.944
24.378
25.812
27.246
28.680
35.850
43.021
50.191
57.361
107.551
114.721
121.891
129.062
136.232
143.402
150.572
64.531
71.701
78.871
86.041
93.211
100.381
7.337
8.071
8.805
9.539
10.272
11.006
1.10
3.669
4.402
5.136
5.870
6.604
11.740
12.474
13.207
13.941
14.675
18.344
22.012
25.681
29.350
55.031
58.700
62.368
66.037
69.706
73.374
77.043
33.018
36.687
40.356
44.025
47.693
51.362
tr = 9.7
1.003
1.103
1.203
1.304
1.404
1.504
2.00
0.501
0.602
0.702
0.802
0.903
1.605
1.705
1.805
1.906
2.006
2.507
3.009
3.510
4.012
7.522
8.023
8.525
9.026
9.528
10.029
10.530
4.513
5.015
5.516
6.017
6.519
7.020
1.719
1.891
2.063
2.235
2.407
2.579
1.50
0.860
1.032
1.204
1.376
1.547
2.751
2.923
3.095
3.267
3.439
4.299
5.158
6.018
6.878
12.896
13.755
14.615
15.475
16.335
17.194
18.054
7.737
8.597
9.457
10.317
11.176
12.036
2.661
2.927
3.193
3.459
3.725
3.992
1.30
1.331
1.597
1.863
2.129
2.395
4.258
4.524
4.790
5.056
5.322
6.653
7.983
9.314
10.644
19.958
21.288
22.619
23.949
25.280
26.611
27.941
11.975
13.305
14.636
15.966
17.297
18.627
3.832
4.216
4.599
4.982
5.365
5.749
1.20
1.916
2.299
2.683
3.066
3.449
6.132
6.515
6.898
7.282
7.665
9.581
11.497
13.413
15.329
28.743
30.659
32.575
34.491
36.408
38.324
40.240
17.246
19.162
21.078
22.994
24.910
26.827
0.757
0.833
0.908
0.984
1.060
1.135
2.50
0.378
0.454
0.530
0.606
0.681
1.211
1.287
1.363
1.438
1.514
1.892
2.271
2.649
3.028
5.677
6.056
6.434
6.813
7.191
7.570
7.948
3.406
3.785
4.163
4.542
4.920
5.299
0.630
0.693
0.756
0.819
0.882
0.945
3.00
0.315
0.378
0.441
0.504
0.567
1.008
1.071
1.134
1.197
1.260
1.575
1.891
2.206
2.521
4.726
5.042
5.357
5.672
5.987
6.302
6.617
2.836
3.151
3.466
3.781
4.096
4.411
0.428
0.471
0.514
0.556
0.599
0.642
5.00
0.214
0.257
0.300
0.342
0.385
0.685
0.728
0.770
0.813
0.856
1.070
1.284
1.498
1.712
3.210
3.424
3.638
3.852
4.066
4.280
4.494
1.926
2.140
2.354
2.568
2.782
2.996
0.227
0.249
0.272
0.295
0.317
0.340
20.00
0.113
0.136
0.159
0.181
0.204
0.363
0.385
0.408
0.431
0.453
0.567
0.680
0.794
0.907
1.701
1.814
1.927
2.041
2.154
2.267
2.381
1.020
1.134
1.247
1.360
1.474
1.587
0.297
0.327
0.356
0.386
0.416
0.446
10.00
0.149
0.178
0.208
0.238
0.267
0.475
0.505
0.535
0.564
0.594
0.743
0.891
1.040
1.188
2.228
2.376
2.525
2.674
2.822
2.971
3.119
1.337
1.485
1.634
1.782
1.931
2.079
0.183
0.201
0.219
0.238
0.256
0.274
40.00
0.091
0.110
0.128
0.146
0.165
0.293
0.311
0.329
0.347
0.366
0.457
0.549
0.640
0.731
1.371
1.463
1.554
1.646
1.737
1.828
1.920
0.823
0.914
1.006
1.097
1.188
1.280
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 217
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
INVERSE CHARACTERISTIC
218
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Long duration curve (IEC)
T
:=
M
⋅
I
I
0 k
α
−
1
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
K = 120,
α = 1
Theoretical values given by the formula:
tr = 120
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.25
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.17
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.11
0.12
M I/Io
0
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.25 0.50 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50
21.760
23.040
24.320
25.600
32.000
38.400
44.800
51.200
57.600
64.000
70.400
14.080
15.360
16.640
17.920
19.200
20.480
6.400
7.680
8.960
10.240
11.520
12.800
27.200
28.800
30.400
32.000
40.000
48.000
56.000
64.000
72.000
80.000
88.000
17.600
19.200
20.800
22.400
24.000
25.600
8.000
9.600
11.200
12.800
14.400
16.000
20.400
21.600
22.800
24.000
30.000
36.000
42.000
48.000
54.000
60.000
66.000
13.200
14.400
15.600
16.800
18.000
19.200
6.000
7.200
8.400
9.600
10.800
12.000
13.714
16.457
19.200
21.943
24.686
27.429
30.171
32.914
35.657
38.400
41.143
43.886
46.629
49.371
52.114
54.857
68.571
82.286
120.000 60.000
144.000 72.000
168.000 84.000
192.000 96.000
30.000
36.000
42.000
48.000
216.000 108.000 54.000
240.000 120.000 60.000
264.000 132.000 66.000
288.000 144.000 72.000
312.000 156.000 78.000
336.000 168.000 84.000
360.000 180.000 90.000
384.000 192.000 96.000
20.000
24.000
28.000
32.000
36.000
40.000
44.000
48.000
52.000
56.000
60.000
64.000
408.000 204.000 102.000 68.000
432.000 216.000 108.000 72.000
456.000 228.000 114.000 76.000
480.001 240.000 120.000 80.000
12.000
14.400
16.800
19.200
21.600
24.000
26.400
28.800
31.200
33.600
36.000
38.400
40.800
43.200
45.600
48.000
600.001 300.000 150.000 100.000 60.000
720.001 360.000 180.000 120.000 72.000
96.000 840.001 420.000 210.000 140.000 84.000
109.714 960.001 480.000 240.000 160.000 96.000
13.200
14.400
15.600
16.800
18.000
19.200
6.000
7.200
8.400
9.600
10.800
12.000
20.400
21.600
22.800
24.000
30.000
36.000
42.000
48.000
123.429 1080.001 540.000 270.000 180.000 108.000 54.000
137.143 1200.001 600.000 300.000 200.000 120.000 60.000
150.857 1320.001 660.000 330.000 220.000 132.000 66.000
72.000
78.000
84.000
90.000
96.000
76.800
83.200
89.600
96.000 164.571 1440.002 720.000 360.000 240.000 144.000 72.000
104.000 178.286 1560.002 780.000 390.000 260.000 156.000 78.000
112.000 192.000 1680.002 840.000 420.000 280.000 168.000 84.000
96.000 120.000 205.714 1800.002 900.000 450.000 300.000 180.000 90.000
102.400 128.000 219.429 1920.002 960.000 480.000 320.000 192.000 96.000
48.000
52.000
56.000
60.000
64.000
102.000 108.800 136.000 233.143 2040.002 1020.000 510.000 340.000 204.000 102.000 68.000
108.000 115.200 144.000 246.857 2160.002 1080.000 540.000 360.000 216.000 108.000 72.000
114.000 121.600 152.000 260.571 2280.003 1140.000 570.000 380.000 228.000 114.000 76.000
120.000 128.000 160.000 274.286 2400.003 1200.000 600.000 400.000 240.000 120.000 80.000
126.000 134.400 168.000 288.000 2520.003 1260.000 630.000 420.000 252.000 126.000 84.000
13.600
14.400
15.200
16.000
20.000
24.000
28.000
32.000
36.000
40.000
44.000
8.800
9.600
10.400
11.200
12.000
12.800
4.000
4.800
5.600
6.400
7.200
8.000
5.00
5.100
5.400
5.700
6.000
7.500
9.000
10.500
12.000
13.500
15.000
16.500
3.300
3.600
3.900
4.200
4.500
4.800
1.500
1.800
2.100
2.400
2.700
3.000
18.000
19.500
21.000
22.500
24.000
25.500
27.000
28.500
30.000
31.500
3.00
10.200
10.800
11.400
12.000
15.000
18.000
21.000
24.000
27.000
30.000
33.000
6.600
7.200
7.800
8.400
9.000
9.600
3.000
3.600
4.200
4.800
5.400
6.000
36.000
39.000
42.000
45.000
48.000
51.000
54.000
57.000
60.000
63.000
20.00
1.074
1.137
1.200
1.263
1.579
1.895
2.211
2.526
2.842
3.158
3.474
0.695
0.758
0.821
0.884
0.947
1.011
0.316
0.379
0.442
0.505
0.568
0.632
5.368
5.684
6.000
6.316
6.632
3.789
4.105
4.421
4.737
5.053
10.00
2.267
2.400
2.533
2.667
3.333
4.000
4.667
5.333
6.000
6.667
7.333
1.467
1.600
1.733
1.867
2.000
2.133
0.667
0.800
0.933
1.067
1.200
1.333
8.000
8.667
9.333
10.000
10.667
11.333
12.000
12.667
13.333
14.000
40.00
0.523
0.554
0.585
0.615
0.769
0.923
1.077
1.231
1.385
1.538
1.692
0.338
0.369
0.400
0.431
0.462
0.492
0.154
0.185
0.215
0.246
0.277
0.308
2.615
2.769
2.923
3.077
3.231
1.846
2.000
2.154
2.308
2.462
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 219
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
LONG DURATION INVERSE
220
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Short duration curve IEC
T
:=
M
⋅
I
I
0 k
α
−
1
K = 0.05,
α = 0.04
Theoretical values given by the formula:
0.059
0.064
0.069
0.075
0.080
0.085
0.091
0.096
0.101
0.25
0.027
0.032
0.037
0.043
0.048
0.053
0.107
0.133
0.160
0.187
0.213
0.240
0.267
0.293
0.320
0.347
0.373
0.400
0.427
0.453
0.480
0.507
0.533
0.560
0.055
0.060
0.065
0.070
0.075
0.080
0.085
0.090
0.095
0
0.025
0.030
0.035
0.040
0.045
0.050
0.100
0.125
0.150
0.175
0.200
0.225
0.250
0.275
0.300
0.325
0.350
0.375
0.400
0.425
0.450
0.475
0.500
0.525
0.09
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.15
M I/Io
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.16
0.17
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.126
0.137
0.149
0.160
0.171
0.183
0.194
0.206
0.217
0.75
0.057
0.069
0.080
0.091
0.103
0.114
0.229
0.286
0.343
0.400
0.457
0.514
0.571
0.629
0.686
0.743
0.800
0.857
0.914
0.971
1.029
1.086
1.143
1.200
0.073
0.080
0.087
0.093
0.100
0.107
0.113
0.120
0.127
0.5
0.033
0.040
0.047
0.053
0.060
0.067
0.133
0.167
0.200
0.233
0.267
0.300
0.333
0.367
0.400
0.433
0.467
0.500
0.533
0.567
0.600
0.633
0.667
0.700
2.815
3.071
3.327
3.583
3.839
4.095
4.351
4.607
4.863
1.05
1.280
1.536
1.792
2.048
2.304
2.559
5.119
6.399
7.678
8.958
10.238
11.518
12.797
14.077
15.357
16.637
17.916
19.196
20.476
21.756
23.035
24.315
25.595
26.875
T
DROPOUT
tr = 0.5
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
1.440
1.571
1.702
1.833
1.964
2.094
2.225
2.356
2.487
1.10
0.655
0.785
0.916
1.047
1.178
1.309
2.618
3.273
3.927
4.582
5.236
5.891
6.545
7.200
7.854
8.509
9.163
9.818
10.472
11.127
11.781
12.436
13.090
13.745
1.30
0.237
0.948
1.185
1.422
1.659
1.896
2.133
2.370
2.607
2.844
3.081
3.318
3.555
3.792
4.029
4.265
4.502
4.739
4.976
0.284
0.332
0.379
0.427
0.474
0.521
0.569
0.616
0.664
0.711
0.758
0.806
0.853
0.900
0.751
0.820
0.888
0.956
1.025
1.093
1.161
1.230
1.298
1.20
0.342
0.410
0.478
0.546
0.615
0.683
1.366
1.708
2.049
2.391
2.732
3.074
3.416
3.757
4.099
4.440
4.782
5.123
5.465
5.806
6.148
6.489
6.831
7.173
0.122
0.134
0.145
0.156
0.167
0.178
0.189
0.200
0.211
3.00
0.056
0.067
0.078
0.089
0.100
0.111
0.223
0.278
0.334
0.390
0.445
0.501
0.556
0.612
0.668
0.723
0.779
0.835
0.890
0.946
1.002
1.057
1.113
1.169
0.147
0.161
0.174
0.188
0.201
0.214
0.228
0.241
0.254
2.50
0.067
0.080
0.094
0.107
0.121
0.134
0.268
0.335
0.402
0.469
0.536
0.603
0.670
0.737
0.804
0.871
0.938
1.005
1.071
1.138
1.205
1.272
1.339
1.406
0.196
0.213
0.231
0.249
0.267
0.285
0.302
0.320
0.338
2.00
0.089
0.107
0.124
0.142
0.160
0.178
0.356
0.445
0.534
0.622
0.711
0.800
0.889
0.978
1.067
1.156
1.245
1.334
1.423
1.512
1.601
1.690
1.778
1.867
0.336
0.367
0.398
0.428
0.459
0.489
0.520
0.550
0.581
1.50
0.153
0.183
0.214
0.245
0.275
0.306
0.612
0.764
0.917
1.070
1.223
1.376
1.529
1.682
1.835
1.988
2.141
2.293
2.446
2.599
2.752
2.905
3.058
3.211
0.083
0.090
0.098
0.105
0.113
0.120
0.128
0.135
0.143
5.00
0.038
0.045
0.053
0.060
0.068
0.075
0.150
0.188
0.226
0.263
0.301
0.338
0.376
0.414
0.451
0.489
0.526
0.564
0.602
0.639
0.677
0.714
0.752
0.790
0.043
0.047
0.051
0.055
0.059
0.063
0.067
0.071
0.075
20.00
0.020
0.024
0.027
0.031
0.035
0.039
0.079
0.098
0.118
0.137
0.157
0.177
0.196
0.216
0.236
0.255
0.275
0.295
0.314
0.334
0.353
0.373
0.393
0.412
0.057
0.062
0.067
0.073
0.078
0.083
0.088
0.093
0.098
10.00
0.026
0.031
0.036
0.041
0.047
0.052
0.104
0.130
0.155
0.181
0.207
0.233
0.259
0.285
0.311
0.337
0.363
0.389
0.415
0.441
0.466
0.492
0.518
0.544
0.035
0.038
0.041
0.044
0.047
0.050
0.053
0.057
0.060
40.00
0.016
0.019
0.022
0.025
0.028
0.031
0.063
0.079
0.094
0.110
0.126
0.142
0.157
0.173
0.189
0.204
0.220
0.236
0.252
0.267
0.283
0.299
0.314
0.330
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 221
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
SHORT DURATION INVERSE
222
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Very inverse curve
T
:=
M
⋅
I
I
0 k
α
−
1
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
0
2.160
2.592
3.024
3.456
3.888
4.320
4.752
5.184
5.616
6.048
6.480
6.912
7.344
7.776
8.208
8.640
10.800
12.960
15.120
17.280
19.440
21.600
23.760
25.920
28.080
30.240
32.400
34.560
36.720
38.880
41.040
43.200
45.360
M I/Io
0.05
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.17
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.11
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.75
0.80
K = 13,5,
α = 1
Theoretical values given by the formula:
0.5
2.880
3.456
4.032
4.608
5.184
5.760
6.336
6.912
7.488
8.064
8.640
9.216
9.792
10.368
10.944
11.520
14.400
17.280
20.160
23.040
25.920
28.800
31.680
34.560
37.440
40.320
43.200
46.080
48.960
51.840
54.720
57.600
60.480
0.25
2.304
2.765
3.226
3.686
4.147
4.608
5.069
5.530
5.990
6.451
6.912
7.373
7.834
8.294
8.755
9.216
11.520
13.824
16.128
18.432
20.736
23.040
25.344
27.648
29.952
32.256
34.560
36.864
39.168
41.472
43.776
46.080
48.384
1.05
13.500
16.200
18.900
21.600
24.300
27.000
29.700
32.400
35.100
37.800
40.500
43.200
45.900
48.600
51.300
54.000
67.500
81.000
94.500
108.000
121.500
135.000
148.500
162.000
175.500
189.000
202.500
216.000
229.500
243.000
256.500
270.000
283.500
0.75
4.937
5.925
6.912
7.899
8.887
9.874
10.862
11.849
12.837
13.824
14.811
15.799
16.786
17.774
18.761
19.749
24.686
29.623
34.560
39.497
44.434
49.371
54.309
59.246
64.183
69.120
74.057
78.994
83.931
88.869
93.806
98.743
103.68
tr = 43.2
1.20
3.375
4.050
4.725
5.400
6.075
6.750
7.425
8.100
8.775
9.450
10.125
10.800
11.475
12.150
12.825
13.500
16.875
20.250
23.625
27.000
30.375
33.750
37.125
40.500
43.875
47.250
50.625
54.000
57.375
60.750
64.125
67.500
70.875
1.10
6.750
8.100
9.450
10.800
12.150
13.500
14.850
16.200
17.550
18.900
20.250
21.600
22.950
24.300
25.650
27.000
33.750
40.500
47.250
54.000
60.750
67.500
74.250
81.000
87.750
94.500
101.25
108.00
114.75
121.50
128.25
135.00
141.75
1.30
2.250
2.700
3.150
3.600
4.050
4.500
4.950
5.400
5.850
6.300
6.750
7.200
7.650
8.100
8.550
9.000
11.250
13.500
15.750
18.000
20.250
22.500
24.750
27.000
29.250
31.500
33.750
36.000
38.250
40.500
42.750
45.000
47.250
2.00
0.675
0.810
0.945
1.080
1.215
1.350
1.485
1.620
1.755
1.890
2.025
2.160
2.295
2.430
2.565
2.700
3.375
4.050
4.725
5.400
6.075
6.750
7.425
8.100
8.775
9.450
10.125
10.800
11.475
12.150
12.825
13.500
14.175
1.50
1.350
1.620
1.890
2.160
2.430
2.700
2.970
3.240
3.510
3.780
4.050
4.320
4.590
4.860
5.130
5.400
6.750
8.100
9.450
10.800
12.150
13.500
14.850
16.200
17.550
18.900
20.250
21.600
22.950
24.300
25.650
27.000
28.350
3.00
0.338
0.405
0.472
0.540
0.607
0.675
0.742
0.810
0.877
0.945
1.013
1.080
1.148
1.215
1.283
1.350
1.688
2.025
2.363
2.700
3.038
5.063
5.400
5.738
6.075
6.413
6.750
7.088
3.375
3.713
4.050
4.388
4.725
2.50
0.450
0.540
0.630
0.720
0.810
0.900
0.990
1.080
1.170
1.260
1.350
1.440
1.530
1.620
1.710
1.800
2.250
2.700
3.150
3.600
4.050
6.750
7.200
7.650
8.100
8.550
9.000
9.450
4.500
4.950
5.400
5.850
6.300
10.00
0.075
0.090
0.105
0.120
0.135
0.150
0.165
0.180
0.195
0.210
0.225
0.240
0.255
0.270
0.285
0.300
0.375
0.450
0.525
0.600
0.675
1.125
1.200
1.275
1.350
1.425
1.500
1.575
0.750
0.825
0.900
0.975
1.050
5.00
0.169
0.203
0.236
0.270
0.304
0.337
0.371
0.405
0.439
0.472
0.506
0.540
0.574
0.608
0.641
0.675
0.844
1.013
1.181
1.350
1.519
2.531
2.700
2.869
3.038
3.206
3.375
3.544
1.688
1.856
2.025
2.194
2.363
40.00
0.017
0.021
0.024
0.028
0.031
0.035
0.038
0.042
0.045
0.048
0.052
0.055
0.059
0.062
0.066
0.069
0.087
0.104
0.121
0.138
0.156
0.260
0.277
0.294
0.312
0.329
0.346
0.363
0.173
0.190
0.208
0.225
0.242
20.00
0.036
0.043
0.050
0.057
0.064
0.071
0.078
0.085
0.092
0.099
0.107
0.114
0.121
0.128
0.135
0.142
0.178
0.213
0.249
0.284
0.320
0.533
0.568
0.604
0.639
0.675
0.711
0.746
0.355
0.391
0.426
0.462
0.497
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 223
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 224
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Extremely inverse curve
T
:=
M
⋅
I
I
0 k
α
−
1
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
0.05
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.17
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
K = 80,
α = 2
Theoretical values given by the formula:
M I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10
2.910
17.460
20.370
23.280
26.190
29.100
32.010
34.920
37.830
8.730
9.312
9.894
10.476
11.058
11.640
14.550
40.740
43.650
46.560
49.470
52.380
55.290
58.200
61.110
3.492
4.074
4.656
5.238
5.820
6.402
6.984
7.566
8.148
3.104
18.624
21.728
24.832
27.936
31.040
34.144
37.248
40.352
9.312
9.933
10.554
11.174
11.795
12.416
15.520
43.456
46.560
49.664
52.768
55.872
58.976
62.080
65.184
3.725
4.346
4.966
5.587
6.208
6.829
7.450
8.070
8.691
3.880
23.280
27.160
31.040
34.920
38.800
42.680
46.560
50.440
11.640
12.416
13.192
13.968
14.744
15.520
19.400
54.320
58.200
62.080
65.960
69.840
73.720
77.600
81.480
4.656
5.432
6.208
6.984
7.760
8.536
9.312
10.088
10.864
6.651
39.909
46.560
53.211
59.863
66.514
73.166
79.817
86.469
19.954
21.285
22.615
23.945
25.275
26.606
33.257
93.120
99.771
106.423
113.074
119.726
126.377
133.029
139.680
7.982
9.312
10.642
11.973
13.303
14.633
15.963
17.294
18.624
1.20
19.048
114.286
133.333
152.381
171.429
190.476
209.524
228.571
247.619
57.143
60.952
64.762
68.571
72.381
76.190
95.238
266.667
285.714
304.762
323.810
342.857
361.905
380.952
400.000
22.857
26.667
30.476
34.286
38.095
41.905
45.714
49.524
53.333
39.024
234.147
273.171
312.195
351.220
390.244
429.269
468.293
507.318
117.073
124.878
132.683
140.488
148.293
156.098
195.122
546.342
585.367
624.391
663.415
702.440
741.464
780.489
819.513
46.829
54.634
62.439
70.244
78.049
85.854
93.659
101.464
109.268
9.091
54.545
63.636
72.727
81.818
90.909
100.000
109.091
118.182
27.273
29.091
30.909
32.727
34.545
36.364
45.455
127.273
136.364
145.455
154.545
163.636
172.727
181.818
190.909
10.909
12.727
14.545
16.364
18.182
20.000
21.818
23.636
25.455
tr =58.2
1.30 1.50
5.797
34.783
40.580
46.377
52.174
57.971
63.768
69.565
75.362
17.391
18.551
19.710
20.870
22.029
23.188
28.986
81.159
86.957
92.754
98.551
104.348
110.145
115.942
121.739
6.957
8.116
9.275
10.435
11.594
12.754
13.913
15.072
16.232
2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
3.200
19.200
22.400
25.600
28.800
32.000
35.200
38.400
41.600
9.600
10.240
10.880
11.520
12.160
12.800
16.000
44.800
48.000
51.200
54.400
57.600
60.800
64.000
67.200
3.840
4.480
5.120
5.760
6.400
7.040
7.680
8.320
8.960
1.333
8.000
9.333
10.667
12.000
13.333
14.667
16.000
17.333
4.000
4.267
4.533
4.800
5.067
5.333
6.667
18.667
20.000
21.333
22.667
24.000
25.333
26.667
28.000
1.600
1.867
2.133
2.400
2.667
2.933
3.200
3.467
3.733
0.762
4.571
5.333
6.095
6.857
7.619
8.381
9.143
9.905
2.286
2.438
2.590
2.743
2.895
3.048
3.810
10.667
11.429
12.190
12.952
13.714
14.476
15.238
16.000
0.914
1.067
1.219
1.371
1.524
1.676
1.829
1.981
2.133
0.500
3.000
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.500
6.000
6.500
1.500
1.600
1.700
1.800
1.900
2.000
2.500
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000
10.500
0.600
0.700
0.800
0.900
1.000
1.100
1.200
1.300
1.400
0.167
1.000
1.167
1.333
1.500
1.667
1.833
2.000
2.167
0.500
0.533
0.567
0.600
0.633
0.667
0.833
2.333
2.500
2.667
2.833
3.000
3.167
3.333
3.500
0.200
0.233
0.267
0.300
0.333
0.367
0.400
0.433
0.467
0.040
0.242
0.283
0.323
0.364
0.404
0.444
0.485
0.525
0.121
0.129
0.137
0.145
0.154
0.162
0.202
0.566
0.606
0.646
0.687
0.727
0.768
0.808
0.848
0.048
0.057
0.065
0.073
0.081
0.089
0.097
0.105
0.113
0.010
0.060
0.070
0.080
0.090
0.100
0.110
0.120
0.130
0.030
0.032
0.034
0.036
0.038
0.040
0.050
0.140
0.150
0.160
0.170
0.180
0.190
0.201
0.211
0.012
0.014
0.016
0.018
0.020
0.022
0.024
0.026
0.028
0.003
0.015
0.018
0.020
0.023
0.025
0.028
0.030
0.033
0.008
0.008
0.009
0.009
0.010
0.010
0.013
0.035
0.038
0.040
0.043
0.045
0.048
0.050
0.053
0.003
0.004
0.004
0.005
0.005
0.006
0.006
0.007
0.007
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 225
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Special very inverse curve
T
:=
M
⋅
I
I
0 k
α
−
1
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
0.95
1.00
1.05
15.600
18.200
20.800
23.400
26.000
28.600
31.200
33.800
36.400
39.000
41.600
44.200
6.760
7.280
7.800
8.320
8.840
9.360
9.880
10.400
13.000
1.05
2.600
3.120
3.640
4.160
4.680
5.200
5.720
6.240
46.800
49.400
52.000
54.600
7.800
9.100
10.400
11.700
13.000
14.300
15.600
16.900
18.200
19.500
20.800
22.100
3.380
3.640
3.900
4.160
4.420
4.680
4.940
5.200
6.500
1.10
1.300
1.560
1.820
2.080
2.340
2.600
2.860
3.120
23.400
24.700
26.000
27.300
M I/Io
0.05
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.75
0.17
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.16
K = 2,6
α = 1
Theoretical values given by the formula:
3.900
4.550
5.200
5.850
6.500
7.150
7.800
8.450
9.100
9.750
10.400
11.050
1.690
1.820
1.950
2.080
2.210
2.340
2.470
2.600
3.250
1.20
0.650
0.780
0.910
1.040
1.170
1.300
1.430
1.560
11.700
12.350
13.000
13.650
2.600
3.033
3.467
3.900
4.333
4.767
5.200
5.633
6.067
6.500
6.933
7.367
1.127
1.213
1.300
1.387
1.473
1.560
1.647
1.733
2.167
1.30
0.433
0.520
0.607
0.693
0.780
0.867
0.953
1.040
7.800
8.233
8.667
9.100
1.950
2.275
2.600
2.925
3.250
3.575
0.845
0.910
0.975
1.040
1.105
1.170
1.235
1.300
1.625
1.40
0.325
0.390
0.455
0.520
0.585
0.650
0.715
0.780
3.900
4.225
4.550
4.875
5.200
5.525
5.850
6.175
6.500
1.560
1.820
2.080
2.340
2.600
2.860
3.120
3.380
3.640
3.900
4.160
4.420
0.676
0.728
0.780
0.832
0.884
0.936
0.988
1.040
1.300
1.50
0.260
0.312
0.364
0.416
0.468
0.520
0.572
0.624
4.680
4.940
5.200
5.460
0.780
0.910
1.040
1.170
1.300
1.430
1.560
1.690
1.820
1.950
2.080
2.210
0.338
0.364
0.390
0.416
0.442
0.468
0.494
0.520
0.650
2.00
0.130
0.156
0.182
0.208
0.234
0.260
0.286
0.312
2.340
2.470
2.600
2.730 6.825
0.520
0.607
0.693
0.780
0.867
0.953
1.040
1.127
1.213
1.300
1.387
1.473
0.225
0.243
0.260
0.277
0.295
0.312
0.329
0.347
0.433
2.50
0.087
0.104
0.121
0.139
0.156
0.173
0.191
0.208
1.560
1.647
1.733
1.820
0.130
0.152
0.173
0.195
0.217
0.238
0.260
0.282
0.303
0.325
0.347
0.368
0.056
0.061
0.065
0.069
0.074
0.078
0.082
0.087
0.108
7.00
0.022
0.026
0.030
0.035
0.039
0.043
0.048
0.052
0.390
0.412
0.433
0.455
0.195
0.228
0.260
0.293
0.325
0.358
0.390
0.423
0.455
0.488
0.520
0.553
0.084
0.091
0.098
0.104
0.111
0.117
0.124
0.130
0.163
5.00
0.032
0.039
0.045
0.052
0.058
0.065
0.071
0.078
0.585
0.618
0.650
0.683
0.260
0.303
0.347
0.390
0.433
0.477
0.520
0.563
0.607
0.650
0.693
0.737
0.113
0.121
0.130
0.139
0.147
0.156
0.165
0.173
0.217
4.00
0.043
0.052
0.061
0.069
0.078
0.087
0.095
0.104
0.780
0.823
0.867
0.910
0.390
0.455
0.520
0.585
0.650
0.715
0.780
0.845
0.910
0.975
1.040
1.105
0.169
0.182
0.195
0.208
0.221
0.234
0.247
0.260
0.325
3.00
0.065
0.078
0.091
0.104
0.117
0.130
0.143
0.156
1.170
1.235
1.300
1.365
0.041
0.048
0.055
0.062
0.068
0.075
0.082
0.089
0.096
0.103
0.109
0.116
0.018
0.019
0.021
0.022
0.023
0.025
0.026
0.027
0.034
20.00
0.007
0.008
0.010
0.011
0.012
0.014
0.015
0.016
0.123
0.130
0.137
0.144
0.056
0.065
0.074
0.084
0.093
0.102
0.111
0.121
0.130
0.139
0.149
0.158
0.024
0.026
0.028
0.030
0.032
0.033
0.035
0.037
0.046
15.00
0.009
0.011
0.013
0.015
0.017
0.019
0.020
0.022
0.167
0.176
0.186
0.195
0.071
0.083
0.095
0.106
0.118
0.130
0.142
0.154
0.165
0.177
0.189
0.201
0.031
0.033
0.035
0.038
0.040
0.043
0.045
0.047
0.059
12.00
0.012
0.014
0.017
0.019
0.021
0.024
0.026
0.028
0.213
0.225
0.236
0.248
0.087
0.101
0.116
0.130
0.144
0.159
0.173
0.188
0.202
0.217
0.231
0.246
0.038
0.040
0.043
0.046
0.049
0.052
0.055
0.058
0.072
10.00
0.014
0.017
0.020
0.023
0.026
0.029
0.032
0.035
0.260
0.274
0.289
0.303
0.020
0.023
0.027
0.030
0.033
0.037
0.040
0.043
0.047
0.050
0.053
0.057
0.009
0.009
0.010
0.011
0.011
0.012
0.013
0.013
0.017
40.00
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.007
0.008
0.060
0.063
0.067
0.070
0.027
0.031
0.036
0.040
0.045
0.049
0.054
0.058
0.063
0.067
0.072
0.076
0.012
0.013
0.013
0.014
0.015
0.016
0.017
0.018
0.022
30.00
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.011
0.081
0.085
0.090
0.094
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 226
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
IX.2. CURVES ANSI
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:
Normal Inverse characteristic
Very Inverse characteristic
Extremely Inverse characteristic
Moderately Inverse characteristic
These curves comply with the general formula :
T
:=
M
⋅
A
+
I
I
0
B
−
C
+
I
I
0
D
−
C
2
+
I
I
0
E
−
C
3
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
T : Trip time (sec)
VERY INVERSE SPECIAL CURVE
T drop
: drop time (sec)
M : multiplier ("time index"). Valid range from 0.5 to 30.0 in 0.1 steps
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 227
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
I: Measured current
Io: Pickup current setting
A,B,C,D,E tr, constants that depend upon the type of curve:
Constants Inverse charact.
A 0.0274
B
C
D
E tr
2.2614
0.3000
-4.1899
9.1272
0.99
Very inverse
0.0615
0.7989
0.3400
-0.2840
4.0505
4.678
Extrem. inverse
0.0399
0.2294
0.5000
3.0094
0.7222
6.008
Moderat. inverse
0.1735
0.6791
0.8000
-0.0800
0.1271
1.2
Below, the corresponding curve for the indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and 30.0 are represented for every characteristic type. Take into account that between every two curves differentiated in 1.0 there are other 9 curves.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 228
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Inverse normal curve
T
:=
M
⋅
A
+
I
I
0
B
−
C
+
I
I
0
D
−
C
2
+
I
I
0
E
−
C
3
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
A = 0.0274, B = 2.2614, C = 0.3000, D = -4.1899, E = 9.1272
20.064
21.120
22.176
23.232
24.288
25.344
26.400
12.672
13.728
14.784
15.840
16.896
17.952
19.008
0.25
0.528
1.056
2.112
3.168
4.224
5.280
6.336
7.392
8.448
9.504
10.560
11.616
27.456
28.512
29.568
30.624
31.680
18.810
19.800
20.790
21.780
22.770
23.760
24.750
11.880
12.870
13.860
14.850
15.840
16.830
17.820
25.740
26.730
27.720
28.710
0
0.495
0.990
1.980
2.970
3.960
4.950
5.940
6.930
7.920
8.910
9.900
10.890
29.700
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
M I/Io
0.5
1.0
Theoretical values given by the formula:
25.080
26.400
27.720
29.040
30.360
31.680
33.000
15.840
17.160
18.480
19.800
21.120
22.440
23.760
0.5
0.660
1.320
2.640
3.960
5.280
6.600
7.920
9.240
10.560
11.880
13.200
14.520
34.320
35.640
36.960
38.280
39.600
42.994
45.257
47.520
49.783
52.046
54.309
56.571
27.154
29.417
31.680
33.943
36.206
38.469
40.731
0.75
1.131
2.263
4.526
6.789
9.051
11.314
13.577
15.840
18.103
20.366
22.629
24.891
58.834
61.097
63.360
65.623
67.886
327.346
344.575
361.803
379.032
396.261
413.490
430.718
206.745
223.974
241.202
258.431
275.660
292.889
310.117
1.05
8.614
17.229
34.457
51.686
68.915
86.144
103.372
120.601
137.830
155.059
172.287
189.516
447.947
465.176
482.405
499.633
516.862
268.546
282.680
296.814
310.948
325.082
339.216
353.350
169.608
183.742
197.876
212.010
226.144
240.278
254.412
367.484
381.618
395.752
409.886
1.10
7.067
14.134
28.268
42.402
56.536
70.670
84.804
98.938
113.072
127.206
141.340
155.474
424.020
187.863
197.750
207.638
217.525
227.413
237.300
247.188
118.650
128.538
138.425
148.313
158.200
168.088
177.975
1.20
4.944
9.888
19.775
29.663
39.550
49.438
59.325
69.213
79.100
88.988
98.875
108.763
257.075
266.963
276.850
286.738
296.625
137.296
144.522
151.748
158.974
166.200
173.426
180.653
86.713
93.939
101.165
108.392
115.618
122.844
130.070
1.30
3.613
7.226
14.452
21.678
28.904
36.131
43.357
50.583
57.809
65.035
72.261
79.487
187.879
195.105
202.331
209.557
216.783 tr = 0.99
81.400
85.684
89.968
94.252
98.536
102.821
107.105
51.410
55.694
59.979
64.263
68.547
72.831
77.115
1.50
2.142
4.284
8.568
12.853
17.137
21.421
25.705
29.989
34.274
38.558
42.842
47.126
111.389
115.673
119.957
124.242
128.526
33.547
35.312
37.078
38.843
40.609
42.375
44.140
21.187
22.953
24.719
26.484
28.250
30.015
31.781
2.00
0.883
1.766
3.531
5.297
7.062
8.828
10.594
12.359
14.125
15.890
17.656
19.422
45.906
47.671
49.437
51.203
52.968
7.729
8.136
8.543
8.949
9.356
9.763
10.170
4.881
5.288
5.695
6.102
6.509
6.915
7.322
1.627
2.034
2.441
2.848
3.254
3.661
4.068
4.475
5.00
0.203
0.407
0.814
1.220
10.576
10.983
11.390
11.797
12.204
14.324
15.078
15.832
16.586
17.340
18.094
18.848
9.047
9.801
10.555
11.309
12.063
12.817
13.571
3.016
3.770
4.524
5.277
6.031
6.785
7.539
8.293
3.00
0.377
0.754
1.508
2.262
19.602
20.356
21.110
21.864
22.618
19.889
20.936
21.983
23.030
24.076
25.123
26.170
12.562
13.608
14.655
15.702
16.749
17.796
18.842
2.50
0.523
1.047
2.094
3.140
4.187
5.234
6.281
7.328
8.374
9.421
10.468
11.515
27.217
28.264
29.310
30.357
31.404
2.519
2.652
2.784
2.917
3.050
3.182
3.315
1.591
1.724
1.856
1.989
2.121
2.254
2.387
3.447
3.580
3.713
3.845
3.978
0.530
0.663
0.796
0.928
1.061
1.193
1.326
1.458
20.00
0.066
0.133
0.265
0.398
4.294
4.520
4.746
4.972
5.198
5.424
5.650
2.712
2.938
3.164
3.390
3.616
3.842
4.068
5.876
6.102
6.328
6.554
6.780
0.904
1.130
1.356
1.582
1.808
2.034
2.260
2.486
10.00
0.113
0.226
0.452
0.678
1.555
1.637
1.719
1.801
1.883
1.964
2.046
0.982
1.064
1.146
1.228
1.310
1.391
1.473
2.128
2.210
2.292
2.374
2.455
0.327
0.409
0.491
0.573
0.655
0.737
0.818
0.900
40.00
0.041
0.082
0.164
0.246
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 229
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
INVERSE CURVE
230
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Very inverse curve
T
:=
M
⋅
A
+
I
I
0
B
−
C
+
I
I
0
D
−
C
2
+
I
I
0
E
−
C
3
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
A = 0.0615, B = 0.7989, C = 0.3400, D = -0.2840, E = 4.0505
88.882
93.560
98.238
102.916
107.594
112.272
116.950
56.136
60.814
65.492
70.170
74.848
79.526
84.204
0
2.339
4.678
9.356
14.034
18.712
23.390
28.068
32.746
37.424
42.102
46.780
51.458
121.628
126.306
130.984
135.662
140.340
94.807
99.797
104.787
109.777
114.767
119.757
124.747
59.878
64.868
69.858
74.848
79.838
84.828
89.818
0.25
2.495
4.990
9.980
14.970
19.959
24.949
29.939
34.929
39.919
44.909
49.899
54.889
129.737
134.726
139.716
144.706
149.696
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
M I/Io
0.5
1.0
Theoretical values given by the formula:
118.509
124.747
130.984
137.221
143.459
149.696
155.933
74.848
81.085
87.323
93.560
99.797
106.035
112.272
0.5
3.119
6.237
12.475
18.712
24.949
31.187
37.424
43.661
49.899
56.136
62.373
68.611
162.171
168.408
174.645
180.883
187.120
203.159
213.851
224.544
235.237
245.929
256.622
267.314
128.311
139.003
149.696
160.389
171.081
181.774
192.466
0.75
5.346
10.693
21.385
32.078
42.770
53.463
64.155
74.848
85.541
96.233
106.926
117.618
278.007
288.699
299.392
310.085
320.777
226.867
238.808
250.748
262.689
274.629
286.569
298.510
143.285
155.225
167.165
179.106
191.046
202.987
214.927
1.05
5.970
11.940
23.881
35.821
47.762
59.702
71.642
83.583
95.523
107.464
119.404
131.344
310.450
322.391
334.331
346.271
358.212
187.115
196.963
206.811
216.659
226.507
236.356
246.204
118.178
128.026
137.874
147.722
157.570
167.419
177.267
1.10
4.924
9.848
19.696
29.544
39.393
49.241
59.089
68.937
78.785
88.633
98.481
108.330
256.052
265.900
275.748
285.596
295.444
132.518
139.492
146.467
153.441
160.416
167.391
174.365
83.695
90.670
97.645
104.619
111.594
118.568
125.543
1.20
3.487
6.975
13.949
20.924
27.898
34.873
41.848
48.822
55.797
62.771
69.746
76.721
181.340
188.314
195.289
202.264
209.238
98.111
103.275
108.438
113.602
118.766
123.930
129.093
61.965
67.128
72.292
77.456
82.620
87.783
92.947
1.30
2.582
5.164
10.327
15.491
20.655
25.819
30.982
36.146
41.310
46.474
51.637
56.801
134.257
139.421
144.584
149.748
154.912 tr = 4.678
59.549
62.683
65.817
68.951
72.085
75.219
78.353
37.610
40.744
43.878
47.012
50.146
53.280
56.414
1.50
1.567
3.134
6.268
9.402
12.537
15.671
18.805
21.939
25.073
28.207
31.341
34.475
81.487
84.622
87.756
90.890
94.024
25.179
26.504
27.829
29.154
30.479
31.805
33.130
15.902
17.228
18.553
19.878
21.203
22.528
23.853
2.00
0.663
1.325
2.650
3.976
5.301
6.626
7.951
9.276
10.602
11.927
13.252
14.577
34.455
35.780
37.105
38.431
39.756
10.201
10.738
11.275
11.812
12.349
12.886
13.423
6.443
6.980
7.517
8.054
8.591
9.127
9.664
2.148
2.685
3.221
3.758
4.295
4.832
5.369
5.906
3.00
0.268
0.537
1.074
1.611
13.960
14.497
15.034
15.570
16.107
14.676
15.448
16.221
16.993
17.766
18.538
19.310
9.269
10.041
10.814
11.586
12.359
13.131
13.904
3.090
3.862
4.635
5.407
6.179
6.952
7.724
8.497
2.50
0.386
0.772
1.545
2.317
20.083
20.855
21.628
22.400
23.173
2.767
2.913
3.059
3.204
3.350
3.496
3.641
1.748
1.893
2.039
2.185
2.330
2.476
2.622
3.787
3.933
4.078
4.224
4.370
0.583
0.728
0.874
1.020
1.165
1.311
1.457
1.602
10.00
0.073
0.146
0.291
0.437
4.938
5.198
5.458
5.718
5.977
6.237
6.497
3.119
3.379
3.638
3.898
4.158
4.418
4.678
6.757
7.017
7.277
7.537
7.797
1.040
1.299
1.559
1.819
2.079
2.339
2.599
2.859
5.00
0.130
0.260
0.520
0.780
1.549
1.631
1.712
1.794
1.875
1.957
2.038
0.978
1.060
1.141
1.223
1.304
1.386
1.468
2.120
2.201
2.283
2.364
2.446
0.326
0.408
0.489
0.571
0.652
0.734
0.815
0.897
40.00
0.041
0.082
0.163
0.245
1.937
2.039
2.141
2.243
2.344
2.446
2.548
1.223
1.325
1.427
1.529
1.631
1.733
1.835
2.650
2.752
2.854
2.956
3.058
0.408
0.510
0.612
0.714
0.815
0.917
1.019
1.121
20.00
0.051
0.102
0.204
0.306
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 231
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
VERY INVERSE CURVE
232
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Extremely inverse curve
T
:=
M
⋅
A
+
I
I
0
B
−
C
+
I
I
0
D
−
C
2
+
I
I
0
E
−
C
3
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
A = 0.0399, B = 0.2294, C = 0.5000, D = 3.0094, E = 0.7222 tr = 6.008
M /Io
0.5
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
Theoretical values given by the formula:
0.25
3.204
6.409
12.817
19.226
25.634
32.043
38.451
44.860
51.268
57.677
64.085
70.494
76.902
83.311
89.719
96.128
102.537
108.945
115.354
121.762
128.171
134.579
140.988
147.396
153.805
160.213
168.224
176.235
184.245
192.256
200.267
166.622
173.030
179.439
208.277
216.288
224.299
185.847
192.256
232.309
240.320
96.128
104.139
112.149
120.160
128.171
136.181
144.192
152.203
160.213
0.5
4.005
8.011
16.021
24.032
32.043
40.053
48.064
56.075
64.085
72.096
80.107
88.117
126.168
132.176
138.184
144.192
150.200
156.208
162.216
168.224
174.232
180.240
72.096
78.104
84.112
90.120
96.128
102.136
108.144
114.152
120.160
0
3.004
6.008
12.016
18.024
24.032
30.040
36.048
42.056
48.064
54.072
60.080
66.088
0.75
6.866
13.733
27.465
41.198
54.930
68.663
82.395
96.128
109.861
123.593
137.326
151.058
1.05
7.373
14.746
29.492
44.239
58.985
73.731
88.477
103.224
117.970
132.716
147.462
162.208
1.10
6.063
12.125
24.250
36.376
48.501
60.626
72.751
84.876
97.002
109.127
121.252
133.377
1.20
4.307
8.615
17.230
25.844
34.459
43.074
51.689
60.303
68.918
77.533
86.148
94.763
1.30
3.220
6.439
12.879
19.318
25.758
32.197
38.636
45.076
51.515
57.954
64.394
70.833
1.50
2.000
4.001
8.002
12.003
16.004
20.004
24.005
28.006
32.007
36.008
40.009
44.010
2.00
0.872
1.744
3.489
5.233
6.977
8.722
10.466
12.210
13.955
15.699
17.443
19.188
2.50
0.499
0.997
1.994
2.992
3.989
4.986
5.983
6.981
7.978
8.975
9.972
10.969
3.00
0.330
0.659
1.319
1.978
2.638
3.297
3.956
4.616
5.275
5.934
6.594
7.253
5.00
0.124
0.247
0.495
0.742
0.990
1.237
1.484
1.732
1.979
2.227
2.474
2.722
10.00
0.049
0.098
0.196
0.295
0.393
0.491
0.589
0.688
0.786
0.884
0.982
1.081
288.384
302.117
315.849
329.582
343.314
357.047
370.779
384.512
164.791
178.523
192.256
205.989
219.721
233.454
247.186
260.919
274.651
309.671
324.417
339.163
353.909
368.655
383.402
398.148
412.894
176.955
191.701
206.447
221.193
235.940
250.686
265.432
280.178
294.924
145.502
157.628
169.753
181.878
194.003
206.128
218.254
230.379
242.504
254.629
266.754
278.879
291.005
303.130
315.255
327.380
339.505
103.377
111.992
120.607
129.222
137.837
146.451
155.066
163.681
172.296
180.910
189.525
198.140
206.755
215.370
223.984
232.599
241.214
398.245
411.977
427.640
442.387
351.631
363.756
249.829
258.444
135.227
141.666
148.106
154.545
160.985
167.424
173.863
180.303
186.742
193.182
77.273
83.712
90.151
96.591
103.030
109.470
115.909
122.348
128.788
48.011
52.012
56.013
60.013
64.014
68.015
72.016
76.017
80.018
84.019
88.020
92.021
96.022
100.022
20.932
22.676
24.421
26.165
27.909
29.654
31.398
33.142
34.887
36.631
38.375
40.120
41.864
43.608
11.967
12.964
13.961
14.958
15.956
16.953
17.950
18.947
19.944
20.942
21.939
22.936
23.933
24.931
7.913
8.572
9.231
9.891
10.550
11.210
11.869
12.528
13.188
13.847
14.506
15.166
15.825
16.485
2.969
3.216
3.464
3.711
3.959
4.206
4.453
4.701
4.948
5.196
5.443
5.691
5.938
6.185
1.179
1.277
1.375
1.474
1.572
1.670
1.768
1.866
1.965
2.063
2.161
2.259
2.358
2.456
0.716
0.776
0.835
0.895
0.955
1.014
1.074
1.134
1.194
1.253
1.313
1.373
1.432
1.492
104.023
108.024
112.025
45.353
47.097
48.841
25.928
26.925
27.922
17.144
17.803
18.463
6.433
6.680
6.928
2.554
2.652
2.751
1.552
1.611
1.671
1.239
1.286
1.334
116.026
120.027
50.586
52.330
28.920
29.917
19.122
19.782
7.175
7.422
2.849
2.947
1.731
1.790
1.382
1.429
0.572
0.619
0.667
0.715
0.762
0.810
0.858
0.905
0.953
1.001
1.048
1.096
1.144
1.191
20.00
0.030
0.060
0.119
0.179
0.239
0.298
0.358
0.418
0.477
0.537
0.597
0.656
40.00
0.024
0.048
0.095
0.143
0.191
0.238
0.286
0.334
0.381
0.429
0.476
0.524
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 233
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
VERY INVERSE CURVE
234
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Moderately inverse curve
T
:=
M
⋅
A
+
I
I
0
B
−
C
+
I
I
0
D
−
C
2
+
I
I
0
E
−
C
3
T
DROPOUT
:
=
M
⋅
I
I
0
t r
2
−
1
A = 0.1735, B = 0.6791, C = 0.8000, D = -0.0800, E = 0.1271
12.800
14.080
15.360
16.640
17.920
19.200
20.480
21.760
23.040
24.320
0.25
0.640
1.280
2.560
3.840
5.120
6.400
7.680
8.960
10.240
11.520
25.600
26.880
28.160
29.440
30.720
32.000
33.280
34.560
35.840
37.120
38.400
32.400
33.600
34.800
36.000
12.000
13.200
14.400
15.600
16.800
18.000
19.200
20.400
21.600
22.800
24.000
25.200
26.400
27.600
28.800
30.000
31.200
0
0.600
1.200
2.400
3.600
4.800
6.000
7.200
8.400
9.600
10.800
M I/Io
0.5
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
Theoretical values given by the formula:
16.000
17.600
19.200
20.800
22.400
24.000
25.600
27.200
28.800
30.400
0.5
0.800
1.600
3.200
4.800
6.400
8.000
9.600
11.200
12.800
14.400
32.000
33.600
35.200
36.800
38.400
40.000
41.600
43.200
44.800
46.400
48.000
27.429
30.171
32.914
35.657
38.400
41.143
43.886
46.629
49.371
52.114
0.75
1.371
2.743
5.486
8.229
10.971
13.714
16.457
19.200
21.943
24.686
54.857
57.600
60.343
63.086
65.829
68.571
71.314
74.057
76.800
79.543
82.286
97.443
107.187
116.932
126.676
136.420
146.165
155.909
165.653
175.398
185.142
1.05
4.872
9.744
19.489
29.233
38.977
48.722
58.466
68.210
77.954
87.699
194.886
204.630
214.375
224.119
233.863
243.608
253.352
263.096
272.841
282.585
292.329
62.557
68.813
75.068
81.324
87.580
93.835
100.091
106.347
112.602
118.858
1.10
3.128
6.256
12.511
18.767
25.023
31.278
37.534
43.790
50.045
56.301
125.114
131.369
137.625
143.881
150.136
156.392
162.648
168.903
175.159
181.415
187.671
33.572
36.929
40.286
43.643
47.001
50.358
53.715
57.072
60.429
63.787
1.20
1.679
3.357
6.714
10.072
13.429
16.786
20.143
23.500
26.857
30.215
67.144
70.501
73.858
77.215
80.572
83.930
87.287
90.644
94.001
97.358
100.716
22.285
24.514
26.742
28.971
31.199
33.428
35.656
37.885
40.113
42.342
1.30
1.114
2.229
4.457
6.686
8.914
11.143
13.371
15.600
17.828
20.057
44.570
46.799
49.027
51.256
53.484
55.713
57.941
60.170
62.398
64.627
66.855 tr = 1.2
13.509
14.860
16.211
17.562
18.913
20.264
21.615
22.966
24.317
25.668
1.50
0.675
1.351
2.702
4.053
5.404
6.755
8.106
9.457
10.807
12.158
27.019
28.370
29.720
31.071
32.422
33.773
35.124
36.475
37.826
39.177
40.528
7.574
8.332
9.089
9.846
10.604
11.361
12.119
12.876
13.633
14.391
2.00
0.379
0.757
1.515
2.272
3.030
3.787
4.544
5.302
6.059
6.817
15.148
15.906
16.663
17.421
18.178
18.935
19.693
20.450
21.208
21.965
22.722
3.698
3.945
4.191
4.438
4.684
2.465
2.712
2.958
3.205
3.451
10.00
0.123
0.247
0.493
0.740
0.986
1.233
1.479
1.726
1.972
2.219
4.931
5.177
5.424
5.670
5.917
6.163
6.410
6.656
6.903
7.149
7.396
4.986
5.318
5.650
5.983
6.315
3.324
3.656
3.988
4.321
4.653
5.00
0.166
0.332
0.665
0.997
1.329
1.662
1.994
2.327
2.659
2.991
6.647
6.980
7.312
7.645
7.977
8.309
8.642
8.974
9.306
9.639
9.971
7.164
7.641
8.119
8.597
9.074
4.776
5.253
5.731
6.209
6.686
3.00
0.239
0.478
0.955
1.433
1.910
2.388
2.866
3.343
3.821
4.298
9.552
10.029
10.507
10.985
11.462
11.940
12.417
12.895
13.373
13.850
14.328
5.712
6.283
6.854
7.425
7.996
8.567
9.139
9.710
10.281
10.852
2.50
0.286
0.571
1.142
1.713
2.285
2.856
3.427
3.998
4.569
5.140
11.423
11.994
12.565
13.137
13.708
14.279
14.850
15.421
15.992
16.564
17.135
2.862
3.052
3.243
3.434
3.625
1.908
2.099
2.289
2.480
2.671
40.00
0.095
0.191
0.382
0.572
0.763
0.954
1.145
1.335
1.526
1.717
3.815
4.006
4.197
4.388
4.579
4.769
4.960
5.151
5.342
5.532
5.723
3.130
3.339
3.547
3.756
3.965
2.087
2.295
2.504
2.713
2.921
20.00
0.104
0.209
0.417
0.626
0.835
1.043
1.252
1.461
1.669
1.878
4.173
4.382
4.591
4.799
5.008
5.217
5.425
5.634
5.843
6.051
6.260
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 235
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
236
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
IX.3. USER CURVES
The user can programme one curve, by introducing the points he wants in the corresponding console screen “User curve 1”.
The time corresponding to each I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times correspond to the curve of index 1, but as in curves IEC, the user can programme a time index between 0.05 and 1.09 in the overcurrent protection settings.
All the points of the temple do not have to be programmed. The console will assign the time of the first point programmed to all of the I/Ia lower than itself, and the one of the last time programmed to all of the I/Ia higher than itself, that is, the graphic will start and end in horizontal lines. The intermediate points between two programmed points will be calculated by the console as a lineal interpolarization between both.
Programming for a value of I/Ia of a time higher than the corresponding one to a lower I/Ia is accepted, that is, increasing lines are not allowed.
Programming template:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 237
8BCURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
Below there is an example
I/Ia
T (s)
2
200
4
100
8
70
12
50
15
5
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 238
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
APPENDIX X. LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
12.
13.
26.
27.
28.
29.
22.
23.
24.
25.
18.
19.
20.
21.
14.
15.
16.
17.
8.
9.
10.
11.
The following list includes all the available signals in the complete PL70 family. For each model of the family only the signals corresponding to its available functions will be applied.
In the case of Procome Protocol it can be programmed which of the signals are sent to control, as well as the number they are sent with. The number indicated is that the signals had in the versions in which it was fixed (up to firmware version D included).
Signal Nº Signal
0. Phase instantaneous pickup (50)
1.
2.
3.
Neutral instantaneous pickup (50N)
Sensitive neutral instantaneous pickup (50SN)
Phase instantaneous pickup High 1 (50H1)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Neutral instantaneous pickup High 1 (50NH1)
TCP/IP transmission
Automatism into operation
Automatism inhibit
Phase timed pickup (51)
Neutral timed pickup (51N)
Sensitive neutral timed pickup (51SN)
51H2-Phases TOC Pick.(Hi2)
51NH2-Gnd TOC Pick.(Hi2)
51NSH2-S.G.TOC Pick.(Hi2)
Isolated neutral pickup (67IN)
Thermal image alarm (49)
Phase instantaneous trip (50)
Neutral instantaneous trip (50N)
Sensitive neutral instantaneous trip (50SN)
Phase instantaneous trip High 1 (50H1)
Neutral instantaneous trip High 1 (50NH1)
50H2-Phase IOC Trip (Hi2)
50NH2-Gnd IOC Trip (Hi2)
50NSH2-S.G. IOC Trip (Hi2)
Phase timed trip (51)
Neutral timed trip (51N)
Sensitive neutral timed trip (51SN)
51H2-Phases TOC Trip (Hi2) SNTP1 server failure (Family SC, RC, CT and RS)
51NH2-Gnd TOC Trip (Hi2) SNTP2 server failure (Family SC, RC, CT and RS)
51NSH2-S.G. TOC Trip (Hi2) SNTP1 server LOCAL/REMOTE (Family SC, RC, CT and RS)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 239
60.
61.
62.
63.
50.
51.
52.
53.
46.
47.
48.
49.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
42.
43.
44.
45.
38.
39.
40.
41.
34.
35.
36.
37.
30.
31.
32.
33.
64.
65.
66.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Isolated neutral trip (67IN)
Thermal image trip (49)
Unbalance timed trip (46T)
Unbalance instantaneous trip (46)
Broken conductor trip (46BC)
Breaker failure trip (50BF)
Unbalance timed pickup (46T)
Unbalance instantaneous pickup (46)
Broken conductor pickup (46BC)
Breaker failure pickup (50BF)
Free
Activation 51V (51V)
Cold Load Pickup (CLP)
Overcurrent pickup (50x/51x/46x)
Overcurrent trip (50x/51x/46x)
Phase A overcurrent trip (50A/51A)
Phase B overcurrent trip (50B/51B)
Phase C overcurrent trip (50C/51C)
Phase overvoltage timed trip (59)
Phase undervoltage timed trip (59)
Phase overvoltage instantaneous trip (59)
Phase undervoltage instantaneous trip (27)
Neutral overvoltage timed trip (64T)
Neutral overvoltage instantaneous trip (64)
Voltage unbalance trip (47T)
Phase reversal trip (47)
Phase overvoltage timed pickup (59)
Phase undervoltage timed pickup (27)
Phase overvoltage instantaneous pickup (59)
Phase undervoltage instantaneous pickup (27)
Neutral overvoltage timed pickup (64T)
Neutral overvoltage instantaneous pickup (64)
Voltage unbalance pickup (47T)
Phase reversal pickup (47)
Relay in service
Recloser in service
Ongoing cycle
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
240
87.
88.
89.
90.
83.
84.
85.
86.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
79.
80.
81.
82.
75.
76.
77.
78.
71.
72.
73.
74.
67.
68.
69.
70.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Definitive trip
Excessive number of trips
Recloser locking
Free kI2 exceeded (average 3 poles) kI2 exceeded pole A kI2 exceeded pole B kI2 exceeded pole C
Open springs automatism
Closure permission by syncrocheck (25)
Instantaneous cancellation output (of the recloser)
Voltage pickup (27/59/64/47)
Voltage trip (27/59/64/47)
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital output 1
Digital output 2
Digital output 3
Digital output 4
Digital output 5
Digital output 6
Instantaneous trip
Instantaneous pick up
Time trip
Time pick up
Overvoltage trip
Overvoltage pick up
Undervoltage trip
Settings modified by 51 V (mode 1)
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
Digital input 8
Digital output 7
Digital output 8
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
241
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Digital output 9
Digital output 10
Digital output 11
Free
Internal battery level low
IRIG-B failure
State 52 change
Active table change
Logic output 1
Logic output 2
Logic output 3
Logic output 4
Logic output 5
Logic output 6
Logic output 7
Logic output 8
Logic output 9
Logic output 10
Phase HIGH CURRENT pickup (50HC)
Neutral HIGH CURRENT pickup (50NHC)
Phase HIGH CURRENT trip (50HC)
Neutral HIGH CURRENT trip (50NHC)
Reclosure
Automatism: Voltage presence
Breaker open failure
Breaker close failure
Breaker close command
Breaker open command
General pickup
General trip
Breaker closed (52status)
Oscillograph recorder pickup
Free
Free
LOCAL status
Trip circuit 1 failure
Free
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
242
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Close circuit 1 failure
Free
HW status
Min. power trip (Family PO)
Max. power trip High (Family PO)
Max. power trip Low (Family PO)
Power reverse trip High (Family PO)
Power reverse trip Low(Family PO)
Free
Free
Power trip (Family PO)
Min. power pick up (Family PO)
Max. power trip High pick up (Family PO)
Max. power trip Low pick up (Family PO)
Power reverse trip pick up (Family PO)
Power reverse trip Low pick up (Family PO)
Free
Free
Power pickup
Frequency trip level 1
Frequency trip level 2
Frequency trip level 3
Frequency trip level 4
Frequency trip level 5 df/dt trip level 1 df/dt trip level 2 df/dt trip level 3 df/dt trip level 4
Frequency pickup level 1
Frequency pickup level 2
Frequency pickup level 3
Frequency pickup level 4
Frequency pickup level 5
Frequency trip
Trip by df/dt
Free
Free
Undervolt. pick up phase A (Family TT and SV)
Undervolt. pick up phase B (Family TT and SV)
Undervolt. pick up phase C (Family TT and SV)
Undervolt. trip phase A (Family TT and SV)
Undervolt. trip phase B (Family TT and SV)
Undervolt. trip phase C (Family TT and SV)
Overvolt. pick up phase A (Family TT and SV)
Overvolt. pick up phase B (Family TT and SV)
Overvolt. pick up phase C (Family TT and SV)
Overvolt. trip phase A (Family TT and SV)
Overvolt. trip phase B (Family TT and SV)
Overvolt. trip phase C (Family TT and SV)
Low Current Pickup level 1 (Family IS and IT)
Low Current Trip level 1 (Family IS and IT)
Low Current Pickup level 2 (Family IS and IT)
Low Current Trip level 2 (Family IS and IT)
Temp. Phase Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Temp. Neutral Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Temp. Phase Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Temp. Neutral Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Inst. S.Gnd Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Temp. S.Gnd Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Inst. S.Gnd Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Temp. S.Gnd Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Voltage OFF (Family SC, RC and RS)
Extinguished current (Family SC, RC and RS)
243
194.
195.
196.
197.
198.
199.
200.
201.
202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190.
191.
192.
193.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.
214.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Free
Free
Module difference
Frequency difference
Angle difference
50H2-Phase IOC Pick.(Hi2)
50NH2-Gnd IOC Pick.(Hi2)
50NSH2-S.G. IOC Pick.(Hi2)
Voltage OFF in 1 or 2 phases
Automatism OFF
CAPDIS Failure
Phase Fault Step
Neutral Fault Step
Breaker failure trip neutral
Minimum apparent power pickup
Maximum apparent power pickup High
Maximum apparent power pickup Low
Minimum apparent power trip
Maximum apparent power trip High
Maximum apparent power trip Low
Free
Motor protection trip
Rotor locking pick up
Rotor locking trip
Undercurrent pick up
Undercurrent trip
Long start
Starts per hour
Start
Start in process
MHO1 trip
MHO2 trip
MHO1 alarm
MHO2 alarm
MHO1 undervoltage condition
MHO2 undervoltage condition
Overexcitation trip
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
244
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
231.
232.
233.
234.
235.
236.
237.
238.
239.
240.
241.
242.
243.
244.
223.
224.
225.
226.
227.
228.
229.
230.
215.
216.
217.
218.
219.
220.
221.
222.
245.
246.
247.
248.
249.
250.
251.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Phase shift trip
Overexcitation time pick up
Overexcitation instantaneous pick up
Overexcitation time trip
Overexcitation instantaneous trip
Phase A shift
Phase B shift
Phase C shift
Three phase shift
81-Lock Freq.Prot.min.V Inst. Phase Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
81R-Lock DF/DT Prot.min.V Inst. Neutral Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Voltage absence
Spring motor opening
Inst. Phase Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Inst. Neutral Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Free
Free
Current pass due to phase fault detection
Automation
Telecommand
Door opening (telecontrol center)
Free
Free
Free
Free
Phase A Forward (Family RS)
Phase A Reverse (Family RS)
Free
Free
Phase C Forward (Family RS)
Phase C Reverse (Family RS)
Free
Free
Neutral Forward (Family RS)
Neutral Reverse (Family RS)
79f-Freq. Recl. locked
79f-Freq. Recl. In service
245
268.
269.
270.
271.
272.
273.
274.
275.
276.
277.
278.
279.
280.
281.
260.
261.
262.
263.
264.
265.
266.
267.
252.
253.
254.
255.
256.
257.
258.
259.
282.
283.
284.
285.
286.
287.
288.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
79f-Freq. reclosure
79f-breaker close locking
79f-Freq. Definitive trip
V abs. with I pres. anomaly
Side A and B undervoltage pickup
Side A undervoltage pickup
Side B undervoltage pickup
Side A and B undervoltage trip
Lack of synchronism
Underfrequency Teleacoplator
Overfrequency Teleacoplator
Phase delay Teleacoplator
Phase forward Teleacoplator
Module dif. Teleacoplator
Teleacoplator close command
Teleacoplator working
Teleacoplator cancelled
Teleacoplator not selected
Restricted earth pick up
Restricted earth trip
Residual overcurrent instantaneous pickup
Residual overcurrent time pickup
Residual overcurrent instantaneous trip
Residual overcurrent time trip
Earthed overcurrent instantaneous pick up (Neutral 2)
Earthed overcurrent time pick up (Neutral 2)
Earthed overcurrent instantaneous trip (Neutral 2)
Earthed overcurrent time trip (Neutral 2)
Tank overcurrent instantaneous pick up (Neutral 3)
Tank overcurrent time pick up (Neutral 3)
Tank overcurrent instantaneous trip (Neutral 3)
Tank overcurrent time trip (Neutral 3)
High 1 Sensitive neutral instantaneous pick up (50H1)
High 1 Sensitive neutral instantaneous High 1 (50H1)
Dead zone pick up
Dead zone trip
Recloser on-going cycle 1
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
246
305.
306.
307.
308.
309.
310.
311.
312.
313.
314.
315.
316.
297.
298.
299.
300.
301.
302.
303.
304.
289.
290.
291.
292.
293.
294.
295.
296.
317.
318.
319.
Recloser on-going cycle 2
Recloser on-going cycle 3
Recloser on-going cycle 4
Manual close security t.
1 st recloser security t.
2 nd recloser security t.
3 rd recloser security t.
4 th recloser security t.
Table 1 active
Table 2 active
Table 3 active
Table 4 active
Recloser on standby
Rear arch pick up (I)
Rear arch trip(I)
Arch phase A (I) pick up
Arch phase B (I) pick up
Arch phase C (I) pick up
Arch phase A (I) trip
Arch phase B (I) trip
Arch phase C (I) trip
Breaker failure (BF) in fault retrip
Phase A retrip
Phase B retrip
Phase C retrip
BF in load pick up
BF in load 2 trip
BF in load 1 trip
Phase A load trip 1
Phase B load trip 1
Phase C load trip 1
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
9BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
247
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XI. DNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
This function allows communicating with a remote control station, using the communication protocol DNP3 at the level of control messages.
The unit behaves as a remote position RTU.
The format by character is:
1 start bit.
8 data bits.
1 parity bit configurable between none, even and odd parity.
1 stop bit, configurable between 1 and 2 stop bit.
The baud rate can be selected among 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bauds.
XI.1. SETTING
Associated text
UCL. ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY T.
STOP BITS
FIXED RTS
RTS AND CTS
CTS WAIT T.
POR. WAIT T.
STABIL T.
POSTTR. T.
ACK WAIT T.
SYNCHRON. T
ACK LINK
APLIC. M. BYTES No
Meaning
Word type parameter. It allows identifying the number of remote station. Range 0 - 65532.
Default value 1.
Word type parameter. It allows identifying the master station address. Range 0 - 65532.
Default value 0.
This word type parameter allows to set the baud rate : 300 – 600 – 1200 – 2400 – 4800 – 9600 –
19200 - 38400) bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows configuring the parity to be used in the transmission. Even, odd or none parity.
The advised default value is none parity, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
It allows selecting the number of stop bits. 1 or 2 stop bits
The advised default value is 1 stop bit, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
When its value is YES the RTS signal is kept permanently active.
Default value NO.
It allows to select if the control if pins RTS and CTS is performed: NO, RTS+CTS, RTS
Default value NO
It indicates the time in hundredths of second, which is being waited for the CTS activation, after the
RTS activation.
Range 0 - 100.
Default value 20.
It indicates the time, in hundredths of second, which is being waited, once activated the CTS, to start the transmission with the objective to stabilise the carrier.
Range 0 - 100.
Default value 4.
Waiting time to transmit after reception, in hundredths of second.
Range 0 - 100.
Default value 4.
It indicates the time elapsed from the moment the the last character is until the RTS is deactivated
RTS (milliseconds).
Range: 0 - 3000.
Dafault value 40.
Note: Available from firmware version E on.
Waiting timeout to confirm the csc link.
Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 500.
Required time in minutes to ask the master for synchronization
Range 0 - 10.
Default value 0.
Indicates if confirm is required al link level.
SI = confirm is required.
NO = confirm. is not required
Default value NO.
Maximum number of bytes in an application segment. Range 1024 - 3072.
Default value 1024.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 248
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
Associated text
CHANGES TIME
FROZEN T.
STATUS SENDING
MEAS. BIT No.
COUNTER BIT No.
NOT REQ. MESS.
PR.COLLISION
COL FIXED T.
COL.VBLE T.
RESENDING T.
NOT REQ. MAX.
NUM.
SPECIAL
FORMAT
Meaning
Transfer time of the default changes. It can take the following values:
BOTH = sent with absolute and relative values.
WITHOUT TIME = sent without time.
ABSOLUTE = sent with absolute time.
RELATIVE = sent with relative time.
Default value ABSOLUTE.
It indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time. It performs only in the case that a 0 variation is requested.
WITH TIME = sent with time.
WITHOUT TIME = sent without time.
Default value WITH TIME..
It indicates if in the answer message to a class 0 data request, the objects of digital signals, measurements and counters with or without status are sent.
Value 0->it does not send status for any signal. bit 0-> to one it is sent all with status. bit 1->it sends digital signals with status. bit 2->it sends measurements with status. bit 3->it sends counters with status. bit 4->it sends frozen counters with status.
There are two ways to send everything with status: to write a 1 or a 14
Default value 0
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the request, and as non requested changes.
16 BITS = they are sent in 16 bits.
32 BITS = they are sent in 32 bits.
Default value 16 BITS.
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the request, and as non requested changes.
16 BITS = se envían en 16 bits.
32 BITS = se envían en 32 bits.
Default value 32 BITS.
At value YES it allows the transfer of non requested messages with class data 1, 2 or 3.
Default value NO.
At value YES a treatment is performed to prevent collisions. At value NO the DCD is not checked.
Default value NO.
Waiting time set in hundredths of second which the unit waits since it is allowed to transfer through the DCD. Range 0 - 1000.
Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 10..
Variable waiting time. Depending on the selected value it can be obtained the maximum value which can be reached by the hundredths of seconds. This value will be a random value between 0 and such maximum.
Possible values: 1-3-5-7-15-31-63-127-255
Note: it must be highlighted that the time delay is reset once the DCD is lost.
Default value 7.
It is the time in seconds in which the unit waits to try again the transfer of non requested data, when it does not receive the link confirmation and the application to an old transfer and its reattempt after the answer waiting time.
Range 0 – 630 seconds
Default value 20.
Maximum number of repetitions of a non requested message. At infinite zero value.
Range 0 - 65535.
Default value 0.
It allows activating some particular aspects of the operation.
BIT 0->0x0001 Transfer of actual counters with OBJ=21.
BIT 1->0x0002 Reserve.
BIT 2->0x0004 Transfer of non requested message up to the included IIN every 10 seconds
BIT 3->0x0008 Reserve.
BIT 4->0x0010 Reserve.
BIT 5->0x0020 Reserve.
BIT 6->0x0040 It does not transfer the restart message when starting.
BIT 7->0x0080 Trip close.
Default value 0.
It indicates the measurements transfer format.
COUNTS
CALCULATED
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 249
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
XI.2. OPERATION INDICATIONS
XI.2.1 Spontaneous message indicating RESTART
At RTU starting, in the case that the transfer of spontaneous non requested messages is enabled, it will be sent a spontaneous and empty message which activates the bit corresponding to the IIN RESTART requiring application confirmation.
It will stop transferring when receiving the application confirmation with the correct application sequence number. For the repetition times associated to this message, they will be applied as for the rest of the spontaneous messages, except in the number of reattempts before cancelling the message, this means that the setting NOT REQ. MAX is not considered in this message.
XI.2.2 Synchronization
The bit corresponding to Need Time in the IIN is activated periodically according to the value of the setting
SYNCHRON. T.
XI.2.3 Treatment and detection of digital changes
It is maintained a circular queue of 1024 changes which stores the changes in the signals in order to transfer them to the control centre. Changes of digital signals by communications can be filtered by configuring 0 class, this can be done for individual signals or for all.
No changes are detected at the starting of the unit and until it does not start communicating.
The setting ERASE DATA ? does not act over the DNP3 protocol.
XI.2.4 Transfer of spontaneous messages
For the transfer of spontaneous messages, if there are any messages stored in the different classes of changes, the priority of classes will be followed, this means that the queue class 1 is emptied first, then the class 2 and last the class 3.
If the parameter NOT REQ. MESSAGES at value 1 is not found, no spontaneous message is sent.
A treatment of collisions will be performed depending on the parameter COLLISION PREV.. The signal DCD is used along with the parameters COL. FIXED T and COL.VBLE. T.
In the case that no answer is obtained to the messages of non requested changes, a reattempt will be performed once expired the time defined by the parameter ACK. WAIT T. Then periodical transfers will be performed according to the parameter RESEND T. Each time a message is repeated, all the new changes will be included in it, so that the message is created again at each repetition.
XI.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation
Only one reading or writing order can be selected or executed each time.
The selection of orders and writings will be kept during 15sc.
There is a queue of digital signals changes.
If frozen counters are requested and these have not been frozen previously, they are answered at value 0 and with time set to 0.
In the event of receiving a request for any system static object and this does not exist, it will be answered up to the IIN and indicating an unknown object.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 250
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
XI.3. DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Vendor Name: INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION S.A.
Device Name: SIPC
Highest DNP Level Supported:
For Requests Level 3
Device Function:
Master Slave
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted 292
Received 292
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
None
FIX at 1
Configurable, range __ to __
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted
Received
1024< >3072( configurable)
1024
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
Configurable, range ____ to ____
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable PARAMETER DATA_ACK = 1
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm
None FIX at _________
Complete Appl. Fragment
None FIX at _________
Application Confirm
None FIX at __10 sg____
Complete Appl. Response
None FIX at _________
Others
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs
SELECT/OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Count > 1
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Queue
Clear Queue
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Never Always Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Configurable (attach explanation)
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:
Never
Binary Input Change With Time
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never
When Device Restarts
When Status Flags Change
Supports Collision Avoidance: Configurable
Default Counter Object/Variation:
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object _________
Default Variation ______
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes No
Collision Avoidance Detection Method: DCD
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
16 Bits
32 Bits
Other Value _____________
Point-by-point list attached
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 251
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
XI.4. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
22 2
22 3
22 4
22 5
22 6
22 7
22 8
23 0
23 1
23 2
OBJECT
Obj Var
1
1
1
2
0
1
2
0
2 1
2 2
2 3
10 0
10 1
10 2
12 0
12 1
12 2
12 3
20 0
20 1
20 2
20 3
20 4
20 5
20 6
20 7
20 8
21 0
21 1
21 2
21 3
21 4
21 5
21 6
21 7
21 8
21 9
21 10
21 11
21 12
22 0
22 1
Description
Binary Input – All Variations
Binary Input
Binary Input with Status
Binary Input Change - All Variations
20*,21*
Binary Input Change without Time
Binary Input Change with Time
Binary Input Change with Relative Time
Binary Output - All Variations
Binary Output
Binary Output Status
Control Block - All Variations
Control Relay Output Block
Pattern Control Block
Pattern Mask
Binary Counter - All Variations
32-Bit Binary Counter
16-Bit Binary Counter
32-Bit Delta Counter
16-Bit Delta Counter
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
Frozen Counters - All Variations
32-Bit Frozen Counter
16-Bit Frozen Counter
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of
Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of
Freeze
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag
Counter Change Event – All Variations
32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time
16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1
32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without
Time
16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without
Time
32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
1
1
16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
Frozen Counter Events – All Variations 1
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
REQUEST(slave must parse)
Func Codes
(dec)
1,22
1
1
1
06
1
Qual Codes (hex)
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
06,07,08
06,07,08
1 06,07,08
1 06,07,08
1
1
3, 4, 5, 6
00,01,06
00,01,06
17, 28
1
1
1
1, 7, 89, 10,22 00,01,06, 07,08
1, 7, 89, 10 00,01,06, 07,08
1, 7, 89, 10
1
1
1
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
1
1
1
1, 22
1
1
1
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
1 00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
00,01,06
06,07,08
06,07,08
06,07,08
06, 07, 08
06, 07, 08
06, 07, 08
06, 07, 08
06, 07, 08
129
129
129
129
129
129,
130
129,
130
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129,
130
129,
130
129
RESPONSE(master must parse)
Func
Codes
Qual Codes
(hex)
129
129
129,
130
00,01
00,01
28
28
28
00,01
Echo of request
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00, 01
00, 01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00, 01
00, 01
129 00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
28
28
28
28
28
28
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 252
OBJECT
Obj Var
23 3
23 4
23 5
23 6
23 7
23 8
30 0
30 1
30 2
30 3
30 4
31 0
31 1
31 2
31 3
31 4
31 5
31 6
32 0
32 1
32 2
32 3
32 4
33 0
33 1
33 2
33 3
33 4
40 0
40 1
40 2
41 1
41 2
50 0
50 1
50 2
51 0
51 1
51 2
52 0
52 1
52 2
60 0
60 1
60 2
60 3
60 4
70 1
80 1
81 1
82 1
32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
REQUEST(slave must parse)
Description
Func Codes
(dec)
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without
Time
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without
Time
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
Analog Input - All Variations
32-Bit Analog Input
16-Bit Analog Input
1
1
1, 22
1
1
32-Bit Analog Input without flag
16-Bit Analog Input without flag
Frozen Analog Input - All Variations
32-Bit Frozen Analog Input
16-Bit Frozen Analog Input
32-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
1
1
32-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
16-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
Analog Change Event - All Variations
20*,21*
1
06
1
Qual Codes (hex)
06, 07, 08
06, 07, 08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
00,01,06, 07,08
06,07,08
06,07,08
16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
Frozen Analog Event - All Variations
32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
Analog Output Status - All Variations
32-Bit Analog Output Status
16-Bit Analog Output Status
32-Bit Analog Output Block
16-Bit Analog Output Block
Time and Date - All Variations
Time and Date
1
Time and Date with Interval
Time and Date CTO - All Variations
Time and Date CTO
Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO
Time Delay - All Variations
Time Delay Coarse
Time Delay Fine
Not Defined
Class 0 Data
Class 1 Data
20, 21,22
Class 2 Data
20, 21, 22
Class 3 Data
20, 21, 22
File Identifier
Internal Indications
2
Storage Object
Device Profile
1
1
1
1
1
06
1
3, 4, 5, 6
2
07 quantity = 1
1
06
1
06
1
00index=7
06,07,08
00, 01, 06
00, 01, 06
00, 01, 06
17, 28
07 quantity = 1
06
06,07,08
06,07,08
06,07,08
00, 01
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
RESPONSE(master must parse)
Func
Codes
Qual Codes
(hex)
129 28
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129,
130
129,
130
28
00, 01
00,01
00, 01
00, 01
28
28
00,01
00,01
Echo of request
07 quantity = 1
07, quantity=1
07, quantity=1
07, quantity=1
00
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 253
OBJECT
Obj Var
83 1
83 2
90 1
100 1
100 2
100 3
101 1
101 2
101 3
* IBM. Compatibility
Description
Private Registration Object
Private Registration Object Descriptor
Application Identifier
Short Floating Point
Long Floating Point
Extended Floating Point
Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
No Object
No Object
REQUEST(slave must parse)
Func Codes
(dec)
13, 14
23
Qual Codes (hex)
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
RESPONSE(master must parse)
Func
Codes
Qual Codes
(hex)
XI.5. SIGNAL LIST
XI.5.1 Digital signals
In the list below, the digital signals used (changes and states)are shown. Each model will only be applied those corresponding to the functions it has.
(1) Up to firmware version D the transmitted signals and the order in which they are transmitted are fixed as they are shown in the table.
(2) From the firmware version E on the transmitted signals and the order in which they are transmitted can be programmed among those available. The programming is carried out through the protection console SIPCON/P.
ID-DNP (2) ID Signal
Programmable 0 Phase instantaneous pick up (50)
Programmable 1 Neutral instantaneous pick up (50N)
Programmable 2 Sensitive neutral instantaneous pick up (50NS)
Programmable 3 Phase instantaneous pick up High 1 (50H1)
Programmable 4 Neutral instantaneous pick up High 1 (50NH1)
Programmable 5 TCP/IP transmission
Programmable 6 Automatism into operation
Programmable 7 Automatism inhibit
Programmable 8 Phase time pick up (51)
Programmable 9 Neutral time pick up (51N)
Programmable 10 Sensitive neutral time pick up (51NS)
Programmable 11 51H2-Phases TOC Pick.(Hi2)
Programmable 12 51NH2-Gnd TOC Pick.(Hi2)
Programmable 13 51NSH2-S.G.TOC Pick.(Hi2)
Programmable 14 Isolated neutral pick up (67NA)
Programmable 15 Thermal image warning(49)
Programmable 16 Phase instantaneous trip (50)
Programmable 17 Neutral instantaneous trip (50N)
Programmable 18 Sensitive neutral instantaneous trip (50NS)
Programmable 19 Phase instantaneous trip High 1 (50H1)
Programmable 20 Neutral instantaneous trip High 1 (50NH1)
Programmable 21 50H2-Phase IOC Trip(Hi2)
Programmable 22 50NH2-Gnd IOC Trip (Hi2)
Programmable 23 50NSH2-S.G. IOC Trip(Hi2)
Programmable 24 Phase time trip (51)
Programmable 25 Neutral time trip (51N)
Programmable 26 Sensitive neutral time trip (51NS)
Programmable 27 51H2-Phases TOC Trip (Hi2) SNTP1 server failure (Family SC, RC, CT and RS)
Programmable 28 51NH2-Gnd TOC Trip (Hi2) SNTP2 server failure (Family SC, RC, CT and RS)
Programmable 29 51NSH2-S.G. TOC Trip (Hi2) SNTP1 server LOCAL/REMOTE (Family SC, RC, CT and RS)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 254
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
ID-DNP (2) ID Signal
Programmable 30 Isolated neutral trip (67NA)
Programmable 31 Thermal image trip (49)
Programmable 32 Unbalance time trip (46T)
Programmable 33 Unbalance instantaneous trip (46I)
Programmable 34 Broken conductor trip (46BC)
Programmable 35 Breaker failure trip (50BF)
Programmable 36 Unbalance time pick up (46T)
Programmable 37 Unbalance instantaneous pick up (46I)
Programmable 38 Broken conductor pickup (46 BC)
Programmable 39 Breaker failure pickup (50BF)
Programmable 40 Free
Programmable 41 Activation 51V (51V)
Programmable 42 Cold load pick up (CL)
Programmable 43 Overcurrent pick up (50x/51x/46x)
Programmable 44 Overcurrent trip(50x/51x/46x)
Programmable 45 Overcurrent trip Phase A (50A/51A)
Programmable 46 Overcurrent trip Phase B (50B/51B)
Programmable 47 Overcurrent trip Phase C (50C/51C)
Programmable 48 Phase overvoltage time trip (59)
Programmable 49 Phase undervoltage time trip (59)
Programmable 50 Phase overvoltage instantaneous trip (59)
Programmable 51 Phase undervoltage instantaneous trip (59)
Programmable 52 Neutral overvoltage time trip (64T)
Programmable 53 Neutral overvoltage instantaneous trip (64)
Programmable 54 Voltage unbalance trip (47T)
Programmable 55 Phase reverse trip (47)
Programmable 56 Phase overvoltage time pickup (59)
Programmable 57 Phase undervoltage time pickup (59)
Programmable 58 Phase overvoltage instantaneous pickup (59)
Programmable 59 Phase undervoltage instantaneous pickup (59)
Programmable 60 Neutral overvoltage time pickup (64T)
Programmable 61 Neutral overvoltage instantaneous pickup (64)
Programmable 62 Voltage unbalance pick up(47T)
Programmable 63 Phase reverse pick up (47)
Programmable 64 Relay in service
Programmable 65 Recloser in service
Programmable 66 On-going cycle
Programmable 67 Definite trip
Programmable 68 Excessive number of trips
Programmable 69 Recloser locking
Programmable 70 Free
Programmable 71 Exceeded kI2 (average 3 poles)
Programmable 72 Exceeded kI2 pole A
Programmable 73 Exceeded kI2 pole B
Programmable 74 Exceeded kI2 pole C
Programmable 75 Automation open springs
Programmable 76 Close permission by syncrocheck (25)
Programmable 77 Output by instantaneous cancellation (of the recloser)
Programmable 78 Voltage pick up (27/59/64/47)
Programmable 79 Voltage trip (27/59/64/47)
Programmable 80 Digital input 1
Programmable 81 Digital input 2
Programmable 82 Digital output 1
Programmable 83 Digital output 2
Programmable 84 Digital output 3
Programmable 85 Digital output 4
Programmable 86 Digital output 5
Programmable 87 Digital output 6
Programmable 88 Instantaneous trip
Programmable 89 Instantaneous pickup
Programmable 90 Time trip
Programmable 91 Time pickup
Programmable 92 Overvoltage trip
Programmable 93 Overvoltage pick up
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 255
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
ID-DNP (2) ID Signal
Programmable 94 Undervoltage trip
Programmable 95 Settings modified by 51 V (mode 1)
Programmable 96 Digital input 3
Programmable 97 Digital input 4
Programmable 98 Digital input 5
Programmable 99 Digital input 6
Programmable 100 Digital input 7
Programmable 101 Digital input 8
Programmable 102 Digital output 7
Programmable 103 Digital output 8
Programmable 104 Digital output 9
Programmable 105 Digital output 10
Programmable 106 Digital output 11
Programmable 107 Free
Programmable 108 Internal battery level low
Programmable 109 IRIG-B failure
Programmable 110 Status 52 change
Programmable 111 Active table change
Programmable 112 Logic output 1
Programmable 113 Logic output 2
Programmable 114 Logic output 3
Programmable 115 Logic output 4
Programmable 116 Logic output 5
Programmable 117 Logic output 6
Programmable 118 Logic output 7
Programmable 119 Logic output 8
Programmable 120 Logic output 9
Programmable 121 Logic output 10
Programmable 122 High Current phases pick up (50HC)
Programmable 123 High Current Neutral pick up (50NHC)
Programmable 124 High Current phases trip (50HC)
Programmable 125 High Current Neutral trip (50NHC)
Programmable 126 Recloser
Programmable 127 Automation: Voltage presence
Programmable 128 Breaker open failure
Programmable 129 Breaker close failure
Programmable 130 Breaker close command
Programmable 131 Breaker open command
Programmable 132 General pick up
Programmable 133 General trip
Programmable 134 Close breaker (state 52)
Programmable 135 Oscillograph pickup
Programmable 136 Free
Programmable 137 Free
Programmable 138 LOCAL state
Programmable 139 Trip circuit 1 failure
Programmable 140 Free
Programmable 141 Close circuit 1 failure
Programmable 142 Free
Programmable 143 HW state
Programmable 144 Minimum power trip Undervoltage Pick up Phase A (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 145 Maximum power trip High Undervoltage Pick up Phase B (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 146 Maximum power trip Low Undervoltage Pick up Phase C (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 147 Power reverse trip High Undervoltage Trip Phase A (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 148 Power reverse trip Low Undervoltage Trip Phase B (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 149 Free Undervoltage Trip Phase C (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 150 Free Overvoltage Pick up Phase A (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 151 Power trip Overvoltage Pick up Phase B (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 152 Minimum power pick up Overvoltage Pick up Phase C (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 153 Maximum power pick up High Overvoltage Trip Phase A (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 154 Maximum power pick up Low Overvoltage Trip Phase B (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 155 Power reverse pick up High Overvoltage Trip Phase C (Family TT and SV)
Programmable 156 Power reverse pick up Low Low Current Pickup level 1 (Family IS and IT)
Programmable 157 Free Low Current Trip level 1 (Family IS and IT)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 256
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
ID-DNP (2) ID Signal
Programmable 158 Free Low Current Pickup level 2 (Family IS and IT)
Programmable 159 Power pick up Low Current Trip level 2 (Family IS and IT)
Programmable 160 Frequency trip level 1 Temp. Phase Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 161 Frequency trip level 2 Temp. Neutral Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 162 Frequency trip level 3 Temp. Phase Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 163 Frequency trip level 4 Temp. Neutral Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 164 Frequency trip level 5 Inst. S.Gnd Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 165 Trip df/dt level 1 Temp. S.Gnd Fault Sign (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 166 Trip df/dt level 2 Inst. S.Gnd Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 167 Trip df/dt level 3 Temp. S.Gnd Fault Step (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 168 Trip df/dt level 4 Voltage OFF (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 169 Frequency pick up level 1 Extinguished current (Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 170 Frequency pick up level 2
Programmable 171 Frequency pick up level 3
Programmable 172 Frequency pick up level 4
Programmable 173 Frequency pick up level 5
Programmable 174 Frequency trip
Programmable 175 df/dt trip
Programmable 176 Free
Programmable 177 Free
Programmable 178 Free
Programmable 179 Free
Programmable 180 Free
Programmable 181 Free
Programmable 182 Free
Programmable 183 50H2-Phase IOC Pick.(Hi2)
Programmable 184 50NH2-Gnd IOC Pick.(Hi2)
Programmable 185 50NSH2-S.G. IOC Pick.(Hi2)
Programmable 186 Voltage OFF in 1 or 2 phases
Programmable 187 Automatism OFF
Programmable 188 CAPDIS Failure
Programmable 189 Phase Fault Step
Programmable 190 Neutral Fault Step
Programmable 191 Breaker failure trip BF neutral
Programmable 192 Apparent minimum power pick up
Programmable 193 Apparent maximum power pick up High
Programmable 194 Apparent maximum power pick up Low
Programmable 195 Apparent minimum power trip
Programmable 196 Apparent maximum power trip High
Programmable 197 Apparent maximum power trip Low
Programmable 198 Free
Programmable 199 Motor protection trip
Programmable 200 Rotor locking pickup
Programmable 201 Rotor locking trip
Programmable 202 Undercurrent pickup
Programmable 203 Undercurrent trip
Programmable 204 Long start
Programmable 205 Starts per hour
Programmable 206 Motor picked up
Programmable 207 Motor picking up
Programmable 208 MHO1 trip
Programmable 209 MHO2 trip
Programmable 210 MHO1 alarm
Programmable 211 MHO2 alarm
Programmable 212 Undervoltage Cond. 1
Programmable 213 Undervoltage Cond 2
Programmable 214 Overexcitation trip
Programmable 215 Phase shift trip
Programmable 216 Overexcitation time pick up
Programmable 217 Overexcitation instantaneous pick up
Programmable 218 Overexcitation time trip
Programmable 219 Overexcitation instantaneous trip
Programmable 220 Phase A shift
Programmable 221 Phase B shift
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 257
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
ID-DNP (2) ID Signal
Programmable 222 Phase C shift
Programmable 223 Three-phase shift
Programmable 224 81-Lock Freq.Prot.min.V Inst. Phase Fault Step(Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 225 81R-Lock DF/DT Prot.min.V Inst. Neutral Fault Step(Family SC, RC and RS)
Programmable 226 Voltage absence
Programmable 227 Spring motor opening
Programmable 228 Inst. Phase Fault Sign
Programmable 229 Inst. Neutral Fault Sign
Programmable 230 Free
Programmable 231 Free
Programmable 232 Fault Step
Programmable 233 Automation
Programmable 234 Telecommand
Programmable 235 Door opening
Programmable 236 Free
Programmable 237 Free
Programmable 238 Free
Programmable 239 Free
Programmable 240 Forward phase A
Programmable 241 Reverse phase A
Programmable 242 Forward phase B
Programmable 243 Reverse phase B
Programmable 244 Forward phase C
Programmable 245 Reverse phase C
Programmable 246 Forward Neutral
Programmable 247 Reverse Neutral
Programmable 248 Free
Programmable 249 Free
Programmable 250 79f-Reclos. Freq. Locked
Programmable 251 79f-Reclos.Freq. in service
Programmable 252 79f-Frequency recloser
Programmable 253 79f-Ongoing cycle frequency
Programmable 254 79f-Definitetrip Freq.
Programmable 255 79f-Instantaneous cancellation
Programmable 256 A and B side undervoltage pickup
Programmable 257 A side undervoltage pickup
Programmable 258 B side undervoltage pickup
Programmable 259 A and B side undervoltage trip
Programmable 260 Lack of synchronism
Programmable 261 Underfrequency Teleacoplator
Programmable 262 Overfrequency Teleacoplator
Programmable 263 Phase delay Teleacoplator
Programmable 264 Phase forward Teleacoplator
Programmable 265 Module dif. Teleacoplator
Programmable 266 Teleacoplator close command
Programmable 267 Teleacoplator operating
Programmable 268 Teleacoplator cancelled
Programmable 269 Teleacoplator not selected
Programmable 270 Earth restricted pickup
Programmable 271 Earth restricted trip
Programmable 272 Residual int. inst. pickup
Programmable 273 Residual int. time. pickup
Programmable 274 Residual int. inst. trip
Programmable 275 Residual int. time. trip
Programmable 276 Neutral 2 int. inst. pickup
Programmable 277 Neutral 2 int. time. pickup
Programmable 278 Neutral 2 int. inst. trip
Programmable 279 Neutral 2 int. time. trip
Programmable 280 Neutral 3 int. inst. pickup
Programmable 281 Neutral 3 int. time. pickup
Programmable 282 Neutral 3 int. inst. trip
Programmable 283 Neutral 3 int. time. trip
Programmable 284 Sensitive neutral inst pick up(High 1)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 258
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
ID-DNP (2) ID Signal
Programmable 285 Sensitive neutral inst trip (High 1)
Programmable 286 Dead zone pick up
Programmable 287 Dead zone trip
Programmable 288 On-going cycle 1
Programmable 289 On-going cycle 2
Programmable 290 On-going cycle 3
Programmable 291 On-going cycle 4
Programmable 292 Manual close security t.
Programmable 293 1st recloser security t.
Programmable 294 2nd recloser security t.
Programmable 295 3rd recloser security t.
Programmable 296 4th recloser security t.
Programmable 297 Table 1 active
Programmable 298 Table 2 active
Programmable 299 Table 3 active
Programmable 300 Table 4 active
Programmable 301 Recloser on standby
Programmable 302 Rear arch pick up (I)
Programmable 303 Rear arch trip(I)
Programmable 304 Arch phase A (I) pick up
Programmable 305 Arch phase B (I) pick up
Programmable 306 Arch phase C (I) pick up
Programmable 307 Arch phase A (I) trip
Programmable 308 Arch phase B (I) trip
Programmable 309 Arch phase C (I) trip
Programmable 310 Breaker failure (BF) in fault Retrip
Programmable 311 Retrip phase A
Programmable 312 Retrip phase B
Programmable 313 Retrip phase C
Programmable 314 BFpick up in load
Programmable 315 BF trip in load 2
Programmable 316 BF trip in load 1
Programmable 317 Load 1 trip phase A
Programmable 318 Load 1 trip phase B
Programmable 319 Load 1 trip phase C
XI.5.2 Analogue measurements
Vn is the programmed nominal current.
In is the unit’s rated current (in case of 1-5 A unified rated current it corresponds to 5 A)
DNP ID (2) DNP ID (1) Format
Program. 0 Counts
Program.
Program.
1
2
Counts
Counts
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
3
4
5
6
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Scale range
1.2*In (A)
3
3
*
V n
*V n
* 1.2
* 1.2
3
*V n
* 1.2
3
*V n
* 1.2
3
*V n
* 1.2
3
*V n
* 1.2
3
*V n
* 1.2
3
*V n
* 1.2
3
*V n
* 1.2
1.2*In (A)
1.2*In (A)
1.2*In (A)
1.2*In (A)
1.2*In (A)
3*V n
* 1.2 * 6
Data
Current maximeter
VSYNC module
VA module
VB module
VC module
VAVERAGE module
VAB (compound voltage) module
VBC (compound voltage) module
VCA (compound voltage) module
VCAVERAGE (compound voltage)
IA module
IB module
IC module
IAVERAGE module
IN module
P (Active power)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 259
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
DNP ID (2) DNP ID (1) Format
Program. 16 Counts
Program.
Program.
17
18
Counts
Counts
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
Program.
19
20
21
22
23
24
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Scale range
3*V
3*V n
* 1.2 * 6 n
* 1.2 * 6
70
70
0.3
3
*
V n
* 1.2
0.3
100 (º)
1.2*In (A)
Data
Q (Reactive power)
S (Apparent power)
Frequency
Syncrocheck Frequency
INS module
VN (neutral) module
Isolated Gnd module
Unit temperature
I residual module
The scale range indicated corresponds to the count number 4095.
(1) Up to firmware version D the positions of these measurements depend on the family we are working with. If we dispose of an IT family, for example, the first measurement will be the current maximeter, the second one will be for the IA module, and the third measurement will be for the IB module and so on until completing all the measurement that family has.
(2) From firmware version E on the transmitted signals and the order in which they are transmitted can be programmed among those available. The programming is carried out through the protection console SIPCON/P.
XI.5.3 Commands
DNP_ID (2) DNP_ID (1) Data
1 Activate relay 1
2
3
Activate relay 2
Activate relay 3
4
5
6
7
Activate relay 4
Activate relay 5
Activate relay 6
Activate relay 7
8
9
10
11
16
17
18
19
Activate relay 8
Activate relay 9
Activate relay 10
Activate relay 11
Open breaker
Close breaker
Set recloser in service
Set recloser out of service
50
51
52
53
35
36
48
49
54
55
27
32
33
34
20
24
25
26
Set in LOCAL mode
Activate table 1
Activate table 2
Activate table 3
Activate table 4
Initialize OPENING counter
Initialize RECLOSER counter
Initialize sigmaI2 Pole A
Initialize sigmaI2 Pole B
Initialize sigmaI2 Pole C
Output 1 permanent activation
Output 2 permanent activation
Output 3 permanent activation
Output 4 permanent activation
Output 5 permanent activation
Output 6 permanent activation
Output 7 permanent activation
Output 8 permanent activation
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 260
10BDNP 3.0 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
DNP_ID (2) DNP_ID (1) Data
56 Output 9 permanent activation
57
58
Output 10 permanent activation
Output 11permanent activation
64
65
66
67
Deactivate output 1
Deactivate output 2
Deactivate output 3
Deactivate output 4
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
Deactivate output 5
Deactivate output 6
Deactivate output 7
Deactivate output 8
Deactivate output 9
Deactivate output 10
Deactivate output 11
Up to firmware version D the commands are located in the fixed position that has been indicated.
From firmware version E on the commands to be sent and its order can be programmed.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 261
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XII. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
The communications module MODBUS RTU implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as slave station with a master position via the rear communication port (RS232, RS485 or Optical fibre).
XII.1. PROTOCOL CHARACTERISTICS
XII.1.1 Messages format
Master question:
Remote address
Function code
Data
CRC
-
-
-
-
1 byte
1 byte variable number of bytes
2 byte
Slave answer:
Remote address
Function code
Data
CRC
-
-
-
1 byte
1 byte variable number of bytes
2 byte
Remote address : PL300 address in respect to the Modbus protocol (range 1 to 255). Only broadcast messages are accepted (address 0) for synchronization with the function 16.
Function code : If >127 (Byte MSB at 1) means that the remote address has not fulfilled the required function and it is going to respond with an error code.
Data : Each data word is sent MSByte first, followed by LSByte.
CRC : LSByte is sent first, followed by MSByte.
CRC generator polynomy: x 16 + x 15 + x 2 +1
XII.1.2 MODBUS functions
The following functions are used within the defined by the MODBUS protocol:
03 – Read Setpoints and Actual Values
04 – Read Setpoints and Actual Values
(functions 03 and 04 are used without distinction)
05 – Execute Operation
07 – Read Device Status
08 – Loopback Test
16 – Store Multiple Setpoints
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 262
XII.1.3 Message examples
Function codes 03 and 04 – Read Setpoints and Actual Values
Reading of settings, digital status, measurements and counters.
Example :
Remote address : 01
Address : 0400 - Data : 00aa
Address : 0401 - Data : 00ff
Question ::
Description Bytes
Remote address -
Function code
Data address-
Data number -
CRC -
1 byte
1 byte
2 bytes
2 bytes
2 bytes
Answer :
Description
Remote address -
Function code -
Bytes counter -
Data1 -
Data2
CRC -
-
Bytes
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
2 bytes
2 bytes
2 byte
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Example (hex)
01
03
03 data address
08
00 Data number (words)
02 xx xx
Example (hex)
01
03
04 2 records = 4 bytes
00 Value in 0400 aa
00 Value in 0401 ff xx xx
Function 05 code – Execute Operation
Execute operation.
Example :
Remote address 01
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
263
Code operation : 01 (Command number 1)
Question :
Description Bytes
Remote address
Function code
Operation code
Operation range
CRC
1 byte
1 byte
2 byte
2 byte
2 byte
-
-
-
-
-
-
Answer :
Description
Remote address
Function code
Operation code
Value
CRC
Bytes
1 byte
1 byte
2 byte
2 byte
2 byte
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Function code 07 – Read Device Status
Reading of the protection status.
Question : :
Description
Remote address -
Function code -
CRC
Answer :
-
Description
Remote address -
Function code -
Status -
Bytes
1 byte
1 byte
2 byte
Bytes
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
-
-
-
-
-
-
Example (hex)
01
05
01 Command 1
00 ff Execute command
00 xx xx
Example (hex)
01
05
01 Command 1
00 ff Execute command
00 xx xx
Example (hex)
01
07 xx xx
Example (hex)
01
03
04
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
264
CRC - 2 byte
Function 08 code – Loopback Test
Link state test (communications).
Data
CRC
Question :
Description
Remote address
Function code
Code
Data -
-
CRC
Answer :
Description
-
Remote address -
Function code -
Code -
-
-
Bytes
1 byte
1 byte
2 byte
2 byte
2 byte
Bytes
1 byte
1 byte
2 byte
2 byte
2 byte
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- xx xx
Example (hex)
01
08
00 must be 0
00
00 must be 0
00 xx xx
Example (hex)
01
08
00 must be 0
00
00 must be 0
00 xx xx
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 265
Function 16 code – Read Setpoints and Actual Values
Writing of protection values
Example :
Remote address: 01
Address : 1000 - Data : 0144
Address : 1001 - Data : 0255
Question:
Description Bytes
Remote address -
Function code -
1 byte
1 byte
Data initial address - 2 bytes
Data number -
Bytes counter -
Data1 -
2 bytes
1 byte
2 bytes
Data2
CRC
-
-
2 bytes
2 bytes
Answer :
Description
Remote address -
Function code -
Bytes
1 byte
1 byte
Data initial address - 2 bytes
Data number - 2 bytes
CRC - 2 bytes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Example (hex)
01
10
10 Data address
00
00 Data number (words)
02
04 2 registers = 4 bytes
01 Value in 0400
44
02 Value in 0401
55 xx xx
Example (hex)
01
10
10 Data address
00
00 Data numbers (words)
02 xx xx
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 266
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
XII.1.4 Unit status request
It is made with function: 07 – Read Device Status
The unit status byte contains following information:
Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter
Bit 1 : Non critical error
Bit 2 : Critical error
Bit 3 : Protection in service
The same information can be obtained by reading the address 0009h.
XII.1.5 Change request of digital signals
There is a mechanism which allows collecting information of all digital signals changes along with the time instant when they occurred.
By reading the address 05000h it can be obtained the number of pending changes in the buffer.
From the address 05002h a buffer is available, where the 25 oldest unit changes can be read.
Once received a message of changes, writing the value 0 in the address 05001h the master position validates the changes sent in the message.
It is always demanded that the request comes with the initial address of the buffer of changes (05002h).
It is demanded that the number of words required is multiple of 5 (it must be read blocks of complete changes).
It can not be asked for more data than the buffer size or than the number of changes in queue (it means, if there is only one pending change, it is not possible to ask for two).
Given that the maximum number of words which can be sent in a message is 127 (limited for the field of number of bytes in 1 byte), the buffer of changes is sized to contain 25 changes.
25 changes * 5 words / change = 125 words. (250 bytes).
To know how many changes there are in a zone of changes reading it must be done a reading of the number of pending changes in the buffer through a reading of the address 05000h. In the low byte of the read register we will find the number of pending changes (which will be a number between 0 and 25) and in the byte 15 of the register it can be read the overflow indication of the changes in queue (for value 1 an overflow in the changes queue has occurred).
Afterwards, changes can be requested up to the maximum number previously indicated. To validate the changes received we must write the value 0 in the address 0501h through the function 16. This writing makes possible that the changes in the remote station are considered as sent; otherwise the remote station would consider them again as pending.
If the remote station had more changes that would be indicated in the value of the number of pending changes and the master station could request them by repeating the process.
To collect all the changes of the remote station, the process would have to continue until the reading of the pending changes indicates value 0.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 267
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
Structure format of a digital change :
Changes : IDC + Binary time
IDC :=
IDENTIF
CHANGE
CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}
:=
:=
UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}
with
E v
Res :=
V :=
<0> :=
<1> :=
:=
<0>
BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
BS 1[13] <0..1>
Valid status
Not valid status
BS 1[14] <0..1>
:=
<1> :=
:=
Status as "0" after the change
Status as "1" after the change
BS 1[15] <0..1> e
<0>
<1>
:=
:=
:=
The validation bit V has not changed
The validation bit V has changed
BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0> :=
<1> :=
The status bit E has not changed
The status bit E has changed
With these two bytes and by assigning a code for each signal, it is identified each digital signal of control which has suffered any change and which is transmitted with the control measurements, as well as what has changed in the digital signal and the status and validation after the change.
CP56Time2a:=CP56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2, Summer time, Day of the month, Day of the week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4}
This binary time is defined in the section 6.8 of the document IEC 870-5-4. The day of the week corresponding to value 1 is Sunday.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 268
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
The complete structure of the change has therefore the following format:
IDENFTIF e v E V Reserve IDENTIF
Milliseconds (LSByte)
Milliseconds (MSByte)
IV RES1 Minutes (6 bits)
SU RES2 HOURS (5 bits)
DAY WEEK (3 bits)
RES3
RES4 YEAR (7bits)
DAY OF THE MONTH (5 bits)
MES (4 bits)
XII.1.6 Data request by user map
The user map allows the non consecutive registers reading in a single message.
It has an address zone (from the address 0180h, 124 registers) and a values zone in the user map (from the address
0100h , 124 records).
In the address zone it must be written through the function 16 the addresses of those registers we wish to read.
Through the reading of the data zone it could be read the data whose addresses have been configured.
It could be read or written from any of the user map addresses, as long as the end of them is not exceeded.
It is demanded that the read addresses of the user map have associated a valid address in its address zone (this type of request is limited to the data zone: signals, Measurements and counters, addresses between the 0400 and the
0480h).
XII.1.7 Synchronization
From address 00f0h :
Address
00f0h
00f1h
00f2h
00f3h
MSB
Milliseconds
Hours
Month
-
LSB
Milliseconds
Minutes
Day
Year
The unit synchronization is made by function 16, writing on the address indicated and always the 4 words. It does not allow the partial writing of any data, the writing of the whole structure is always required.
The unit does not correct at all the received value, and that is why the central position will must take into account the delay communication channel to correct the value of the date and hour sent.
In such address it can be read as well the unit current time. It can be read any address as long as the range does not exceed over the address 00f3h.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 269
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
XII.1.8 Commands execution
The commands execution can be performed in two ways. With function 05 or with function 16.
To execute a command through function 05 to the value of the field “operation code” must be sent the command number and to the field “Operation value” must be sent the value 0xff00 (Execute command).
To execute a command through function 16, the command code must be written in the command address (0080h).
Only 1 register writing is accepted.
XII.1.9 Error codes
The unit can send following error codes in answer to a message:
01 - Non implemented function
02 - Illegal address in the data field (reserved address or non valid range for required operation)
03 -> Illegal data value
Causes for error code sending :
Reading function (03,04) :
More than 127 registers can not be read: 03 -> Illegal data value
Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field.
Number of data required exceeds the allowed range according to data type: 03 -> Illegal data value
Change request where the number of registers is not multiple of 5 or exceeds the number of changes data: 03 ->
Illegal data value
Data request through user map with a non configured or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
Writing function (16) :
- The bytes counter field does not correspond with field “registers number”: 03 -> Illegal data value
- Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
- Configuration of the user map with a reserved or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
XII.2. PARAMETERS
The following parameters can be accessible through keyboard/display:
Address of remote station : Address in respect to the protocol MODBUS/RTU.
Value between 1 and 255 (broadcast address 0 non admitted).
Baud rate : Value between 300 and 38400 bauds.
Parity : None, Odd or Even
Waiting time for the RTS activation: Waiting delay after receiving a message and before activating the RTS signal for transmission. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
Waiting time for carrier stabilisation: Waiting delay once activated the RTS signal before transmitting the first character of the message. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
For the case of RS485 this waiting delay is necessary and it must have a minimum value of 4 msec. Value between 0 and
1000 msec.
Waiting time to deactivation of RTS : Waiting delay after the transmission of a message and before deactivating the RTS signal. Value between 4 and 1000 msec.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 270
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
XII.3. UNIT ADDRESSES MAP
0008
0009
0080
00F0
00F1
00F2
Address
(hex) F
0000
0002
0003
0004
0005
0007
00F3
0100
017C
0400
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
0440
0441
0442
0443
0444
0445
0446
0447
..
045C
0540
0542
042C
042D
042F
0430
0431
0432
..
0446
04AA
04AC
0544
0546
..
0484
04AF
04B1
046E
05000 0500
05001 0501
05002 0502
057f
HF
057f
HF
0008
0009
0080
00F0
00F1
00F2
Address
(hex) E
0000
0002
0003
0004
0005
0007
00F3
0100
017C
0400
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
042A
042B
Description Range Step Unit Format Default value
Unit identification
Function (manufacturer internal code)
Rated current
Voltage
Frequency
Options
Communications
Software version
Protection status
Command address (Write Only)
Command code to execute
System date and Hour
Milliseconds 0-59999
0-24 / 0-59
0-12 / 0-31
Hours and Minutes
Month and Day
Year
User map
User map values (124 values)
User map addresses (124 values)
Reading zone
Digital status 1
0-99
Digital status 2
Digital status 3
Digital status 4
Digital status 5
Digital status 6
Digital status reserve (10 registers)
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
Measurement 1 (see "Measurements to control") -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
Measurement 2 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
F14
F15
F03
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
2 charact "84"
F04 "1"
F05
F06
F07
F08
"A"
"U"
"B0"
"4"
Measurement 3
Measurement 4
Measurement 5
Measurement 6
Measurement 7
Measurement 8
..
Measurements reserve
Counter 1
Counter 2
Counter 3
Counter 4
..
Counters reserve (40 registers, 20 counters)
Zone of status changes in digital signals
Number of changes waiting to be sent
Validation of the sent changes (Write Only))
Digital changes reading zone (125 registers)
Free memory zone
Free
Free
-4095 to 4095 1
-4095 to 4095 1
-4095 to 4095 1
Internal F21
Internal F21
-4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
-4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
-4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
.. ..
1
0-4294967295 1
0-4294967295 1
0-4294967295 1
0-4294967295 1
.. ..
1
0 ..25
0
Internal F21
..
F21
F02
F02
F02
F02
..
F02
F01
F01
F22
--
--
Up to firmaware version D:
Measurements starting from the address 0410h will be the the same as indicated to the Procome protocol (PL70 Instruction
Manual vol.1 pages 8.1 up to 8.4).
The value of the measurements sent can be found in internal units (value between –4095 and 4095). Each value will have associated a scale range which could permit obtaining the value in physical units.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 271
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
For more information about the available magnitudes as well as their scale ranges consult the section : Other Functions ->
Control Messages.
From firmware version E on:
The measurements found from 0410h address on will be those that have been programmed. The order in which they have been sent can also be programmed. The programming is carried out through SIPCON/P protection console. Up to 64 values are allowed.
The value of the sent measurements is locate din inner units (value can range between–4095 and 4095). Each value will have a background scale associated which allows obtaining its value in physical units.
In the same way, the digital status and the order in which they are sent can be programmed as well as the commands.
For more information about the available magnitudes as well as about their background scale, see the section: Other functions-> Control messages.
From firmware version F on
Change the addresses of measurements, counters and the change zone. As it can be seen in the table of address mapping, there are two columns:
Column Address(hex) F shows the addresses for the firmware versions from F on.
Column Address(hex) E shows the addresses for the firmware versions from E (inclusive) on.
XII.4. DATA FORMATS
F11
F12
F13
F14
Name
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
Format Description
16 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 65535
32 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 4294967295
16 bits 1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
ASCII 1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
16 bits without sign
16 bits without sign
1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
2 ascii characters (value in low byte of the register)
1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
Compacted bit (Bit to 1 activated indication)
Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter
Bit 1 : Non critical error
Bit 2 : Critical error
Bit 3 : Protection in service
Bit 4 to 15 : Non used
Value : Associated command
0 : Command 0
1 : Command 1
... n : Command n
16 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 59999
16 bits
Bit 0 to 7 : Minutes (Value between 0 and 59)
Bit 8 to 15 : Hours (Value between 0 and 23)
16 bits
16 bits
Bit 0 to 7 : Day (Value between 1 and 31)
Bit 8 to 15 : Month (Value between 1 and 12)
Bit 0 to 7 : Year (Value between 0 and 99)
Bit 8 to 15 : Value 0, non used
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 272
Name
F15 16 bits
F16
F17
F18
Format
16 bits
16 bits
16 bits
Description
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 0
Bit 1 : Digital signal 1
Bit 2 : Digital signal 2
Bit 3 : Digital signal 3
Bit 4 : Digital signal 4
Bit 5 : Digital signal 5
Bit 6 : Digital signal 6
Bit 7 : Digital signal 7
Bit 8 : Digital signal 8
Bit 9 : Digital signal 9
Bit 10 : Digital signal 10
Bit 11 : Digital signal 11
Bit 12 : Digital signal 12
Bit 13 : Digital signal 13
Bit 14 : Digital signal 14
Bit 15 : Digital signal 15
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 16
Bit 1 : Digital signal 17
Bit 2 : Digital signal 18
Bit 3 : Digital signal 19
Bit 4 : Digital signal 20
Bit 5 : Digital signal 21
Bit 6 : Digital signal 22
Bit 7 : Digital signal 23
Bit 8 : Digital signal 24
Bit 9 : Digital signal 25
Bit 10 : Digital signal 26
Bit 11 : Digital signal 27
Bit 12 : Digital signal 28
Bit 13 : Digital signal 29
Bit 14 : Digital signal 30
Bit 15 : Digital signal 31
Compacted bit (Bit for 1activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 32
Bit 1 : Digital signal 33
Bit 2 : Digital signal 34
Bit 3 : Digital signal 35
Bit 4 : Digital signal 36
Bit 5 : Digital signal 37
Bit 6 : Digital signal 38
Bit 7 : Digital signal 39
Bit 8 : Digital signal 40
Bit 9 : Digital signal 41
Bit 10 : Digital signal 42
Bit 11 : Digital signal 43
Bit 12 : Digital signal 44
Bit 13 : Digital signal 45
Bit 14 : Digital signal 46
Bit 15 : Digital signal 47
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 48
Bit 1 : Digital signal 49
Bit 2 : Digital signal 50
Bit 3 : Digital signal 51
Bit 4 : Digital signal 52
Bit 5 : Digital signal 53
Bit 6 : Digital signal 54
Bit 7 : Digital signal 55
Bit 8 : Digital signal 56
Bit 9 : Digital signal 57
Bit 10 : Digital signal 58
Bit 11 : Digital signal 59
Bit 12 : Digital signal 60
Bit 13 : Digital signal 61
Bit 14 : Digital signal 62
Bit 15 : Digital signal 63
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
273
Name Format
F19 16 bits
F20 16 bits
F21 16 bits
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
Description
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 64
Bit 1 : Digital signal 65
Bit 2 : Digital signal 66
Bit 3 : Digital signal 67
Bit 4 : Digital signal 68
Bit 5 : Digital signal 69
Bit 6 : Digital signal 70
Bit 7 : Digital signal 71
Bit 8 : Digital signal 72
Bit 9 : Digital signal 73
Bit 10 : Digital signal 74
Bit 11 : Digital signal 75
Bit 12 : Digital signal 76
Bit 13 : Digital signal 77
Bit 14 : Digital signal 78
Bit 15 : Digital signal 79
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 80
Bit 1 : Digital signal 81
Bit 2 : Digital signal 82
Bit 3 : Digital signal 83
Bit 4 : Digital signal 84
Bit 5 : Digital signal 85
Bit 6 : Digital signal 86
Bit 7 : Digital signal 87
Bit 8 : Digital signal 88
Bit 9 : Digital signal 89
Bit 10 : Digital signal 90
Bit 11 : Digital signal 91
Bit 12 : Digital signal 92
Bit 13 : Digital signal 93
Bit 14 : Digital signal 94
Bit 15 : Digital signal 95
Analogical value (value in internal units)
MEA:=CP 16{OV, ER, Res, VALUE, S} with OV:=BS 1[1] not used always <0>)
ER:=BS 1[2] <0..1>
<0>:=VALUE valid
<1>:=VALUE not valid
Res:=BS 1[3] not used (always <0>)
VALUE:= F 12[4..15] <0..+1-2-12>
S:=BS 1[16]
<0>:=VALUE positive
<1>:=VALUE negative
The overflow bit (Overflow, OV) is not used and is set to "0". In the event of
VALUE overflow this is set to its maximum positive value, 4095. The maximum
VALUE can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the nominal value.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 274
Name Format
F22 80 bits
11BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
Description
Digital change structure (5 words)
IDC + Binary time
Byte 0..1: Change identifier
IDC:=CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}
IDENTIF:=UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
CHANGE:=BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e} with Res:=
V:=
BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
<0> :=
E:=
BS 1[13] <0..1>
<1> :=
BS 1[14] <0..1>
Valid state
Non-valid state v:=
<0>
<1>
BS 1[15] <0..1>
<0>
<1>
:=
:=
:=
:=
State at "0" after the change
State at "1" after the change
Validation bit V has not changed
Validation bit V has changed e:= BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0>
<1>
:=
:=
Byte 2..8: Binary time in 7 octets.
State bit E has not changed
State bit E has changed
CP56Time2a:=CP 56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours,
Res2,Summer schedule, Day of the month, Day of the week, Month, Res3, Year,
Res4}
Byte 9 : Not used
(For more details consult the section about request of digital signal changes)
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 275
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XIII. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
The IEC870-5-103 communication module, implemented within the unit, allows the communication, as a slave station, with a master position through the communication rear connector (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre)
XIII.1. 870-5-103 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FUNCTION
The module implements the communication protocol based on the IEC60870-5-103 in order to communicate with a primary centre which has the IEC60870-5-103 protocol implemented. Its aim consists of collecting disturbance recorders, protection signals and measurements as well as receiving orders and commands.
The transmission and reception mesh format are set to the FT1.2 mesh format defined in the section 6.2.4.2. of standard
IEC 870-5-1.
The format per character is:
1 start. bit
8 information. bits
1 parity bit, selectable between without parity or even parity.
1 stop bit, selectable between 1, and 2 stop bit
The baud rate will be selected among 600,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.
The communication is carried through the communication rear (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre).
In the same way the following functions are implemented:
Initialization.
Clock synchronization
General question
General commands.
Perturbation data transmission
The implemented functions are explained in the document IEC870-5-103 (Draft of FDIS 28.02.97). The application layer is based on the international standards IEC 870-5-3 (General structure of application data), IEC 870-5-4 (Definition and codification of application information elements), IEC 870-5-5 (Application basic functions).
The basic ASDUS implemented are described in the document IEC870-5-103 and they are the following ones:
ASDUs Compatible in Secondary to Primary direction:
<1> Message with time label.
<2> Message with time label and relative time.
<5> Identification.
<6> Clock synchronization
<8> General question end
<9> Measurements II. With variable measurement number
<23> List of stored perturbations
<26> List of stored perturbations
<27> List of stored perturbations
<28> Ready for digital signal transmission
<29> Digital signal transmission
<30> Transmission of perturbation values
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 276
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
<31> Transmission end
ASDUs Compatible in Primary to Secondary Direction
<6> Clock synchronization
<7> General question start
<20> General commands
<24> Transmission of perturbation data order.
<25> Transmission of perturbation data acknowledge
XIII.2. SETTINGS
Associate text
UCL ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
Meaning
It allows the identification of the remote station number. Value between 0 and 254.
Default value 1.
This word- type parameter allows fixing the baud rate: 600 – 1200 – 2400 – 4800 – 9600 – 19200
- 38400) bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows selecting the type of parity to be used in the transmission. Even, odd or without parity
Advisable default value is even, as shown in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
STOP BITS
RTS ACT TIME
CARRIER TIME.
RTS DEACT TIME
SENDING FORMAT
It allows the selection of stop bits. 1 or 2 stop bits.
Advisable default value is 1 stop bit as shown in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
RTS. activation waiting time. Waiting timing after receiving the message and before activating the
RTS signal for the transmission. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Carrier stabilization waiting time. Waiting timing once the RTS signal is activated and before transmitting the message first character. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
RTS. deactivation waiting time. Waiting timing after transmitting the message and before deactivating the RTS signal. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Sending format: Compatible or extended. 0->compatible VDEW. 1->Private extended range.
In compatible format:
Only control signals configured as compatible are sent
Only three measurements are sent in the measurement ASDU
Only command configured as compatible are accepted
For the correct operating of the perturbation data request function , it must be connected with the Procome console through the front port and in the 'Oscillo Configuration' screen, in the section 'OSCILLO COMMUNICATION MODE', the section between the following data is allowed:
-->25.
-->maximum
25 must be selected
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 277
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
XIII.3. CONTROL SIGNALS
The control signals are shown in the table below:
36
37
38
39
40
32
33
34
35
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
18
19
20
21
22
23
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
41
42
43
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
PROCOME SIGNAL
0
1
2
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
160
0
160
160
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
160
160
0
135
135
TYP
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
33
34
35
85
0
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
90
92
23
24
17
18
19
20
21
22
15
16
91
93
11
12
13
14
0
36
37
4
5
6
INF
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INVERTED
0
0
0
278
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
TYP
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
160
160
135
135
135
135
135
PROCOME SIGNAL
44
83
84
85
86
79
80
81
82
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
87
88
89
90
91
92
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
69
70
INF
38
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
67
68
69
70
63
64
65
66
79
80
81
82
83
84
51
52
53
54
47
48
49
50
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
16
58
59
60
55
56
57
18
61
62
GI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
INVERTED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
279
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
TYP
135
135
135
135
135
135
160
160
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
160
160
135
135
135
135
135
135
0
136
136
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
PROCOME SIGNAL
93
94
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
136
137
138
139
140
141
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
INF
85
86
117
118
119
120
84
68
121
122
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
123
124
17
36
125
126
0
31
32
99
95
96
97
98
91
92
93
94
87
88
89
90
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GI
1
1
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INVERTED
0
0
280
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
TYP
135
135
135
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
0
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
PROCOME SIGNAL
142
143
144
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
185
186
187
188
189
190
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
INF
127
128
129
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
161
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
0
162
163
164
165
166
167
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GI
1
1
1
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INVERTED
0
0
0
281
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
0
0
135
135
0
0
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
0
0
0
0
0
0
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
0
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
TYP
135
135
135
135
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
234
235
236
237
238
239
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
PROCOME SIGNAL
191
192
193
194
0
0
202
203
0
0
204
205
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
0
0
0
0
0
0
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
172
173
174
0
175
176
177
178
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
INF
168
169
170
171
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GI
1
1
1
1
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INVERTED
0
0
0
0
282
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
0
0
0
0
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
0
0
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
TYP
135
135
135
135
135
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
283
284
285
286
287
288
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
261
262
263
264
265
266
PROCOME SIGNAL
240
241
242
243
244
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
247
0
0
0
0
248
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
211
212
213
0
0
214
215
216
225
226
227
228
229
230
INF
206
207
208
209
210
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
GI
1
1
1
1
1
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INVERTED
0
0
0
0
0
283
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
PROCOME SIGNAL
289
290
291
292
293
294
TYP
135
135
136
136
136
136
136
136
160
160
160
160
136
0
0
INF
249
250
1
2
3
4
25
26
7
0
0
5
6
23
24
GI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
INVERTED
0
0
0
0
0
0
PROCOME SIGNAL: It indicates the corresponding Procome signal number (see list of Procome signals in order to identify each signal) among those of the unit.
TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
GI: It indicates if the signal is included in the response to a general question. If this option is not selected, the changes generated by the signals are only of activation.
INVERTED: It inverts the signal states.
Warning :
Up to firmaware version D, the order of the signals is the one shown in the previous table.
From firmaware version E on, the control signals can be configured according to the console screen:
BD SIGNAL: It allows the selection of the control signal among those existing in the unit.
TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
GI: It indicates if the signal is included in the response to a general question. i.e. this option ios not selected, the changes generated by the signal are only activation changes.
REVERSE: It reverses the state of a signal.
XIII.4. CONTROL ANALOGUE MEASUREMENTS
Up to firmaware version D, the control analogue measurements are sent in the same order as those sent in the Procome protocol with the following private profile:
FUN: 150
INF: 135
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 284
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
From firmaware version E on, the analogue measurements can be configured according to the console screen:
BD MEASUREMENT: it allows selecting a measurement from the data base.
NUMBER: It indicates the position of the measurements in the ASDU.
This table is only valid when the setting SENDING FORMAT is in EXTENDED.
XIII.5. COMMANDS
Up to firmware version D, the commands are fixed accordig to the following table:
Order
Open breaker
Close breaker
Recloser ON
Recloser OFF
Remote state
Local state
Relay in service
Relay out of service
LED reset
Activation Table 1
Activation Table 2
Activation Table 3
Activation Table 4
Activation Output 1
Activation Output 2
Activation Output 3
Activation Output 4
Activation Output 5
Activation Output 6
Activation Output 7
Activation Output 8
Activation Output 9
Activation Output 10
Activation Output 11
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
160
160
160
130
130
130
130
160
160
160
160
160
160
TYP
130
130
160
160
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2
3
4
24
25
26
1
17
17
18
18
19
23
INF
12
13
16
16
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
DCO
2
2
2
1
Order: Action to carry out
TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
DCO: Allows selecting between On and Off
From firmware version E on, the commands can be configured according to the console screen:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 285
BD ORDER: Allows selecting an order of the BD
TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
DCO: Allows selecting between On and Off
12BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 286
13BGESTEL PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XIV. GESTEL PROTOCOL
Gestel communication module implemented in the protection unit (only in SC and CT families) allows the communication as slave station with a master centre through the independent rear communication connector (COM-1).
The unit disposes of some setting in order to configure this communication.
Setting
Remote number
Baud rate
Parity
CTS (hund. second) 0
Channel type
Carrier activ. T. (hund. second) 0
Min.
1
600
Delta 1 hund. second)
Delta 4 hund. second)
Logic address E.R.
Alarm priority E.R.
0
0
1
Alarm priority E.R. when starting
No. of changes of signal
2
No. of changes of signal reactivat. 1
500
500
255
100
100
Max.
255
9600
500
500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1 discrete
Notes
bauds
NO/TORQUE/ODD
NORMAL/(RTC-GSM)
YES/NO
YES/NO
Where:
CTS is the maximum waiting time to the CTS activation, from the activation of RTS and before cancelling the message transmission.
Carrier activation time is the timing of the carrier from the moment the RTS is activated until transmission starts in hundredths of seconds.(0<= <=500).
It is not taken into account in the case of GSM transmission.
Delta 1 is the waiting time after the reception of the last character and before activating the RTS, in hundredths of seconds.( 0<=
<=500).
The following values are recommended depending on the baud rate:
600 bauds - 4 hundredth of sec.
1200 bauds - 3 hundredth of sec.
2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds - 2 hundredth of sec.
It is not taken into account in the case of communication via GSM..
Delta 4 is the waiting time after the reception of the last character and before activating the RTS, in hundredths of seconds.( 0<=
<=500).
The following values are recommended depending on the baud rate:
600 bauds - 4 hundredth of sec.
1200 bauds - 3 hundredth of sec.
2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds - bauds - 2 hundredth of sec.
It is not taken into account in the case of communication via GSM.
Remote state logic address: It can be equal or different to the remote number setting. It is used for the message treatment
PET_ALARMS_GROUP.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 287
13BGESTEL PROTOCOL
Alarm Priority in the remote station. At NO it shows that the PET_ALARMS_GROUP message is never treated. AT YES, it shows the possibility of treating it according to the PAG control state of group alarm response that can be activated or deactivated from the centre.
Alarm priority in the remote station when starting. (NO/YES).
It is only taken into account if the alarm priority in remote station is YES. If it is at NO, it indicates that when starting, the functionality of response to the alarm message of group is deactivated. At YES it indicates that when starting the functionality of response to the alarm message of group is activated.
The 3 following settings standardize the signal activation/deactivation logic:
Activation/deactivation time span (signals).
Number of signal deactivation changes
Number of signal reactivation changes
The logic operation is as follows:
If, during the set “time span”, a signal carries out a number of changes equal or higher than the programmed “number of signal deactivation changes”, this signal changes into the state defined in the Gestel protocol as “Inhibited Alarm”.
If, during a set “time span”, the number of changes carried out by the deactivated signal is equal or lower than the programmed “number of signal reactivation changes”, this signal is reactivated (changes from the “Inhibited Alarm” state to its real state) at the end of this “time span”.
If it is the case that, in a deactivated signal, the number of changes carried out by this signal is higher than the set one in the
“number of changes of signal reactivation” the signal keeps active.
Besides, there are some settings for the communication via modem:
Setting
Modem configuration chain
First telephone number
Second telephone number
Waiting time alarm gen. (hsec.)
Connection max stable T. (hsec.)
Wait. max T. after hanging up RTU(hsec)
N1 retry T. after N2 (min.)
Modem silence inc. T. (min.)
Spont. break existence
Control master channel initial st.
Below the functionality of these settings is explained.:
0
0
0
0
0
Min Max
500
500
500
500
500 1
1
1
1
1
Step
Modem configuration chain: Example: AT B0 E0 Q0 X1 V1.
It admits up to 30 alphanumerical characters, and the chain must finish with the character ‘.’.
Notes
Maximum 30 characters
Maximum 30 characters
Maximum 30 characters
M/E – M/M
First telephone number call chain.
It admits up to 30 alphanumerical characters, and the chain must finish with the character ‘.’.
First telephone number to phone in case of changes / Alarms in the signals configured for that purpose. Example of chain that would go in the parameter N1: ATDP0,915556677. 0 is used to be able to phone through a switchboard by carrying out a pause and the `P` in order to call by pulses.
Second telephone number call chain.
It admits up to 30 alphanumerical characters, and the chain must finish with the character ‘.’.
Second telephone number to phone in case of failure in the connection through the first one. The attempt of this call will be always after an unsuccessful connection in N1. Example of N2 chain: ATDT44432 where `T` is used in order to dial he tones and the 44432 is an internal number of the switchboard.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 288
13BGESTEL PROTOCOL
Time from the moment the change/alarm is generated in the remote station up to the call is carried out (N1 or N2 sending to the modem) in hundredths of seconds. (i.e.. 200 hund. Sec.).
Maximum time for connection set up in seconds, that is, the time elapsing from the moment the call is carried out to the moment the modem sends a successful connection (i.e. 45 seconds).
Waiting maximum time before hanging up the RTU in seconds, that is, the time elapsing once the connection is set up without no message interchanging between the SCADA and the Remote. (i.e. 25 seconds).
Time of reattempts to phone N1 once the previous attempt over N1 and N2 has failed. Time in minutes. (i.e. 4 minutes).
Silence increasing time before resending the configuration to the modem from the moment nothing is received by the modem, that is, the time to wait until reconfiguring the modem, because it may have had some problems (loss of configuration, off, on, etc). For a correct operation, the value of this time must be approximately 2*Time from the moment the change/alarm is
generated in the remote station up to the call is carried out + the highest value of Time of reattempts to phone N1 or Maximum
time of connection set up. It must be that way in order not to configure the modem when a call is being carried out and that at least one reattempt has been carried out. Time in minutes. (i.e. 10 minutes).
Spontaneous breaking existence or Master/ Master protocol, that is, if the remote behaves like a M/M or like a M/E.
Initial state of the Master Control channel or of spontaneous breaking, that is when the control channel is active (I2 at value 1) and the previous parameter is defined as M/M, the remote will carry out the calls as long as the signal suffers the change or the alarm is configured for that purpose. Otherwise, (I2 at value 0) calls will not be carried out.
XIV.1. TYPICAL VALUES FOR THE COMMUNICATION VIA GSM
Below there is a presentation with the communication setting with which the units leave the factory. These settings are right for the remote communication via GSM modem.
Value
230
2400 bauds
NO
12
RTC-GSM
0
0
0
1
NO
NO
AT B0 E0 Q0 X1 V1.
ATDP44222.
ATDP44515.
200
45
25
4
10
M/M
If M/M it calls
Signal table (Gestel protocol)
Setting
Remote number
Baud rate
Parity
CTS (hund. second)
Channel type
Carrier activ. T. (hund. second)
Delta 1 hund. second)
Delta 4 hund. second)
Logic address E.R.
Alarm priority E.R.
Alarm priority E.R. when starting
Modem configuration chain
First telephone number
Second telephone number
Waiting time alarm gen. (hsec.)
Connection max stable T. (hsec.)
Waiting max T. after hanging up RTU
N1 retry after N2 T. (min.)
Modem silence inc. T. (min.)
Spont. break existence
Control master channel initial st.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 289
13BGESTEL PROTOCOL
Module
0
3
5
6
Description
Digital inputs
Analogue inputs
Digital outputs
Digital outputs
SC family disposes in the way it is seen in the upper table of four data modules, one for digital inputs, another one for analogue inputs and two more for digital inputs or telecontrol commands.
Module 0 (digital input)
Free
Free
Breaker locking
State 52
Local state/Telecommand
Voltage presence
Free
Urgent Fault
Fault passover detection
Automation
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
5
Point
1
2
Module 3 (analogue inputs)
Voltage
Current
Point
1
2
Note: the current input is the mean of the two phase currents (phase A and phase C) in primary values.
Point
1
2
3
4
Module 5 (digital outputs)
Activate automations
Deactivate automations
Close
Open
Module 6 (digital outputs)
Activate output 1
Activate output 2
Activate output 3
Activate output 4
Activate output 5
Activate output 6
Activate output 7
Activate output 8
Activate output 9
Activate output 10
Activate output 11
Note: the point numeration starts in 1 ends in 16 for each module.
3
4
5
6
Point
1
2
7
8
9
10
11
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 290
13BGESTEL PROTOCOL
From firmware version E on, the tables of signals, measurements and orders can be configured through the SIPCON/P protection console.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 291
14BPID1 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XV. PID1 PROTOCOL
Gestel communication module implemented in the protection unit (only in SC and CT families) allows the communication as slave station with a master centre through the independent rear communication connector (COM-1).
The unit disposes of some setting in order to configure this communication.
Setting
Remote number
Baud rate
Parity
CTS (hund. second)
Channel type
Carrier activ. T. (hund. second)
Delta 1 hund. second)
Delta 4 hund. second)
Meas. Change level
Line silence .activ T (sec)
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signal change T.(min.)
Synchron. permis. central center
0
0
0
7
120
0
0
0
Min.
1
600
500
4095
300
1024
1500
Max.
255
9600
500
500
500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1 discrete
Notes
bauds
NO/TORQUE/ODD
NORMAL/(RTC-GSM)
YES/NO
YES/NO
Where:
CTS is the maximum waiting time to the CTS activation, from the activation of RTS and before cancelling the message transmission.
Carrier activation time is the timing of the carrier from the moment the RTS is activated until transmission starts in hundredths of seconds.(0<= <=500).
It is not taken into account in the case of GSM transmission.
Delta 1
is the waiting time after the reception of the last character and before activating the RTS, in hundredths of seconds.(
0<= <=500).
The following values are recommended depending on the baud rate:
600 bauds - 4 hundredth of sec.
1200 bauds - 3 hundredth of sec.
2400,4800 and 9600 bauds - 2 hundredth of sec.
It is not taken into account in the case of communication via GSM..
Delta 4 is the waiting time after the reception of the last character and before activating the RTS, in hundredths of seconds.( 0<=
<=500).
The following values are recommended depending on the baud rate:
600 bauds - 4 hundredth of sec.
1200 bauds - 3 hundredth of sec.
2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds - bauds - 2 hundredth of sec.
It is not taken into account in the case of communication via GSM.
Measurement change level.
If the measurement suffers a change higher than this parameter value, it is registered as measurement change.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 292
14BPID1 PROTOCOL
Change general request.
It shows that the change general request is used or not-
Reliability signal address
Parameter indicating the reliability signal address.
Reliability signal change time.
Parameter indicating how often (in minutes) a change in the reliability signal is sent. At a value zero no change is sent.
Synchronization permission central centre.
It allows or it inhibits the time synchronization from telecommand.
Besides, there are some settings for the communication via modem:
Setting
Modem configuration chain
First telephone number
Second telephone number
Waiting time alarm gen. (hsec.)
Connection max stable T. (hsec.)
Waiting max T. after hanging up RTU
N1 retry after N2 T. (min.)
Modem silence inc. T. (min.)
Spont. Break existence
Control master channel initial st
Tiempo máximo de llamada (min.)
No. or retries change request
Change request waiting T. (sec.)
Min. T between change requests (sec.)
Below the functionality of these settings is explained:
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Min
500
1440
10
Max
3000
500
500
500
Modem configuration chain. Example: AT B0 E0 Q0 X1 V1.
It admits up to 30 alphanumerical characters, the chain must be finished with the character ‘.’.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step Notes
Max. 30 characters
Max. 30 characters
Max. 30 characters
M/E – M/M
First telephone number call chain.
It admits up to 30 alphanumerical characters, the chain must be finished with the character ‘.’.
First telephone number to phone in case of changes / Alarms in the signals configured for that purpose. Example of chain that would go in the parameter N1: ATDP0,915556677. 0, is used to be able to phone through a switchboard by carrying out a pause and the `P` in order to call by pulses.
Second telephone number call chain.
It admits up to 30 alphanumerical characters, and the chain must finish with the character ‘.’.
First telephone number to phone in case of failure in the connection through the first one. The attempt of this call will be always after an unsuccessful connection in N1. Example of N2 chain:ATDT44432 where `T` is used in order to dial he tones and the
44432 is an internal number of the switchboard.
Time from the moment the change/alarm is generated in the remote station up to the call is carried out (N1 or N2 sending to the modem) in hundredths of seconds. (i.e.. 200 hund. Sec.).
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 293
14BPID1 PROTOCOL
Maximum time for connection set up in seconds, that is, the time elapsing from the moment the call is carried out to the moment the modem sends a successful connection (i.e. 45 seconds).
Waiting maximum time before hanging up the RTU in seconds, that is, the time elapsing once the connection is set up without no message interchanging between the SCADA and the Remote. (i.e. 25 seconds).
Time of reattempts to phone N1 once the previous attempt over N1 and N2 has failed. Time in minutes. (i.e. 4 minutes).
Silence increasing time before resending the configuration to the modem from the moment nothing is received by the modem, that is, the time to wait until reconfiguring the modem, because it may have had some problems (loss of configuration, off, on, etc). For a correct operation, the value of this time must be approximately 2*Time from the moment the change/alarm is
generated in the remote station up to the call is carried out + the highest value of Time of reattempts to phone N1 or Maximum
time of connection set up. It must be that way in order not to configure the modem when a call is being carried out and that at least one reattempt has been carried out. Time in minutes. (i.e. 10 minutes).
Spontaneous breaking existence or Master/ Master protocol, that is, if the remote behaves like a M/M or like a M/E.
Initial state of the Master Control channel or of spontaneous breaking, that is when the control channel is active (I2 at value 1) and the previous parameter is defined as M/M, the remote will carry out the calls as long as the signal suffers the change or the alarm is configured for that purpose. Otherwise, (I2 at value 0) calls will not be carried out.
Call maximum time. Parameter indicating the maximum duration of the call (in minutes).
Number of attempts of change request. Number of attempts of the request for change demand.
Waiting time for change requests. Waiting time in seconds for the change demand from the Central Centre after having sent the change demand request, before carrying out a new request (attempt).
Minimum time between change requests. Minimum time in seconds between the change demand request, when the previous request, after the attempts specified in “Number of attempts of change request”, has not been attended by the Central centre.
XV.1. RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONS
Below there are two possible typical configurations of the settings of PID1 protocol. First configuration refers to a communication via radio or direct to the Central Centre and the second one to a remote communication via telephone.
The unit leaves the factory with the settings referred to the communication master-slave via telephone.
XV.2. MASTER-SLAVE COMMUNICATION VIA NON-TELEPHONE
Setting
Remote number
Baud rate
Parity
CTS (hund. second)
Channel type
Carrier activ. T. (hund. second)
Delta 1 hund. second)
Delta 4 hund. second)
Meas. Change level
Line silence .activ T (sec
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signal change T.(min.)
Synchron. permis. Central center
1
2
0
120
YES
0
1
YES
Value
230
1200
ODD
0
NORMAL
1
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 294
Setting
Modem configuration chain
First telephone number
Second telephone number
Waiting time alarm gen. (hsec.)
Connection max stable T. (hsec.)
Waiting max T. after hanging up RTU
N1 retry after N2 T. (min.)
Modem silence inc. T. (min.)
Spont. Break existence
Control master channel initial st
Call max. time (min.)
No. or retries change request
Change request waiting T. (sec.)
Mini. T between change requests (sec.)
XV.3. TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
Setting
Remote number
Baud rate
Parity
CTS (hund. second)
Channel type
Carrier activ. T. (hund. second)
Delta 1 hund. second)
Delta 4 hund. second)
Meas. Change level
Line silence .activ T (sec
Change general request
Reliability signal address
Reliability signal change T.(min.)
Synchron. permis. Central centre
Modem configuration chain
First telephone number
Second telephone number
Waiting time alarm gen. (hsec.)
Connection max stable T. (hsec.)
Waiting max T. after hanging up RTU
N1 retry after N2 T. (min.)
Modem silence inc. T. (min.)
Spont. Break existence
Control master channel initial st
Call max. time (min.)
No. or retries change request
ATD77155.
ATD77221.
3000
60
60
4
25
M/M
M/M
6
1
4
0
120
YES
0
1
YES
AT.
Master/Slave
230
9600 bauds
NO
0
RTC/GSM
1
4
6
1
5
20
4
25
M/E
M/E
Value
AT.
ATD77155.
ATD77221.
3000
60
60
60
4
25
M/E
ATD77155.
ATD77221.
3000
60
M/E
6
1
4
0
120
YES
0
1
YES
AT.
Master/Master
230
9600 bauds
NO
0
RTC/GSM
1
4
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
14BPID1 PROTOCOL
295
14BPID1 PROTOCOL
Setting
Change request waiting T. (sec.)
Mini. T between change requests (sec.)
Master/Slave
5
20
Master/Master
5
20
XV.4. SIGNAL TABLE (PID1 PROTOCOL)
As it can be seen in tables below, the SC family disposes of digital inputs, analogue inputs apart from some commands.
Digital inputs
Reserve
Reserve
Breaker locking
State 52
Local state/Telecommand
Voltage presence
Free
Urgent Fault
Fault passover detection
Automation
4
5
6
7
Point
1
2
3
8
9
10
Analogue inputs
Voltage
Point
1
Current 2
Note: the current input is the mean of the two phase currents (phase A and phase C) in primary values.
Digital outputs
Automation ON
Automation OFF
Close
Open
Activate output 1
Activate output 2
Activate output 3
Activate output 4
Activate output 5
Activate output 6
Activate output 7
Activate output 8
Activate output 9
Activate output 10
Activate output 11
Note: the point numeration starts in 1 ends in 16 for each module.
e
24
25
26
27
28
20
21
22
23
Point
2
3
4
5
18
19
From firmware version E on, the tables of signals, measurements and orders can be configured through the SIPCON/P protection console.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 296
15BSAP20 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XVI. SAP20 PROTOCOL
The SAP20 communication module implemented in the PL70 protection unit (SC and CT family) allows the communication as slave station with a master centre through the independent communication rear connector (COM-1).
The unit has some setting to configure this communication.
In the “Default value” column the values recommended for SAP20 communication via MODEM-RADIO are shown.
Setting
Number of the remote
Baud rate
CTS (hund. second)
Carrier Act. T. (hund. second)
Delta 1 (hund. second)
Delta 4 (hund. second)
No. of changes signal deactivation
Signal Act/Deact Time Span (sec)
No. of changes signal reactivation
0
0
0
2
Min.
1
600
0
1
1
Max.
254
9600
500
500
500
500
100
300
100
1
1
1
1
Steps
1
Notes
discretes bauds
1
1
1
25
4
4
15
Default value
1
600
25
30
5 where:
CTS is the maximum waiting time for the CTS activation, from the RTS activation, and before anulating the message transmission.
Carrier activation time is the carrier time delay from the RTS activation until the transmission starts, in hundredths of seconds.
(0<= <=500).
Delta 1: It is the waiting time after the reception the last character, before the activation of the RTS, in hundredths of seconds.
(0<= <=500).
The following values are recommended regardingthe baud rate:
600 bauds - 4 Hund. seconds
1200 bauds - 3 Hund. seconds
2400,4800 and 9600 bauds - 2 Hund. seconds
In the case of communication via GSM, the followiing is not taken into account.
Delta 4 : IT is the waiting time after the reception the last character, before the deactivation of the RTS, in hundredths of seconds.( 0<= <=500).
The following values are recommended according to the baud rate:
600 bauds - 4 Hund. seconds
1200 bauds - 3 Hund. seconds
2400,4800 and 9600 bauds - 2 Hund. seconds
The following three settings parameterize the activation/deactivation logic of signals:
Activation/deactivation time span (seconds).
Number of signal deactivation changes
Number of signal reactivation changes
The operation of the logic is as follows:
If during a set “time spam” a signal carries out s number of changes equal or higher than the programmed “number of signal deactivation changes”, this signal changes to definite state in SAP20 protocol as “Inhibited alarm”.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 297
15BSAP20 PROTOCOL
If during a set “time spam” the number of changes carried out by the deactive signal i s lower or equal to the programmed
“number of signal reactivation changes”, the the signal changes into reactivation (change from “Inhibited alarm” state to its real state) at the end of this “time spam”.
In the case the number of changes carried out by a deactivated signal is higher tan the one set in the “number of signal reactivation changes” the signal remains deactive.
XVI.1. SIGNAL TABLE (SAP20 PROTOCOL)
SC and CT families have, as it seen in the tables showed below, digital and analogue inputs apart from some orders. So these telecontrol orders to be effective, remember that the local/telecommand input must be active so as the protections to attend the orders.
The order of the digital inputs (signals), analogue inputs as well as the digital outputs (orders) inside each module is configurable through the SIPCON console.
IMPORTANT: Enter the SAP20 number in a consecutive way and without any jump, for each type of element.
The order predefined in tne factory is as follows:
Digital inputs
Local State
Urgent default
Closed breaker
Switch onto fault
Definite trip
Recloser
Protection in service
Breaker locking
Voltage presence
7
8
9
3
4
5
6
POINT
1
2
PL70 RC
Pushbutton (L/R)
NOT DI4 or NOT DI5 or NOT DI6
DI1
Internal signal
Internal signal
Pushbutton r (A/M) or Command
Pushbutton (R) or Command
DI7
Internal signal
Analogue inputs
(1)
POINT PL70 RC
Note (1): The unit leaves the factory without measurements to be sentas they are not necessary in the application.
Digital outputs
Open/ Close (double order)
Recloserr (double order)
Point
1
2
PL70 RC
DO1/DO2
Protec. in service ON/OFF(double order 3
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 298
16BIEC-101 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XVII. IEC-101 PROTOCOL
The 101 communication module imoplemented in the PL70 protection unit (SC and CT family) allows the communication as slave station with a central centre through the rear connector of independent communication (COM-1).
The unit has some settings to configure this communication.
In the “Default Value” settings the recommended values for IEC-101 communictaion are shown.
Communication settings
RTU Address Link layer
RTU Address Application layer
Transmission factor (hund. sec)
Channel type
Baud rate
Parity
Bits Stop
DCD Signal Control
RTS handling
CTS handling
Time delay between final TXD and RTS OFF (mseg) 0
Time delay between RTS ON and TXD (mseg)
Wait. T from RTS ON to CTS ON (mseg)
T.between CTS ON and TXD (msc)
T.between DCD ON and start RXD
0
0
0
0
T.between DCD OFF and RTS ON (msg)
Time out entre caracteres (msc)
Time span act/deac. Signal (sec)
No.signal deactivation changes
No.signal reactivation changes
0
20
1
2
1
Min.
1
1
0
600
1
5000
5000
5000
5000
1000
Max.
65534
65534
1000
38400
2
5000
200
300
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
Notes
Direct/Phone discretes bauds discretes
NO/EVEN/ODD
NO/YES
NO/YES
NO/YES
0
0
0
0
NO
NO
NO
0
0
100
10
15
5
Default value
1
1
0
Direct
1200
EVEN
1
Address settings
IOA 1st simple state points (1)
IOA 1º simple state points (2)
IOA 1º double state points
IOA 1º measurement points
IOA point full queue class 1
IOA point semifull queue class 1
IOA reliability point
IOA synchronised RTU point
IOA MM/MS mode point (dial-up)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min.
0
0
Max.
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
Notes Default value
1
5001
10001
15001
60001
60002
60004
60005
60007
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 299
16BIEC-101 PROTOCOL
Balanced mode setting
Balanced mode
Message reattempt time (sec)
Min. time between transmissions (msc)
Retransmission time
Period for Link-Test (sec)
0
0
Min.
0
1
DIAL_UP settings
Operation mode when starting
Connection maximum time (sec)
T.without RXD connection cut (sec)
Minimum T between accepted calls (sec)
T. between 2 consecutive call attempts (sec)
No. of call reattempts after failed connection
Repet. T. call cycle after failed connect. cycle (sec)
Max. T. of urgent data sending before MS change (sec)
Event generation time and call start (sec.)
CONNECT reception maximum time (sec)
MODEM checking time (sec)
Checking relay activation time (min)
Main telephone number
Alternative telephone number
HAYES chain MODEM checking
Other setteings
Measurement exploration period (sec)
T. without receiving valid synchronization (min)
Delete class-2 queue with link reset
Size of the order buffer
Semifull value class-1 queue (%)
Semifull value class -1 queue (%)
Periodical change period (min)
Size of class 1 data queue
Size of class 2 data queue
No. of bytes IOA field
No. of changes signal deactivation
Point checking period activation/deactivation
No. of changes signal activation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Min.
1
1
10
10
2
0
1
0
1
20
0
1
Min.
0
1
Max.
65534
60
1000
5
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
3600
60
90
1200
1440
Max.
1200
1200
180
60
9
600
Notes Default value
NO
6
10
3
600
Notes Default value
MM/MS MM
2
2
60
60
2
1
1
30
40
20
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
Max.
60
1440
10
95
80
1440
400
400
3
254
32767
254
Notes Default value
2
15
NO/YES SI
3
70
30
1440
400
400
3
15
10
5
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 300
16BIEC-101 PROTOCOL
XVII.1. SIGNAL TABLE (IEC-101 PROTOCOL)
The digital input, analogue input and digital output tables are configured through the SIPCON/P Protection Console.
In the communication console, the screens must be set with the data base to be sent via protocol 101 to the control centre.
Digital signal configuration 101
In this table, they are included the simple signalling type signal, double signalling and bitstring, in case they exist. The following fields have to be defined:
NUMBER 101: Signal number that shows in which position the STATE buffer is going to refresh its corresponding bit. They are numbered starting from 1 up to 2048 possible signals.
For simple signals, the numbering starts in 1 and the following ones go consecutively; if there were gaps, they are not introduced.
For the events, once the word of the event state update start is given in the STATE buffer, the first value of the NUMBER field must be calculated with this word given by PO_EV.
First event: PO_EV x 16 + 1
The following ones go consecutively; if there were gaps, they are not introduced.
For double signals, the indication of open, close, undetermined and conflicting states, but as there are only two bits to show the state of a double signal, the undetermined and the conflicting state have the same numbering as the close state, refreshing the corresponding bits as 00 and 11 respectively.
This field NUMBER for the double signal is calculated from the variable
PO_DP
, having into account that the first double signal will have the value resulting from calculating:
PO_DP x 16 + 1, for open state
PO_DP x 16 + 2, for close, undetermined and conflicting state. being PO_DP a word number between 0 and 127, which locates the double signals between the events and the bitstrings and it shows the word of the double signal state update start.
If in the database there are events, the operation to calculate the word of double signal Start is the following one:
PO_DP = PO_EV + (event number - 1) / 16 + 1
If there are no events, the most common case, this parameter is calculated from simple signals:
PO_DP = (simple signal number - 1) / 16 + 1
For the first Bitstring there will be 32 signals (1 for every bitstring bit) and so 32 registers with the NUMBER field.
PO_ BITS
x 16 +1 ..............................
PO_BITS
x 16 + 32 being PO_BITS a word number between 0 and 127, which locates the bitstrings as the last element to refresh in the buffer after the double signals.
In order to calculate this word, the same used for the double signals is applied. But in order to calculate what the double signal occupy, take into account that each signal needs 2 bits, so in each word only 8 double signals are refreshed.
The operation to calculate the bitstrings start word is the following:
PO_BITS = PO_DP + (numero señales dobles - 1) / 8 + 1
For this calculation take into account the size, in words, of the place the previous signals occupy in the buffer.
BD SIGNAL: It shows the signal number in the database of the PL300
NELEM: It shows the element number inside its type
For simple signals, it coincides with NUMBER field.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 301
16BIEC-101 PROTOCOL
For events, it must go on as if they were simple signals, because internally they are treated in the same way. If, between the last simple signal and the first event, there is a step in the numbering, it has to be mentioned in this field.
For double signals, it must start in 1 again. If, in the case of double signals, some registers have been refilled with the different status of the signals, open, close undetermined and conflicting, these registers belong to the same signal, so the
NELEM
field must be the same for all of them.
The same happens in the case of the Bitstring, having for them 32 registers of the table with the same
NELEM
field.
REVERSED: It shows if the signal reversed state is waited.
TYPE: It shows the type of signal 101:
TYPE
0
1
2
ELEMENT TYPE
Simple Signalling type element
Double Signalling type element
Bitstring type element
CIN: it shows the incidence code for double signals.
CIN
0
1
2
3
4
INCIDENCE INTERNAL CODE
Change of the simple signalling value or bitstring
Change of signalling value to open.
Change of signalling value to close.
Change of signalling value to undetermined.
Change of signalling value to conflict.
Measurement configuration 101
In this table the normal, step and tap type measurements are introduced. The following fields have to be defined:
NUMBER 101: measurement number regarding the Protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering in 1 up to 128 possible measurements. In case there are gaps in the database, those registers cannot be introduced in the table.
MEASUREMENT BD: It indicates the measurement number in the PL300 database.
DEADBAND: change magnitude in the measurement in order to be sent to the control centre. A value higher than 1% of the background is recommended.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this kind of measurement will be sent to the control centre.
PERIOD: Time during which a change must be maintained in a signal to be sent to the control centre. It will be given in csecs.
LOW: Low limit under which a measurement will be sent to the control centre as alarm.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this kind of measurement will be sent to the control centre.
HIGH: High limit over which a measurement will be sent to the control centre as alarm.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this kind of measurement will be sent to the control centre.
In the limit cases, both low and high, we do not pay attention to change magnitude but to the limits of one zone. If it exceeds the given zone between the high and low limit, even if it is a very small change, it is sent to the control centre. In the same way, if it had previously been exceeded, and the measurement value has a value between the limits again.
BACKGROUND: Scale background for scaled measurements, engineering real value corresponding to the maximum value of the measurement (4095 counts).
If spontaneous changes in measurements are not desired to be sent, the their minimum value,-4095, and
LOWLIM
field value are recommended to be set at
HIGHLIM
and
BTRATA
at their maximum value, that is, 4095 and 8190 counts, respectively.
TYPE: Type of 101 measurement:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 302
16BIEC-101 PROTOCOL
0 – Unidirectional measurement.- Normalized TYPE F16.
1 – Bidirectional measurement. - Stepped TIYPE I16.
The measurements in that table are set in increasing order, that is, first of all the standardized ones, and then the staggered ones.
101 order configuration
The following fields have to be defined for each order:
NUMBER 101: Information object direction (IOA) of the order in the protocol IEC 870-5-101.
ORDER BD: Order in the PL300 database
ON / OFF: ON / OFF state of the order
TYPE: type of element over which the return information is received.
0 – Simple signal
1 –Double signal
SIGNAL: Element number inside those of its type for the return information. This information is the same as the NELEM field of the signal table.
STATE: This field has a different meaning depending on the order type.
In the case of order types, it shows the end state of the signal the order is associated to, a simple or a double signal.
In the case of double orders, it shows if the state has to come reverse or not.
If the setting Command Execution Mode has Mode 6 value, the simple commands must be entered in the table as double commands, respecting the address of the information object that corresponds to them as simple commands. That is, they are entered as simple commands, but taking into account in this STATE field that they are treated as double commands.
TIMING: It shows the time, in hundredths seconds, it has to be waited until the return information associated to the order is received.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 303
17BIEC-104 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XVIII. IEC-104 PROTOCOL
The 104 communication module implemented in the PL70 SC unit allows communication as a slave station with a central centre through the rear Ethernet communications connector (RJ45).
The unit is equipped with a series of settings in order to configure this communication.
XVIII.1. IEC-104 PROTOCOL APPLICTION LEVEL SETTINGS
RTU AplicAddress: The AplicAddress that must appear in the Asdu Common Address field of the messages which are sent and received.
Minimum
1, maximum 65534. Default value: 65534.
TimeOut for establishment of connection (sec) (to):
It has functionality in the master station.
Minimum: 1, maximum: 255. Default value: 30.
Validation period for sent messages (sec)(t1):
Waiting time in
seconds, as of the time that a type I message is sent until the sent message is considered as nonconfirmed and the connection closes. The time period is rearmed for each type I message sent.
Minimum: 1, maximum: 254. Default value: 15.
Validation period for received messages (sec)(t2):
Waiting time in seconds, for the sending of a type S message (Supervisory), recognising the format I messages received without confirmation. This time is rearmed with the first unconfirmed message received and cancelled when the reception confirmation is sent. The value given to this timer must be inferior to the master station’s t1.
Minimum: 1, maximum: 254. Default value: 10.
Time period for sending test messages (sec.) (t3).
Waiting time in seconds, for the periodic sending of test messages (TESTFR act). A TESTFR act is also sent if, during this time, no transfers are effected between the two stations. The reception or the sending of any message, in format I,
S or U, rearms this timing.
Minimum:
1, maximum: 9999. Default value: 20.
Maximum number of messages transmitted without validation (k):
Number of type I messages transmitted without reception of confirmation by the control centre.
Once this limit has been reached, no type 1 messages will be transmitted until confirmation is received for at least the first message pending confirmation.
Minimum:
1, maximum: 254. Default value: 12.
Maximum number of messages received without confirmation with message S (w):
Number of type I messages received before the sending of a format S message in confirmation.
If less than w type I messages are received, confirmation will not be sent until compliance with t2 is met.
Minimum:
1, maximum: 254. Default value: 8.
These settings are accessed through the SIPCON/P protections console, “General 101/104” screen.
The origin of the addresses of this type of object is the same as that of the IEC-101, Iberdrola profile. The settings and values are as follows:
IOA 1st point simple statuses (1): 1
IOA 1st point double statuses: 10001
IOA 1st point measurements: 15001
These settings are accessed through the SIPCON/P protections console, “General IEC60870-5-101” screen.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 304
17BIEC-104 PROTOCOL
XVIII.2. TCP/IP CONFIGURATION (IEC-104 PROTOCOL)
The PL70SC’s IP configuration for IEC-104 Iberdrola profile allows for the configuration of 2 IP addresses as an IEC-104 server and 8 clients to be distributed between the 2 server addresses.
In the Ibedrola profile, the only synchronization source contemplated is SNTP. Two synchronization servers, each with their own IP address, can be configured.
XVIII.2.1 General settings
Total Nº connections: Total IEC-104 clients admitted.
Minimum 0, maximum 8. Default value: 8.
Nº IP1 connections: Total number of IEC-104 clients corresponding to the first server, starting with the first client.
The remaining clients, up to Total number of connections, will connect to the second IEC-104 server. Minimum
0, maximum 8 (do not introduce more than Total number of connections). Default value: 4.
IP1 Address: IP address of first IEC-104 server, corresponding to Iberdrola IpAddress1 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
IP1 subnetwork mask: IP mask for IP addresses from the first IEC-104 server’s subnetwork. Admits values from
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. There must be no dips (bits at 0 to the left or bits at 1 to the right). E.g.: for a
16 bit mask, the value should be 255.255.0.0.
Gateway IP1: IP address to which first server will employ to redirect itself to IP addresses that are not in its subnetwork. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
IP2 address: IP address of second IEC-104 server, corresponding to Iberdrola IpAddress2 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
IP2 subnetwork mask: IP mask for IP addresses from the second IEC-104 server’s subnetwork. Admits values from
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. There must be no dips (bits at 0 to the left or bits at 1 to the right). E.g.: for a
16 bit mask, the value should be 255.255.0.0.
Gateway IP2: IP address which the second server will employ to redirect itself to IP addresses that are not in its subnetwork. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
Ethernet mode: Allows selection of full duplex or half duplex modes.
Default value: full duplex.
Ethernet speed: Allows selection of either 10 megabits (per second) or 100 megabits.
Default value: 10 megabits.
Permission configuration:
It should be set at 0 for the IEC-104 Iberdrola profile.
Allows selection of different modes of functioning.
The 8 bits of the low byte are employed to enable connection with any client independently of the value of parameter Total number of connections.
The first 8 bits of the high byte enable the active refusal of connection attempts in server mode if the ESTEQ input is at value one.
These settings are accessed through the SIPCON/P protections console, “General TCP/IP Configuration” screen.
XVIII.3. IEC-104 CLIENT SETTINGS
IP address client port 1: IP address of first IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client1 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Listening port 1
: Number of local listening port for the 1
Minimum:
0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. st connection as server.
IP address client port 2: IP address of second IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client2 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 305
17BIEC-104 PROTOCOL
Listening port 2
: Number of local listening port for the 2
Minimum: 0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. nd connection as server.
IP address client port 3: IP address of third IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client3 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Listening port 3
: Number of local listening port for the 3
Minimum: 0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. rd connection as server.
IP address client port 4: IP address of fourth IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client4 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Listening port 4
: Number of local listening port for the 4
Minimum: 0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. th
connection as server.
IP address client port 5: IP address of fifth IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client5 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Listening port 5
: Number of local listening port for the 5
Minimum:
0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. th connection as server.
IP address client port 6: IP address of sixth IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client6 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Listening port 6
: Number of local listening port for the 6
Minimum: 0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. th connection as server.
IP address client port 7: IP address of seventh IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client7 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Listening port 7
: Number of local listening port for the 7
Minimum: 0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. th connection as server.
IP address client port 8: IP address of eighth IEC-104 client. Minimum 0, maximum 8, corresponding to Iberdrola
IP_client8 parameter. Admits values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. In the case of 255.255.255.255, any client
IP is admitted.
Listening port 8
: Number of local listening port for the 8
Minimum: 0, maximum 65534.
It is always 2404 for IEC-104. th
connection as server.
These settings are accessed through the SIPCON/P protections console, “TCP/IP Protocols Configuration” screen.
XVIII.4. SNTP SYNCHRONISATION SETTINGS
SNTP synchronisation permission: Enables or disables the SNTP server requests. Admits values Permitted or Not
permitted.
Default value: Permitted.
Automatic time schedule change permission: Enables or disables the automatic summer/winter time change when the date/time configured in the
SNTP seasonal time change dates table is reached. Admits values YES or NO.
Default value: Yes.
SNTP1 IP server (IP1_RLJEXT)
: Main and priority SNTP server IP address. Corresponds to Iberdrola
IP1_RLJEXT parameter.
It can be the IP address of a local SNTP server. The configuration of broadcast addresses is not permitted. The value
0.0.0.0 or 255.255.255.255 means that the synchronization source is nonexistent.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 306
17BIEC-104 PROTOCOL
Local IP with watch 1
: Allows the first or second local IP address to be selected as SNTP client for requests to the main
SNTP server. Admits values First or Second.
Default value:
First
SNTP2 IP server (IP2_RLJEXT)
: Alternative SNTP server IP address. Corresponds to Iberdrola
IP2_RLJEXT parameter.
The configuration of broadcast addresses is not permitted. The value 0.0.0.0 or 255.255.255.255 means that the synchronization source is nonexistent.
Local IP with watch 2
: Allows the first or second local IP address to be selected as SNTP client for requests to the alternative SNTP server. Admits values First or Second.
Default value: Second
SNTP servers probe interval (min)(T_PETSINCRO)
:
Corresponds to Iberdrola
T_PETSINCRO
parameter.
Defines the interval in minutes of the probes sent to the defined SNTP servers in order to obtain synchronization information. This time interval is independent of the duration of the synchronization cycles, which are understood as all the requests and renewed intents effected to the main and the alternative sources. Consequently, each synchronization cycle may have a variable duration.
Two possible scenarios may result from compliance with the timed interval:
- There is no synchronization cycle underway. In this case, a new cycle is started.
- There is no synchronization cycle underway. In this case, the synchronization request is rejected. The following synchronization cycle will attempt T_PETSINCRO and the current synchronization cycle will terminate normally.
Minimum: 1, maximum 1440. Default value: 1.
Waiting time for response from SNTP server (sec)(T_ESPSINCRO)
Corresponds to Iberdrola
T_ESPSINCRO parameter
.
:
Minimum: 1, maximum 60. Default value: 5.
Waiting time for response to a unicast synchronization request made to an SNTP server. If a response is not received in T_ESPSINCRO seconds, a unicast request to server reattempt cycle will start. Each request will be separated by the value specified in the setting.
Nº of reattempted requests to SNTP server (N_REINT_SINCRO)
:
Corresponds to Iberdrola
N_REINT_SINCRO parameter
.
Minimum: 0, maximum 9. Default value: 2.
Number of reattempted unicast requests to an SNTP server in the event of no response being received. In the case of the main source, and once the reattempts have concluded, a new attempt at synchronization with the alternative source is started. In the case of reattempts with the alternative source, the synchronization attempt for this interval will terminate and a new attempt will be made in the following period. 0 represents no reattempt, a change in source upon the first error or the finalization of the probe interval.
Advance / Delay in relation to UTC:
Determines the sign representing the difference between the local time and UTC.
It is a drop-down with two options: Advance and Delay.
Default value: Advance.
Advance / Delay hours in relation to UTC:
Difference between local time and UTC during winter time.
Minimum:
0, maximum: 23. Default value: 1.
Synchronization from the console (PROCOME) or from the keyboard/display is not permitted when at least one of the SNTP service is not in fault. IRIG-B has preference over the rest of the synchronization functions.
These settings are accessed via the SIPCON/P Protections console, “SNTP Configuration” screen.
XVIII.5. SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND COMMANDS TABLES (IEC-104
PROTOCOL)
The digital input, analogue input and digital output command tables are configured through the SIPCON/P Protection
Console.
In the communication console, the screens must be set with the data base to be sent via protocol 104 to the control centre.
Digital signal configuration 101/104
Any existing simple signalling, double signalling and bitstring signals are introduced into this table. The following fields must be defined:
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 307
17BIEC-104 PROTOCOL
NUMBER 101: Signal number indicating the STATUS buffer position in which the corresponding bit is to be refreshed. They are numbered from 1 to 128 possible signals.
For simple signals, the numbering starts in 1 and continues consecutively; any existing gaps should not be introduced.
For double signals, indication is given of open (01b), closed (10b), intermediate (00b) and undetermined (11b) states. Nevertheless, as there are only two bits to show the state of a double signal, the undetermined, physical signal A and state A (bit 1 of the binary value) and the physical signal B or state B (bit 0 of the binary value) share the same numbering as the closed state, refreshing the corresponding bits as 00 and 11, respectively.
The NUMBER 101 field for double signals is calculated in accordance with the variable
PO_DP
, with the
NUMBER 101 field of the first double signal reflecting the value resultant from the calculation:
PO_DP x 16 + 1, for open state
PO_DP x 16 + 2, for closed, undetermined and conflicting state.
In which PO_DP is a word number between 0 and 7, indicating the start word for the refreshing of the double signal states.
The PO_DP variable is calculated in accordance with the simple signals:
PO_DP = (number of simple signals - 1) / 16 + 1
In order to calculate what the double signals occupy, we must bear in mind that each signal requires
2 bits and, thus, only 8 double signals are refreshed in each word.
There is currently only a double signal for the PL70
SC family (52-Breaker closed), which is timed to create an event for a change to intermediate (00b) or undetermined (11b) state, in the
Unknown 52
signal.
The setting for this time is available in the following screen:
General SETTINGS
General and remote port Configuration, Unknown52 Stabilization Time (sec).
The PL70SC
52-Breaker closed signal is employed in inverted form in the table with CIN = 1, and in direct form (without inversion), with CIN = 2. The signals associated to status A and status B have CIN
= 5 and 6. The Unknown 52 signal is calculated using the “52-Breaker A Status” and “52-Breaker B
Status” input signals.
In the event of configuring a simple signal to be sent as a double signal via IEC-104, the same procome signal is to be employed in 3 positions within the table, as shown below:
For the OFF status of the double signal, use the inverted signal and CIN = 1.
For the ON status, use the direct signal and CIN = 2.
In order to count the changes for deactivation resulting from bounces, use the direct signal and CIN = 6.
BD SIGNAL: Indicates the signal number in the PL70 database. One of the available signals is selected from a drop-down menu, which contains the corresponding descriptions.
NELEM: Indicates the element number within the corresponding type
For simple signals, it coincides with the NUMBER field.
For double signals, it must start in 1 once more.
It must have the following value:
(IEC address of the object – IOA 1st point double status + 1 setting).
Within the Iberdrola profile, with the setting set at 10001, it corresponds to (IOA – 10000).
If, in the case of double signals, some registers have been completed with the different status of the signal, open, closed, undetermined and conflicting, physical signal A, physical signal B, these registers belong to the same signal. Thus, the
NELEM
field must be the same for all of them.
INVERTED: Indicates if the signal’s inverted status is expected.
TYPE: Indicates the 101/104 signal type:
TYPE
0
1
ELEMENT TYPE
Simple Signal type element
Double Signal type element
CIN: Indicates event code
CIN
0
1
2
INTERNAL EVENT CODE
Change of value simple signal
Change of value double signal to open = OFF (01b).
Change of value double signal to closed = ON (10b).
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 308
17BIEC-104 PROTOCOL
3
4
5
6
Change of value signal to intermediate (00b).
Change of value signal to undetermined (11b).
Physical signal status provided by 0 (status B)
Physical signal status provided by 1 (status A)
These settings are accessed via the SIPCON/P Protections console, “101/104 digital signals configuration” screen.
Configuration of 101/104 measurements
The normalised measurements are introduced into this table. The following fields must be defined:
NUMBER 101: Average measurement in relation to 870-5-l01/104 protocol. Numbering is started at 1, with up to
15 possible measurements. Non-assignable. In order to provide the measurements IOA, the value is added to the
IOA 1 ST
point measurements setting, from which 1 is subtracted. Thus, the measurements always begin in
IOA 15001 for the Iberdrola profile. These measurements, furthermore, are consecutive.
MEASUREMENT BD: Indicates the measurement number in the PL70 database. One of the available measurements is selected from a drop-down menu, which contains the corresponding descriptions.
DEADBAND: The magnitude of the change in the measurement in order that it is sent to the control centre, expressed as a 1000 th . A value superior to 1% of the full scale range is recommended.
PERIOD: Time during which a change must be maintained in a signal to be sent to the control centre. It will be given in hundredths of a second. It is not taken into account in this protocol. A common setting is used instead:
Measurement exploration period (sec.)
LOW: Lower limit, below which a measurement will be sent to the control centre as an alarm (class 1). It is not employed in this profile and the measurements are always sent as class 2.
HIGH: Upper limit, above which a measurement will be sent to the control centre as an alarm (class 1). It is not employed in this profile and the measurements are always sent as class 2.
BACKGROUND: Scale range for scaled measurements, real engineering value corresponding to the maximum value of the measurement (4095 counts). It is not employed in this profile and the measurements should be TYPE =
0 (normalized).
TYPE: Type of 104 measurement:
0 – Unidirectional measurement.- Normalized TYPE F16.
1 – Bidirectional measurement. - Stepped TYPE I16.
All the measurements in this profile should be TYPE = 0 (normalized).
These settings are accessed via the SIPCON/P Protections console, “101/104 measurements configuration” screen.
Configuration of 101/104 commands
The following fields must be defined for each command:
NUMBER 101: The command’s information object address (IOA) in the IEC 870-5-101/104 protocol.
Two registers with the same NUMBER 101 field are used for double commands.
COMMAND BD: Command in the PL70 database. One of the available commands is selected from a drop-down menu, which contains the corresponding descriptions.
ON / OFF: The command’s ON / OFF status. For double commands, a distinction is made between which commands are to obey the OFF (open, DCO = 1) command and which are to obey the ON (close, DCO = 2) command.
TYPE: Type of element about which the return information is received.
0 – Simple signal
1 –Double signal
SIGNAL: Element number within those of its type for the return information. This information is the same as that within the NELEM field of the signal table.
STATUS: This field has a different meaning depending on the command type.
In the case of simple commands, it indicates the final status of the signal to which the command is associated, independently of whether it is a simple or a double signal.
In the case of double commands, it indicates if the expected status should be inverted or not.
If the Command Execution Mode setting has a value of Mode 6, the simple commands must be entered in the table as double commands, respecting the information object address that corresponds to them as simple
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 309
17BIEC-104 PROTOCOL
commands. That is, they are entered as simple commands, but taking into account in this STATUS field that
they are treated as double commands.
TIMING: Indicates the timing, in hundredths of a second, to be observed prior to the reception of the return information associated to the command.
These settings are accessed via the SIPCON/P Protections console, “101/104 commands configuration” screen.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 310
18BPREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX XIX. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The self-checking constantly performed by the unit, can detect the following situations:
Critical hardware error
Error in the converter reference voltage
Error in the converter
Error in the FLASH memory recording
Error in the relays activation
Error in the SPI communication (between micro and converter)
Non critical hardware error
Clock synchronization error
HW error corrected
In the event of any failure detection, the alarm will remain until the failure is disappeared. This alarm can be visualised through:
Status screen
Control events
Events
Digital outputs
Led
XIX.1. FAILURE DETECTION
The failure detection can happen in various ways .
Status screen
In the section “Protection status” (marked on the picture), we can find the situation in which is currently the protection, through three signalisations: Protection in service
Critical error
Non critical error
Error in ADC converter
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 311
18BPREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
By normal functioning, only the signalisation (in red) for protection in service must be on. Any of the other 3 signalisations indicate an unusual situation.
Control signals
If the hardware status signal (digital signal 143 from the section “List of available signals”, Appendix III) is by 0, this indicates that some unusual situation has occurred (critical error) in the unit. By 1 indicates Hardware OK.
Digital outputs
A digital output can be programmed with the signal “HW status”, which will be activated by normal functioning and deactivated by critical error. If the opposite logic is desired, this can be done through the programmable logic signals.
Leds
The programmable Leds count with the same options as the digital outputs.
The non programmable bicolour Led (OK/F) indicates(when programmed “HW Status”):
Correct functioning if green
Critical error detection if red
Events
As well as indicating if the error is or not critical, the events also indicate the type of error detected and they are the ones quoted in the first part of this chapter.
XIX.2. ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE
The procedure will depend on the detected error and the unit status.
The “HW errors corrected” event indicates that the appeared problems have been resolved.
If the unit is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the unit is well supplied, contact the technical service.
If the unit is on but shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is:
If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and on, contact the technical service.
If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if correct turn off and on the unit; if the error does not disappear, contact the technical service.
If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.
If error in the Flash memory recording is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical service.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 312
19BRECEPTION TESTS
APPENDIX XX. RECEPTION TESTS
XX.1. MATERIAL NEEDED
Three phase voltage and current generator with variable frequency of class<0.5
Chronometer unit with starting by current or voltage injection, with precision <0.001s
Wiring
Power supply of Vdc +-10% (Vdc depending on model)
XX.2. MEASUREMENTS CHECKING TESTS
The Measurement range is up to 1.2 times the nominal value (5 A). The error in that range must be less than 0.5% of the
1.2*nominal value.
The protection range error must be less than 3% of the introduced value.
The points to be tested are under the worker choice, but those below are recommended:
Current (A)
0.5
1
5 (nominal)
10
50
XX.2.1 Measurements in display
Measurements will be done by injecting voltages and currents in one phase and checking on the display that only this phase presents a non 0 value and that it is within the defined limits.
Furthermore it must be taken into account that the Measurements must appear in display in primary as well as secondary values (multiplied by the Measurement transformers ratio).
XX.2.2 Measurements in console
Measurements will be made by injecting voltages and currents in one phase and checking on the display that only this phase presents a non 0 value and that it is within the defined limits.
Furthermore it must be taken into account that in the console must appear measurement in both secondary values in the state screen and in primary values in the measurements and control screen (multiplying by the measurement transformers ratio).
If power is measured, it must be taken into account that there is a factor by which the calculated power is divided before being sent to the console (Measurements and control). Make a test for several values for this (for instances 0.1,
1 and 10).
This test must be carried out for all phases and checking the Measurements in the console.
XX.3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
For the reception tests, the following settings will be introduced in the relay:
Digital input configuration
DI 1
DI 2
Breaker status
Locking of the function to be tested
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 313
19BRECEPTION TESTS
Digital Outputs Configuration
DO 1
DO 2
DO 3
DO 4
DO 5
DO 6
LEDs Configuration
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
XX.3.1 Hardware status
General trip
Breaker closing
Ongoing cycle
Definitive trip
Phase (I) trip
HW status
Timed pickup (I-V)
Phase trip (I)
Neutral trip
Instantaneous trip (I-V)
Ongoing cycle
Definitive trip
HW status (green OK)
Check that if the relay is off, the output contact DO6 (“HW status”) is closed. Switch on the relay and check that this contact opens.
Furthermore, when turning on the unit the led no. 7 must remain in green (“HW status”)
XX.3.2 Instantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency)
This protocol applies to any instantaneous voltage and current unit the unit has. The most usual are:
Phase instantaneous overcurrent
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (and sensitive neutral
A test unit prepared for measuring the tripping times will be used to carry out all these tests.
Disable the corresponding timed function and all the functions which are not being tested.
Pickup and dropout in the trip
Set the additional time of instantaneous to 0 seconds.
They will be tested by making rising slopes of I, V or f (depending on the tested unit) from 90% to 110% of the setting taking note of the value at which the instantaneous is picking up. By reaching the tripping point, it must remain there for a while checking that there are no drop outs but it remains tripped
Afterwards a descending slope to the drop out point will be made, taking note of this point value. The points to be checked are up to the operator but it is recommended to test the following settings:
Current (A)
6
10
20
40
Check that the digital outputs and the corresponding LEDs are activated by tripping. After each test, make a “Fault acknowledgment” to turn off the LEDs.
Speed of the instantaneous trip
It is about testing the tripping speed of the relay when tripping time is 0. Therefore, the additional time of instantaneous will be set to 0 sec.
It will be tested by applying a value higher than the starting value set (2 times for current, 1.2 times for voltage) noting down the time in which the instantaneous picks up.
To carry out this test a chronometer will be used, which will be started by the signal injection and stopped by the trip relay operation.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 314
19BRECEPTION TESTS
Suggested settings: same as the pick-up and drop-off settings.
The tripping time must be less than 50 ms.
Instantaneous trip with additional time
Same as the precedent, for different additional time settings, noting down the time in which the instantaneous trips.
The error must not be higher than 5% of the programmed time or 50 ms (the highest of the two)
Function locking test
Check that once activated the programmed locking input, there are no trips in the corresponding function (this is general for any function).
XX.3.3 Timed units (current and voltage)
This protocol applies to any timed current and voltage unit. The most usual are:
Phase timed overcurrent
Neutral timed overcurrent (and sensitive neutral)
A test set prepared for measuring tripping times will be used to carry out all these tests.
Disable the corresponding instantaneous function and all the functions which are not being tested.
Pickup and dropout
The test will be carried out in a similar way to the instantaneous one. The type of trip curve will be set as definite time with a trip time of 0.
Check that the digital outputs and corresponding LEDs are activated when tripping. After each test make a “Fault acknowledgment” to switch off the LEDs.
Definite time
The test will be carried out in similar way to the instantaneous one.
Tripping times following curves
The test is carried out in the same way as for the definite time but setting the time delayed unit with all possible types of curves and different indexes shown on Appendix II, where the theoretical operating times are indicated.
The time measurements will be repeated for different points of the tripping curve and for different settings according to the operator criteria.
XX.4. CURRENT UNBALANCE UNITS
These units act when exceeding the I2 threshold (Negative sequence current)
The tests will be the same as for the phase instantaneous and timed unit unless current is injected in the three phases and with certain values.
The phase protection units must be disabled.
Pickups
The instantaneous and the timed units are tested in the same way.
The tripping time must be set to a minimum (0.1sec.) and if it is a time delayed unit, the time curve is set to definite time.
Currents of the same amplitude are injected with 120º of phase difference and values according to following tables. Then the current in phase A is increased until the protection trips. Every current increase must last at least 0.1 seconds to give enough time for the protection to trip.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 315
19BRECEPTION TESTS
IR
120º
120º
120º
IT IS
When it trips, the I2 trip will be calculated to see the error made in the following way
I2.trip (s)=(|IRtrip|-|Ifixed|)/3
The test must be repeated for different Ifixed and for different settings. The following will be recommended:
I2=I negative seq. set
1
2
4
I fixed
3
5
10
Trip times
The proceeding is the same for both instantaneous and time delayed of unbalance. For timed unit the inverse time curves will be checked.
Currents of same amplitude and 120º of phase difference are injected with values as indicated in the following tables, then the time to trip the protection is measured.
XX.4.1 Broken conductor unit
Before performing this test all the phase units must be disabled.
Pickups
It is tested in the same way as the unbalance unit. The tripping time must be set to a minimum (0.1sec.).
Currents of the same amplitude are injected with 120º of phase difference and values according to following tables.
Then the current in phase A is increased until the protection trips. Every current increase must last at least 0.1 seconds to give enough time for the protection to trip.
The test is repeated for different Ifixed:
1 A
2 A
5 A
At the end the trip error is calculated.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 316
19BRECEPTION TESTS
IR
120º
120º
120º
IT
BROKEN CONDUCTOR UNIT
IS
SETTING I pickup
Phase R Phases Phase T
TRIP VALUE
I2/I1
0.15
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
IR(A) IS(A) IT(A)
Ifixed Ifixed
Ifixed Ifixed
Ifixed Ifixed
Ifixed Ifixed
Ifixed Ifixed
I2/I1trip=(|IR||Ifixed|)/(|IR|+2·|Ifixed|)
Trip times
The proceeding is the same as for the instantaneous of unbalance.
Currents of same amplitude and 120º of phase difference are injected with values as indicated in the following tables, then the time to trip the protection is measured.
The test is repeated for different Ifixed and different settings.
XX.5. RECLOSER
It is aimed to confirm several aspects:
That for any kind of trip (with all the enabling to YES), the recloser is able to perform a complete reclosing cycle and that on each cycle state all corresponding signals are activated (outputs and leds).
That all the phase and earth fault reclosing are correctly discriminated.
That the timing to be set (dead time, reclaim time and reference voltage time) are exactly respected.
That the enabling of allowed reclosing and trips operate correctly.
In all the tests the enabling of trip after reclosing and reclosing after trip must be configured to YES.
During the reclosing tests the time to be measured is the one from the circuit breaker opening to the circuit breaker closing signal.
XX.5.1 Initial tests
Wire the breaker trip and closing outputs to a two-stable relay which performs the line circuit breaker function. In this way a voltage of 125 V must appear at the terminals of the input “Breaker status” when giving a closing order. The signal in this input must be 0 V when a trip happens.
If there is an input programmed as “Reference voltage”, it must be activated to allow reclosing.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 317
19BRECEPTION TESTS
+125V
Breaker status
PROTECTION
General trip
Breaker closure
Figure 1
Before the tests:
Check that the Recloser locking, the external as well as the one of the panel, are disabled
Set all the time delay (reclosing and blocking times) with different values so that makes it easier to see the differences between them.
The reclosing times will indicate which one of the three reclosings is being performed. To measure them it will be measured the interval from the breaker opening until the breaker closing order.
Check the following by each test:
Every time a trip occurs, the ongoing cycle output must be activated and turn on the corresponding led unless a cycle of three reclosings has been performed, which will lead to Definitive trip.
When the reclosing occurs the output cancellation of instantaneous must be activated (if this was programmed) and also the corresponding led while it is on reclaim time or until another trip occurs within this reclaim time.
TRIP (D),RECLOSURE (R),NORMAL (N)
Manual closing
Wait the reclaim time after manual closing
Provoke a trip
Check that the led ongoing cycle turns on
Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off and that the output ongoing cycle is deactivated and the instantaneous is annulled when reclaim time is expired.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 318
19BRECEPTION TESTS
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, neutral, sensitive neutral (if they exist), unbalance and broken conductor.
In case of trips by neutral or sensitive neutral the dead and reclaim times will be the earth-fault ones but for the rest of trips times must be the phase-fault ones.
D,R,D,R,N
Manual closing
Wait the reclaim time after manual closing
Provoke a trip
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on
Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time.
Provoke a trip before the reclaim time is expired after automatic closing
Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the TREEN2 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off and the output ongoing cycle is deactivated.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, neutral, sensitive neutral, unbalance and broken conductor
D,R,D,R,D,R,N
Manual closing
Wait the reclaim time after manual closing
Provoke a trip
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on
Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time.
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the time TREEN2.
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Third Reclosing occurs in the TREEN3 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, neutral, sensitive neutral, unbalance and broken conductor
D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R.
Manual closing
Wait the blocking time after manual closing
Provoke a trip.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on.
Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the time TREEN1..
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the TREEN2 time.
Provoke a trip before the blocking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Third Reclosing occurs in the TREEN3 time.
Provoke a trip before the blocking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Fourth Reclosing occurs in the TREEN4 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, neutral, sensitive neutral , unbalance and broken conductor.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 319
19BRECEPTION TESTS
D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R,DISP. DEF.
Manual closing
Wait locking time after manual closing
Provoke a trip.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on.
Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time.
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the TREEN2 time.
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Third Reclosing occurs in the TREEN3 time.
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Fourth Reclosing occurs in the TREEN4 time.
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the LED Definitive trip turns on.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, neutral, sensitive neutral unbalance, broken conductor and also by external protection.
XX.5.2 Enabling checking test
Enabling of allowed trips
It is started from all the allowed trips and one of them is disabled checking that it does not trip during the corresponding reclaim time.
A locking time of at least 10 seconds must be given which allows confirming that they are operative when the desired trip is provoked.
A table will be filled in checking that all the possibilities operate.
Trips allowed after reclosing
After R-1
After R-2
After R-3
After R-4
After MANUAL
CLOSING
PHASE
Instant./Timed
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
NEUTRAL
Instantaneous
/Timed
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
SENSITIVE
NEUTRAL
Instant./Timed
UNBALANCE
Instant./Timed
YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
Enabling of reclosings
It is started from all the reclosings as allowed and it is continued disabling some of them, checking that they do not operate after the corresponding trips.
Reclosings allowed after trip
R-1
R-2
R-3
R-4
Phase
Instantaneous
/Timed
NEUTRAL
Instantaneous
/Timed
YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO
SENSITIVE
NEUTRAL
Instantaneous
/Timed
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
UNBALANCE
Instantaneous/
Timed
BROKEN
CONDUC
TOR
EXTERNAL
PROTECTION
YES NO YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO YES NO
YES NO YES NO YES NO
XX.5.3 Tests with/without reference voltage
The waiting time of the reference voltage is set to a lower value than the reclosing time.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 320
19BRECEPTION TESTS
During a reclosing cycle the Vref. is taken away and it is checked that after the waiting time set the cycle is interrupted and it moves on to definitive trip (the time to reach Definitive trip since the breaker opens is measured in order to check the correct operation of the recloser).
XX.5.4 Recloser locking test
It is checked that the recloser does not perform the reclosings when:
The external contact RECLOSER LOCKING is closed.
The number of trips is exceeded in the time set (setting “Excessive number of trips”). This parameter can be seen only in the console. In these cases the output “locked recloser” is activated and the recloser goes to the status
Definitive trip and activates its corresponding signal.
It is disengaged through the push-button R.
It is disengaged through the control command.
It is disengaged through the protection command.
In the three cases the output “Locked recloser” must be activated.
XX.5.5 Time measurements
Recloser time
It is measured the time, from the breaker opening until the breaker closing command. It must coincide with the programmed time. The times to be programmed are up to the operator, but it is recommended to test the minimum and maximum allowed.
Reclaim time
It is measured the time while the output cancellation of instantaneous is activated (if it is programmed) which is coincident with the reclaim time after a reclosing. The times to be programmed are up to the operator but it is recommended to test the minimum and maximum allowed.
XX.6. COIL SUPERVISION
It is an automatism integrated by 4 inputs and 2 outputs.
Inputs
Trip circuit with breaker open
Trip circuit with breaker closed
Closing circuit with breaker open
Closing circuit with breaker closed
Outputs
Trip circuit failure
Closing circuit failure
With the breaker closed if the input “Closing circuit with breaker closed” is deactivated, after 20 seconds a closing circuit failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
With the breaker closed if the input “Trip circuit with breaker closed” is deactivated, after 20 seconds a trip circuit failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
With the breaker open if the input “Closing circuit with breaker open” is deactivated, after 20 seconds a closing circuit failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
With the breaker open if the input “Trip circuit with breaker open” is deactivated, after 20 seconds a trip circuit failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 321
19BRECEPTION TESTS
XX.7. CHECKING OF THE DISPLAY AND CLOCK OPERATION
Connect the relay to the power supply. Check that the bicolor led
Ok/F is shown in green. On the display it must appear the following text:
PL70XY
Cod /vers
XY defines the model family (for example IT).Cod indicates the 3 first digits of the model commercial code, vers indicates the firmware version. By pressing INTRO it should appear
SEE TIME
By pressing INTRO again there will appear the date on the first row of the display and the time, the unit has, will appear on the second row. Check that the seconds digits change.
##/##/##
##:##:##
Turn off the unit and wait 1 min. Return to “See time” and check that the time indicates 1 min more than when it was turn off, which indicates that the battery is working well.
Press ESC. It should be seen
SEE TIME
Press ESC. It should be seen again
PL70XY
Cod /vers
XX.8. TIME SETTING OF THE UNIT
Press the key ‘Synchronize’ shown on the upper part of the “Status”, in the Protection console. A window with the PC time and date will appear.
Press OK and check that the relay receives the date/hour which has been sent.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual 322
19BRECEPTION TESTS
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel + 34 944 039 600
Fax +34 944 039 679 [email protected]
Ingeteam Technology S.A.
PL70 User Manual
Ingeteam Technology, S.A.
www.ingeteam.com
323
